Home

GENESYS 2004 Enterprise Simulation

1. The line segment example was prepared at two frequency points All graphs and explanations given here used the first frequency point 15 GHz The second point is 30 EMPOWER Viewer and Antenna Patterns GHz and the corresponding segment length is a half of the wavelength You may display results at 30 GHz by clicking the button and then choosing the views of your choice MultiMode Viewer Data This example illustrates the eigenwave multi mode excitation capabilities of EMPOWER A three conductor coupled microstrip line segment from Farr Chan Mittra 1986 is described in the schematic file LNMIT3 WSP Three mictostrips are 1 mm wide and 0 2 mm apart They ate on a 1 mm substrate with relative permitivity of 10 The segment is 8 mm long The structure has three modally coupled inputs at opposite segment sides We expect at least three propagating modes Load the example in GENESYS The listing file Right Click on the EMPOWER simulation in the Workspace Window and select Show Listing File gives information about the propagating waves The first eigenmode is an even mode with integral current distribution pattern the second eigenmode is odd pattern 0 and the third one is again even pattern To excite the odd mode as an example select Generate viewer data and enter 2 in the Mode Number to Excite box of the EMPOWER properties dialog Run the viewer A snapshot of the
2. DBHM P2 6 100 0003 MHz 4 7 100 0006 MHz 1 8 100 0006 MHz ad 99 9958 99 9975 99 9992 100 0008 DBM P2 TTE 100 0025 100 0042 1 10 MHz 50 1588 2 10 0003 MHz 170 3546 3 90 0003 MHz 169 3575 4 99 9997 MHZ 169 2115 5 100 MHz 36 6297 167 4957 166 7975 1668 7975 Fig 4 Spectrum of the double sideband DSB noise with Nn 10 The option hb onesidenoise defines that the NSC will be added only at the upper side of each DSC Will spectrum Workspace HB2noise template Spectrum 1 10 MHz 50 1588 2 10 0003 MHz 168 802 3 90 0003 MHz 167 4307 4 100 MHz 36 6297 5 100 0008 MHz 168 8823 D 99 9999 100 0007 100 0016 Fig 5 Spectrum in vicinity of a DSC Nn 1 58 HARBEC DC amp Harmonic Balance W spectrum Workspace HBZnoise template EC Api xl Spectrum 20 N N N 1 10 MHz ARE Sue El SEE 2 10 0003 MHz 26 318 168 802 k 1 3 900005MMz 401 167 4307 4 100 MHz 60 366297 y 5 100 0003 MHz o 1688823 6 100 0003 WHz aw H 168 8823 120 7 100 0006 MHz 168 5823 140 T 1 am _ 5 A o 480 3 ALIN 98 5961 99 9978 99 9995 100 0011 100 0028 100 0045 e DBMP1 m DBM P2 Fig 5 Spectrum in vi
3. seen 69 Vetilog A Tuta vita ta e Id c meat dn edo s 69 Verilog A Reference c r RR ani S RR eed aen 71 Verilog A Reterence OM irira eee nime ae 71 Preprocessor inssin a a E E A R A E 71 ata Types and Parametets a ee beet a ettet 73 Analog Block e tetto eee ele v M M c ee ie Hen 76 Analog Functions 2 oce te teet tU qt a be entail niea te ERES be 82 System tasks and functions ph e Re E etes 83 Eagleware Verlor A Extensions 22e egt RU at adi 84 System Models too pret ER tdt dani 87 A nao au pe UAR TORO UR te TR EIER ID EU RD RR aati andes 87 Dialog Box References ain eao SA pA aisla ibid 88 System Simulation Parameters General Tab seen 88 System Simulation Parameters Paths Tab 89 System Simulation Parameters Calculate Tab see 90 System Simulation Parameters Composite Spectrum Tab sss 94 System Simulation Parameters Options Tab seen 97 How it A TN 100 AMP i ost epi ned i p rd arte e e REI ri ee 100 Table Of Contents Channel 3 tr e dd ii 104 GODetefiGy xa ioci ord npn e qup abn once torte egeret e D ie ate ta tees 106 Tatetmods amp Haiti e e ette ettet ee eto a E RR 108 MIXTIS neci T TAE 113 Broadband Noise eee o e hie onl etel eru 116 Pie 117 QUP TS k an a a A ds x Ati 121 Level Diagt tns 5 55 ten e Ree A RD UE ES 121 Composite Spectrum citet a nw ro RI ROO ERU ROT RU EROS 122 Identifying Spectral Ofiein an ari 124 Sourc
4. HBeror 328721e0 8 ERENT CONVERGED Errureo HARBEC DC amp Harmonic Balance Having established a topology with a broken feedback loop we perform a two port linear analysis on the oscillator to determine if oscillation is possible given the circuit and active device gain In analyzing our circuit at the desired output frequency two conditions must be met that are required but not necessarily sufficient to ensure oscillation At the desired output frequency the open circuit gain must be greater or equal to one 1 and the phase shift is a multiple of 27Un n 360 degrees where n is an integer including zero GENESYS 2003 03 Closed Workspace Harbec Osc Example EX Zoe Edt yew Workspace acions Took Schematic Synthesis window Hep a 36M 28 6 CT 93444 m rA x h T 4949 Lumped Linear Nonlinear T Line Coax Microstrip Slabline Swipline Coplenar Wave System More x a Value 5 4 cca EJ cP c Ct 4 10C 1 1616 3 A c c2 a VPROBE 1 IFOSCOOS 144629 Bypass C 1061 03 pF HBerror 8 332302 030 ExteEXIT CONVERGED Errcreo Using the tuning option in GENESYS allows for the exact selection of circuit elements to ensure a gain margin of 71 and phase shift of zero degrees at the desired frequency output Considering the fact that our closed loop requires the connection of both ports it is helpful to view the return loss at the ports of our net
5. We are starting with 3 sample points in the range 8 11 GHz This will place 1 point at 8 9 5 the supposed resonance and 11 GHz Click the Recalculate Now button This launches EMPOWER to simulate the layout Note While EMPOWER is calculating a window similar to the one in below will be shown This window shows the current status throughout the calculation mode For mote details on this window see the Basics Console section WPEM1 EMPOWER Log Running Workspace layonly Press Escape to stop the EMPOWER run EM IER Planar 3D EM Simulator Version 7 00 lt C 1998 99 Eagleware Corp POW FREQ 11888 MHz Mode lt DISC gt View lt X gt Loss X gt Thin lt xX gt S anc YZ MIRR Estim time 08 88 81 Each frq 66 40 01 Estim RAM 3 3 ee Starting Line Analysis to De embed PORT 1 see 9588 MHz Zo 44 932 G i28B 938 11808 MHz Zo 45 048 G i326 051 wee Starting Discontinuity Analysis 88808 MHz S11 1 46 lt 295 S 21 5 92 lt 204 9506 MHz S11 263 lt 1 69 S21 16 2 lt 95 8 249 Simulation Viewing Results 250 After EMPOWER simulation of the layout the data must be displayed in GENESYS This is done by creating a Data Output such as a Rectangular Graph To create a rectangular graph in this workspace 1 Right click on Outputs in the Workspace Window and Select Add Rectangular Graph from the menu Accept the default name Graph1 2 Select EM1 Stub for Default Simulation Data
6. M ees 32 S Parametet B sica n NUR ROO a TOUR jetta ns NARI RR RIDERE 32 Stability o uar t EE RETOUR A A A 34 Matching ou if 35 GMAX and MSG odoltianidtudatunatudaidenu en datuncqudau mud desides 36 The Unilateral Case aede tpe npe aa 37 sain OHCles i ere stt e EH OH a AIT ne pb rte ees 37 NOR m 38 Smith Chart xe ete diete ee da d ede m UR iit a ANE e ERES 39 DG Analysis OVetview tad ett A atin AER NE d ed 41 DC Amalysis PFODeFUES cruda 41 Harm onic Balance Overview cess ener ii iii 43 Table Of Contents FLARBEG OJlorns nocte ida 44 HARBEG Popup Menu utet Aa cti 51 Entering Nonlinear Models a aeter ep ee a eate oe EE e nn 52 Typical Harmonic Balance Measurements eese entente 53 COImprt SSiO Bm e rea ree aa 53 Solving Gonverpence 188068 ete HO UR RE TONNEN Ud 53 Optimizing Simulation Performance coccion reee 54 Jacobian Calculation AAA 54 Order vs Accuracy and Ti it AR rop TERIS 54 Amplitude Stepplhg uae ea ER Ra oq stew RR RR 55 Keylor Subspace Iterations sis eue see diee ied iia 55 Nonlinear Noise Analysis dactiisetetos iio decipi o a Rr Ote dien 55 Oscillator Design Overviews ic une a AA A 60 Motorola LDMOS teret eet te ei tete E I e 65 Advanced Modeling Kit Overview ed aaa diente 67 Using the Additional AMK Models eene tentent tentent 67 Creating New Vetilog A Models et eer tee er e t ree ec 68 Customizing Built In Nonlinear Models
7. eene teens 333 De Embedding Algorithm tit tete titi itte beet eei tu efe icta tbe tae 335 ig VI SW isda A A dia 337 Text Elles ys Binary Biles cit a cid Et da 338 Pile Extensions innein a o AA AA A 338 EMV EMPOWER Viewer Piles 2p poU eh anni nailed 339 JT L2 La Gine Data Files ui eee ea eme 339 TT lasting Elles niece te A REPRE AR ts 340 PEX Curtent Viewer Data Files ea ARE ERR AR awh dee 341 RI R2 Rn Pott Impedance Tiles eterne ERR RI RAE 341 RGE Line Data Flia 342 RX Frequency vs Impedance Files erret o acp OD IRE PR DERE ROREA 342 o Parameter Files umore amet e Rd ee anoint 342 AXI PE Topolog Fies o terream dm praem D ED 343 WSP Workspace Files esee Reap eU ud 343 WY Parameter les ere t dede 343 S SS cRG ete Backup Files ep OD SED e re 343 General Backetound zz 2o da qaae ated ao ARD ERG 359 The Method of Litres tre E RD ERR era RA a pe ttes 360 Richatdson s ExtrapolatiOnocs dace Sed Une Beet isa 360 Syrimetty PrOCesSInE s sa aiigentin io dealers 361 EMPOWER Engine Theory and Algorithms cocino 361 Test Examples a d Comparisons nete tee Ao e AU Rt Aes 362 xi Overview GENESYS supports several different types of simulations allowing the exploration of a complete range of circuit performance e DC Simulation nonlinear HARBEC e Linear S Parameter Simulation e Planar 3D Electromagnetic EM Simulation EMPOWER e Harmonic Balance Simulation nonlinear HARBEC
8. See the Cascaded Noise Figure measurement to determine which types of signals are included or ignored in this measurement Values Real value numeric Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Descipion Result Type DB AN stage noise figure in dB MAG AN numeric value of the stage noise figure Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield DB AN DB AN DB AN MAG AN MAG AN Not available on Smith Chart Cascaded Gain CGAIN This measurement is the cascaded gain of the main channel along the specified path The Cascaded Gain is the difference between the Desired Channel Power measurement at the nth stage minus the Desited Channel Power measurement at the input as shown by CGAIN n DCP n DCP 0 dB where n stage number The main channel is defined by the Channel Frequency for the selected path and the system analysis Channel Measutement Bandwidth See the Desired Channel Power measurement to determine which types of signals are included or ignored in this measurement Values Real value numeric Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type DB CGAIN cascaded gain in dB Real 209 Simulation MAG CGAIN numeric value of t
9. Y Include Signal Signal Type cw Narrow New Custom Source with Phase Noise View Edit Center Frequency 100 MHz f Step and Repeat Signal 4 Bandwidth CERED MHz Frequency Offset 1 MHz Power Average 50 dBm Amplitude Offset 0 dB Phase Shit 0 E Phase Offset Ds Number of Signals 2 Number of Simulation Points fi MFG CN AIDE Start Frequency fe MHz Power 75 dBm Hz Stop Frequency ioo MHz Number of Points p L Cancel Apply Help 6 Setthe Signal Type to CW Natrow The Center Frequency to 100 MHz and the Power Average to 50 dBm 7 Click OK to accept the newly created soutce 19 Simulation System Simulation Parameters xi General Paths Calculate Composite Spectrum Options Desin To Simulate SA M nt Bandwidth e Nominal Impedance 50 Ohms Channel fi MHz You must enter the channel bandwidth here before simulation Resets Now IV Automatic Recalculation Sources NNI escis F v 100 MHz 50 dBm 0 Deg 1 Pts Cancel Arpy nee 8 Click OK to accept the system simulation parameters SPECTRASYS will automatically calculate 9 Right click on the Outputs tab in the workspace window 10 Select Add Rectangular Graph Enter the name Output Spectrum 11 Click Measurement wizard to add a
10. 269 Simulation Console Window 270 BP EM1 EMPOWER Log Running Workspace layonly Press Escape to stop the EMPOWER run R Planar 3D EM Simulator Version 7 66 C 1998 99 Eagleware Corp EMPOWE FREQ 11888 MHz gt Mode lt DISC gt UiewCW Loss lt X Thin lt X gt Symm YZ MIRR Estim time 88 08 01 Each frq 00 00 01 Estim RAM 346K see Starting Line Analysis to De embed PORT 1 see 9508 MHz Zo 44 932 G i288 938 11888 MHz Zo 45 040 G i326 51 see Starting Discontinuity Analysis see 88808 MHz S11 1 46 lt 295 S21 5 92 lt 284 9508 MHz S11 8 263 lt 1 69 S21 16 2 lt 95 8 The window above is shown when EMPOWER is running The objects on the second line are FREQ The current calculation frequency Mode DISC discontinuity LINE line analysis or LN D both View Checked if viewer data is to be generated Loss Checked if physical loss is being modeled Thin Checked if thinning is enabled Symm Displays the type of symmetry possessed by the circuit being analyzed This option can be XZ YZ Mirror 2 way mirror or 1800 rotational The objects on the third line are Estim Time The estimated total time to complete the current calculation mode Each frq The estimated calculation time per frequency in the current mode Estim RAM The estimated total memory required fot the current simulation The fourth line displays the simulation time of the cutrent frequency and symmetry plus the
11. See Microstrip Line fot a complete example which examines deembedding Until now all ports which we have looked at have been single mode ports Single mode ports act just like regular nodes in SUPERSTAR and external components can be added EMPOWER External Ports directly to these ports EMPOWER also supports external multimode ports where two EMPorts are close enough together that they are coupled This circuit uses multimode ports with ports 1 2 and 3 being a 3 mode pott 4 being a normal single mode port and ports 5 and 6 being a 2 mode port yl Multimode ports have the following features e They much more accurately characterize the performance of a network with two or more lines close together on one wall e They cannot be used like normal SUPERSTAR nodes They can only be connected to other multimode ports including multi mode lines and multimode EMPOWER data Further any multi mode elements connected together must have the same number of modes for each port Caution Do not connect standard lumped elements to a multimode port The results will not be cortect If you will be connecting directly to
12. The basic operation of SPECTRASYS involves the propagation of individual source spectta and all of their derived products intermods harmonics etc to every node in the system These spectrums will keep propagating until no additional spectrums are created For instance any new inputs arriving at the input of an amplifier will cause intermods and harmonics to be created at the amplifier output at that particular time If additional signals arrive at the amplifier input at a future time then new intermods harmonics and other spurious products will be created at the amplifier output This process continues until no additional spectrums ate created If loops exist in the system schematic then the output from one element will feed the input of the next element and spectrum propagation could continue forever unless special features are placed within the software to limit spectral creation in this infinite loop SPECTRASYS has special features to control loops and limit the total number of created spectrums Loops Elements in parallel parallel amplifiers connected via a 2 way splitter at the input and combined back together with a 2 way combiner at the output can cause spectrums to be created that will propagate around this parallel path or loop If the gain of the amplifier is greater than its reverse isolation the spectrums will keep on growing as they travel around the path and will never die out we would have an oscillator The key point h
13. Therefore when a network is installed in a system with source and loads equal to the reference impedance S21 is the network transducer power gain in decibels Because S11 and S22 of a network are not in general zero a portion of the available source power is teflected from the network input and is dissipated in the source The insertion of a lossless matching network at the input and or output of the network could increase the gain of the overall system if reflections toward the source were reduced Shown below is a two port network with lossless matching networks inserted between the network and the source and load GMAX and MSG When the input and output networks are simultaneously designed for maximum gain there is no reflection at the source or load The maximum transducer power gain Gmax is given by Gma Sa Si2 K sqrt K 1 The maximum stable gain MSG is defined as Gmax with K 1 Therefore MSG S21 S12 A GENESYS plot of GMAX shows Gmax when K gt 1 and MSG when K lt 1 Linear Simulation Again acheiving this maximum gain requires that the input network is designed such that Rs is the complex conjugate of S11 and Rr is the complex conjugate of S22 GENESYS returns the required reflection coefficients impedance and admittance for the input and output networks as GM1 GM2 ZM1 ZM2 YM1 and YM2 respectively The Unilateral Case Historically to simplify the complex equation for Gt in the previou
14. processed results TUNEBP Linearl Filter DB S21 Overrides the workspace Shows the dB magnitude of S21 from the Linearl simulation of the Filter design from workspace TUNEBP Data1 A Show all input admittances from a Link to data file Note that in this case the design name is not required Using Equation Results post processing 184 Anywhere that a measurement is used post processed equation variables can be used The format is EQUATIONS variableName where variableName is a variable from the equations for that workspace For example EQUATIONS X uses variable X from the global equations A workspace name can also be used TUNEBP EQUATIONS Y shows vatiable Y from the global equations of workspace TUNEBP Inline equations can also be used anywhere a measurement can be used Start the measurement with to indicate an inline equation For example MAG V1 MAG V2 will use the difference of V1 and V2 Notice that as in the global equations the periods and the operators MAG ate required for inline equations This measurement is actually equivalent to the following equations USING MoeasurementContext TEMP MAG V1 MAG V2 and then requesting the measurement EQUATIONS TEMP where MeasurementContext is the Default Simulation Data specified in the measurement dialog Measurements Linear S Parameters This S parameter or scattering parameter measurements are complex functions of fr
15. 29 Linear Simulation Overview Linear simulation calculates S parameters and noise parameters of a circuit It is a small signal analysis that assumes that the circuit is operating in the linear region Active devices such as transistors and diodes can be modeled either with S parameters measured ot provided by a manufacturer or a nonlinear model requires HARBEC If a nonlinear model is used GENESYS automatically runs a DC analysis to determine the circuit operating point linearizes the nonlinear circuit around the operating point and uses that linear model in the analysis To add a linear simulation 1 Right click the Simulation Data node on the Workspace Window 2 Select Add Linear Simulation 3 Complete the Linear Simulation Properties dialog 4 Adda graph or other output and a measurement to see the results See also Measurements later in this manual Outputs Overview User s Guide Linear Simulation Properties To open double click or create a Linear Simulation Linear Simulation Properties x M Frequency Range Start Frequency MHz 2000 l Cancel Stop Frequency MHz 3000 d Help M Type Of Sweep Linear Number of Points 101 0 Factory Defaults dd C Log Points Decade 101 C Linear Step Size MHz o List of Frequencies MHz Glear List Temperature 27 0 ec Frequency Range 31 Simulation 32 e Start Frequency The lower boun
16. Display Spectrum and Waveform Graphs Have the HarBEC simulation produce a frequency domain and time domain representation of the output signal HARBEC Popup Menu By right clicking on the HARBEC simulation icon on the wotkspace window the following menu appeats Jf GENESYS V7 5 Simple Detector Workspace Simple Detector D ES File Edi View Workspace Actions Tools Schematic Synthesis Window Help laj x 0560 De 2 6 Qqe Bk E a o il e A Lumped Linear Nonlinear T Line Coax Microstrip Slabline Stripline Wave Bias 0 7 5 D mm mmi i lx Ey Designs Models bel Simple Detector Layout Layout B E Simulations Data DEI x Vdet L1 YDC 0 138 Y L 100nH Cblock C 1000 pF Port 1 P F 21000 MHz 14 bl RN EU A s Rename g Delete This Simulation Data Rdet R 2500 ohm Cdet C 100pF B Recalculate now Ba C Mark results up to date Automatically Calculate E v Active for pt Yield Write all internal files p Delete intemal simulation data f rcr Properties Bead ShowHarBEC Monitor Window Rename Allows the name of the icon to be changed Delete This Simulation Data Removes the icon and all of its associated data from the system Recalculate Now Statts a simulation if required If the simulation is up to date no changes have been made to the design since the last simulation
17. Effective Noise Input Temperature NFT The Effective Noise Input Temperature is a real function of frequency and is available for 2 port networks only The effective noise temperature is defined in terms of the noise figure NF and a standard temperature To in degrees Kelvin as NFT T NF 1 where To 300 degrees Kelvin Values Real value versus frequency Simulations Linear Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators none Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield NFT noise temperature in degrees Kelvin noise temperature in degrees Kelvin Not available on Smith Chart Normalized Noise Resistance RN The Normalized Noise Resistance measurement is a real function of frequency and is available for 2 port networks only 198 Measurements Linear The noise resistance is normalized with respect to the input impedance of the network Zo See the definition of Nosie Figure NE for a discussion of Rx Values Real value versus frequency Simulations Linear Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operatots none Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield RN noise resistance noise resistance Not available on Smith Chart Reference Impedance ZPORTI The reference impedance measurements are complex functions of fre
18. e Spectral Domain System Simulation SPECTRASYS Additionally the following items are available in Simulations Data e Parameter Sweep e Link To Data File e TESTLINK Covered in the User s Guide Several of these capabilities work together EM co simulates with either the nonlineat ot linear circuit simulator combining the accuracy of EM analysis with the generality and speed of circuit simulation Parameters sweeps can be used with DC linear nonlinear and system simulation as well as with other sweeps Frequency resistance substrate height and DC supply level are just a few of the parameters that are typically swept All of these simulations can be added to a workspace by right clicking the Simulations Data node on the Workspace Window Often we at Eagleware ate asked which simulation method should be used in a particular circuit Linear SUPERSTAR Nonlinear HARBEC SPICE by exporting Electromagnetic EMPOWER SPECTRASYS For most circuits you will use a combination of the different simulations We have developed several guidelines that should simplify the decision for most applications First each method has benefits and drawbacks Simulation Benefits Drawbacks Extremely fast Time domain Schematic ot netlist entry Schematic ot netlist entry Starting waveforms e g oscillator startup Real time tuning of circuits Uses manufacturer provided measured data DC biasing informa
19. eene 252 Simulating the Layout ee ro pe ada 254 Lump d Elements entidad n e Ir uu i iia 255 Real Time TUS aiii BO RB UR RUE NEU TI UU 256 ONEVIEW etie dr e Uo n t testi eU n A obti n a dg EDO P UU aiU 257 21D SIMULATORS piaia listed 257 3 D SIMULATORS cara aia 257 2 1 2 D SIMUENATONRS tamm i n dd e 257 Basic Greotnietty eir AERE EA sous EU FUE seas 257 WS Gi esi dacs 261 Viaboles and Directed Dots ne eet a on te RR OR ED 264 BUM POLS es oett Sov iO 265 EMPOWER Opi ONS ataca 265 Era a A E E OER O E qe T EA eA te BRE drm 265 Miewet Fat Field Tabzz diee Rt eene ede al Den te EROR 267 Advanced Tabs ict ee RU te t e ERU i RE i ORC ed 268 Console Window tette ettet rte tete tee te aea te P re UR dee 270 Batch RUS a dictada 271 OVERVIEW itn ehe RI TA ORTHO UC I N RD UU A e SOR CUT ERU I LOADER sed 273 Gell SiZe T M 273 Maximum Critical Frequency aie RO EUREN d Eee 274 suni E 274 DEIS Outed eee A ar I nee RD A ep UE 275 Wall amp Coyet SPACE iu ee RP a Re on aia 275 COVE TYPE rinie maT R A EEI NER E A EN NE EA R a 276 Lossy Aitaly sisi ertt etc iw e OE EEEE E NEN 276 Viewer Dd 276 Slot Ty Pe SCT ii eme ede cre ee gate ERE ORE NER D Dee 277 Preferred Cell Gout aiio noce pet maso E 277 Table Of Contents Thick Metal tiet eee ia a don dene 279 OVERVIEW ties ia 281 Placing Extertial DOS amina iaa tee e e qiie ne epa e errare ied 281 BMBPBOrt
20. we 158 onc 154 Newton Raphson sse 54 OSCILLATOR 44 60 NP assets 179 181 Oscillator Design conocen 32 NFMIN 179 181 Oscillator Walkthrough 60 NE OP vo GR HUE 160 Out of bounds 148 INET iiis OE RORIS 179 E end 144 NMEA Std naci ada 179 181 Output Equations 5 caseros 150 No Deembedding eter 265 Output Third Order Intercept 233 Noise Optimal impedance esse 179 P Noise 116 179 Noise Circles 38 179 185 Pads zieht e HAE 297 Noise correlation esee 160 179 Parameter Sweep 53 139 Noise Data sese 160 Parameter Sweep Properties ei 199 noise figure decrease 133 ParametetS cocos 165 179 Non linear niece 1 41 IParasttics Quebec e e e 1 Nonlinear Device Library 163 Partial Dielectric Loading 323 Nonlinear Device Models 157 175 Patel ATEO 281 Nonlinear JFET Le 176 e a A 89 120 Nonlinear Measurements 181 Path Frequency tete inert 118 Nonlinear MESFET Transistors s 176 Path Pecos 120 Simulation 368 Percent Noise Figure sss Percent Third Order Intermod Petmeability ecce ttem a tenente 315 316 Permittivity p Phase Noise 4 ent etr ie PI148 Plana ciet eta PLX PLX text file Port Impedance Port Nutmbetiz tance eem RHONE Port Perinatal 281 297 Ports 247 261 265 284 296 298 299 326
21. 3 RES RC3216 1206 Chip Resistor SM782 LIB ange ja CAP C1608 0603 Chip Capacitor SM782 LIB ge 5 SGND SIGNAL COPLANAR SOmil SAMPLELIB Chi e FET SOT23 3 pin SOT SM782 LIB he BIP SOT23 3 pin SOT SM782 LIB g S TLE TRANSMISSION LINE 120x25mil SAMPLE LIB ange iS TRF SO4W wide 4 pin SOIC SM782LIB Change 10 XTL HC6 Quartz Crystal LEADED LIB Chang 11 TWO SOT23 3 pin SOT SM782 LIB Change 112 CGA COAXIAL LANDING 100x50mil SAMPLE LIB hange 13 cui COAXIAL LANDING 100x50mil SAMPLE LIB ange 14 CPL COUPLED TRL 120x25mil S 15mil SAMPLELIB Change 15 GYR SO4W wide 4 pin SOIC SM782LIB Change 16 MUI SO4W wide 4 pin SOIC SM782 LIB ange OPA LF347 SAMPLE LIB hange y Current Table Default tbl Save Table As Load Table 14 The next step is center the components on the PWB This is done by selecting the MFilter1_Lay Layout window and from the Edit menu select Select All 351 might not be lined up exactly on grid These can be placed on grid by placing the mouse over the center of one of the bottom capacitor pads and dragging the entire filter structure up to the nearest grid line all parts must be selected in order layout should now be centered on the PWB However the transmissions lines to drag the entire filter Then from the Layout menu select Connect Selected Parts and then Center Selected on Page Then click the zoom maximize button crossed arrows The Simulation RR RO NON
22. A 35 in a z iu 5 E fra a v in a 2150 2250 Freq MHz DB S11 4 MFilter1 EM1 DB S21 MFitter1 EM1 DB S11 23 Now is the the time to see the true power of Eaglewate s Co Simulation Co Simulation allows your to tune your filter in real time without having to re run EMPOWER Advanced M FILTER Example the EM simulation In other words you are able to tune your capacitor values without re running EMPOWER Since the response has shifted down in frequency we will need to decrease the amount of capacitance in all caps We can manually change the capacitor values by tuning them in the tune window TE GENESYS File Edit View Workspace Actions oe dj mejo d xd CAP1__MFILTER1 AP2 MFILTER1 24 Defaut Simator Data or Equstors O Measurement Op Target Weight Min Max z 30 However we can use the optimizer to tune the filter for us We need to open up the optimization targets titled MFilter1 located under the Optimizations folder and change the Default Simulation Data or Equations to MFilter1 EM1 Then optimize the circuit by selecting Optimize Now and Automatic M st 1 2100 2300 I2 s21 lt 30 1 1950 2025 I3 sz lt 30 1 2375 2450 1 I5 1 B 1 1 E 1 EN 1 o 1 zl lt Measurement Wizard W Equatio
23. Absolute Tolerance fte12 Maximum Amplitude Step 100 to Minimum Amplitude Step oo o Frequency Resolution E Hz Reuse Jacobian at Most 1000 Times Full Jacobian Automatic bai M Use Previous Solution As Starting Point Set All Freqs as Harmonics of 1 MHz Force 1 D FFT allow pseudo harmonic FFT calculation Allow non binary FFT FFT Use Krylov Subspace Method Special Options cancel 5 e Advanced Tab Convergence Parameters Refer to Optimizing Simulation Performance in the User Manual for details on the convergence process and the use of the parameters described below Relative Tolerance The relative accuracy to which the sum of node currents must sum to zero to achieve harmonic balance convergence The simulator is converged if fot all frequencies and all nodes the ratio of the vector sum of the currents into a given node cutrents to the sum of magnitudes of the current entering that node is less than the specified relative tolerance Absolute Tolerance The absolute accuracy to which the sum of node currents must sum to zero to achieve harmonic balance convergence The simulator is converged if the magnitude of the vector sum of the currents entering all node at all frequencies is less than the specified absolute tolerance 47 Simulation 48 Maximum Amplitude Step The highest amount that the simulator will increase the amplitude of the independ
24. Add Optimization j i Add Single Part Model Add Script Add Spice Model Link Add Substrate eee Add Yield Add Folder 2 Find the NPN Bipolar Gummel Poon model on the Nonlineat toolbar or in the parts picker and place it in the schematic 3 Adda DC Current Source Change the Designator to IB and reference a vatiable for the DC Current by typing in IDC Simulation DC Analysis Properties Xx peces LR Cancel Help Use previous solution as starting point IV Automatic Recalculation Temperature 27 0 ec 4 Adda Current Probe Ammeter Change the Designator to IC 5 Add a Signal Ground Change the Designator to VC and reference a variable for the DC Voltage by typing in V Note You may get some error messages since we have only referenced some vatiables and haven t created them yet 6 Create and equation block using the New button on the workspace tree and find Add Equations Define tunable variables V 1 and IDC 5e 6 Any etror messages should disappear W Equationi Workspace HB Walkthru i l E3 ns Y 1 IDC 5e 6 7 The schematic should look as follows DC cutves schematic Walkthrough DC Linear HARBEC D NPN Sch Workspace HB Walkthru OF x IDC 500e 8 A a wb IDC 5e 6 A IDC Az 8 Create a DC analysis using the New button and find Add DC Analysis un
25. C calculate Nonlinear Noise Adds Noise Tone Having set the range for search we are ready to perform an analysis Select the Update Icon from the GENESYS toolbar to perform an Harmonic Balance simulation To view the results of out simulation add a rectangular graph from the Outputs file in the GENESYS Workspace Window By double clicking on the graph or alternately selecting properties from a right mouse click select the Measurement Wizard to help place the spectrum data on the graph For Harmonic Balance simulations we are able to select from a range of node voltages branch currents and potts 64 HARBEC Options General Advanced Oscillator Note You must have an oscillator port on the schematic to use these features Initial Frequency Minimum Search 100 MHz Maximum Search 200 MHz Number Of Points 1000 8 Use Oscillator Solver Quse Oscillator Port Frequency And Amplitude As Specified v Qisplay Spectrum And Waveform Graphs Ce HARBEC DC amp Harmonic Balance Node or port waveforms are also available via the Measurement Wizard This may aide in viewing the distortion and voltage levels at various nodes in the circuit Motorola LDMOS The Motorola LDMOS library is now built into GENESYS To add a Motorola LDMOS model to a schematic 1 Click More on the Schematic Toolbar Qu ge SS Place the part on the schematic Choose a Builtin Motorola LDMOS Category Selec
26. However since EMPOWER uses mode space to model coupled line connections this is less of a problem that it would be with other simulators Losses in the connecting lines are not modelled Decomposition can be applied to circuits with parts which are connected via single or multiple transmission lines Some typical circuits which can be broken apart are shown below In each of the circuits the unshaded areas ate simulated individually The pieces are then combined using multi mode transmission lines to connect the pieces representing the lines in the shaded area 289 Simulation Ex om ep ad Spiral Inductor tt Interdigital Meander Line Filter For decomposition to be possible you must be able to break the circuit down into rectangular areas which ate interconnected with transmission lines For example the spiral inductor above is broken down into four rectangular areas one for each corner These sections are then connected with multi mode transmission lines In each of the circuits above the three main advantages of decomposition can be seen e The lengths of the connecting transmission lines can be varied In the spiral inductor this allows the size of the spiral and the inductance to be tuned or optimized in GENESYS e Far fewer points need to be analyzed This is because each of the pieces is simpler and interpolation works well For example in the edge coupled filter each of the p
27. Level Below EU Bm Strongest Signal Only C AllSignals Within 50 dBc of Strongest Frequency Below MEET Deed EEA Freq Offset From Channel fi 00 MHz Frequency Above MHz E Measurement Bandwidth fi MHz Frequency Above and Below are optional This info is only used by the OCF and OCP The default Frequency Below is 0 and the Offset Channel Frequency and Power Frequency Above defaults to 5x Max Source measurements gt Range Warning for Mixer Multiplier etc Tolerance Range fe dB M Maximum Number of Spectrums To Generate Max Spectrums Factory Defaults When these parameters are used in conjunction with the Offset Channel Frequency and Offset Channel Power measurements the user is able to determine the integrated channel powet for an atbitrary channel relative to the main channel Furthermore both the Freq Offset from Channel and the Measurement Bandwidth parameters can be made tunable by placing a in front the parameter to be tuned For example perhaps you would like to determine the power of some signal at 100 MHz offset from the main channel The Freq Offset from Channel would be set to 100 MHz and the Measurement Bandwidth could be set to the a user defined bandwidth for example 1 MHz The OCF Offset Channel Frequency measurement could be added to a table to show the user the actual frequency being used for the OCP Offset Channel Powe
28. Note The Calculate Intermods Along Path checkbox must be checked and properly configured in order to make this measurement See the Calculate Intermods Along Path section for information on how to configure these tests See the Desired Channel Power Third Order Intermod Analysis measurement to determine which types of signals are included or ignored in this measurement When calculating intermods along a path in the Manual mode a dedicated IM3 analysis is not created and the normal analysis is also the IM3 analysis pass Remember intermod bandwidth is a function of the governing intermod equation For example if the intermod equation is 2F1 F2 then the intermod bandwidth would be 2BW1 BW2 Note Bandwidths never subtract and will always add The channel bandwidth must be set wide enough to include the entire bandwidth of the intermod to achieve the expected results The Automatic Intermod Mode will set the bandwidth appropriately Values Real value in Watts Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type DBM GIM3P j generated third order intermod power in dBm MAG GIM3P magnitude of the generated third order intermod power in Watts Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield DBM GIM3P DBM GIM3P DBM GIM3P MAG GIM3P MAG GIM3P MAG GIM3P Not avai
29. P RolbtfSlope Parameters Gain user N Reverse OPldB Rolloff slope pee OPSAT om Reverse Isolation for all for intenmode and reverse om hamonics only traveling signals RF Amplifier Model using ideal elements The amplifier operation is as follows 1 Determine Total Input Power The entire input spectrum of the amplifier is integrated to determine the total input power Add Noise Noise is added to the input spectrum The noise may be modified as the amplifier enters compression Determine Amplifier Gain The actual gain of the amplifier will depend on how close the amplifier is to compression and saturation A polynomial curve fit is done between the small signal linear gain curve and the output P1dB and saturation points to determine the actual gain curve of the amplifier Using the input power and the non linear polynomial gain curve the actual gain of the amplifier can be determined Create Intermods and Harmonics Using the non linear parameters of output P1dB Saturation Power IP3 and IP2 intermods and harmonics will be created See the Calculate Intermod and Harmonics section for additional information Frequency Rolloff All signals intermods and harmonics will be attenuated as a function of frequency according to the attenuation slope that begins at the the cornet frequency NOTE Noise will bypass this step and will not be rolled off wi
30. See the Patch Antenna Impedance example for an example of a patch antenna simulation and the Edge Coupled Filter example which uses a reference plane shift The reference plane is shown as an atrow on the layout Additionally when the EMPort is selected Handles appear on the reference plane allowing it to be moved with the mouse Port Number When EMPOWER is run the port numbers specified here correspond to the port numbers in the resulting data These port numbers must be sequential numbers cannot be skipped and Normal ports must always have lowet numbers than non deembedded and internal ports LAYOUT assigns a new port number automatically when an EMPott is placed and the port number is displayed on the layout at the port Width amp Length When placing an external port on the end of a strip type transmission line you should normally leave these at zero so that LAYOUT sizes the port automatically If you want to override the size or for slot type or internal ports you can specify width and length here Note Width and length are measured relative to the line direction so these parameters can appear to be reversed Length is the length in the direction of propagation along the line and width is the width of the strip Layer Specifies the metal layer on which the port is placed Location specifies the edge of the port for external ports and the center of the port for internal ports Line Direction Gives the direction
31. Simulation 240 The examples are completely contained in the EXAMPLES manual Examples which illustrate EMPOWER include e Microstrip Line WSP e Stripline Standard WSP e Spiral Inductor 2 WSP e Box Modes WSP e Film Atten WSP e Edge Coupler WSP e Dual Mode WSP e 8 Way WSP e Edge Coupled WSP e Coupled Stepped Z WSP e Tuned Bandpass WSP e Patch Antenna Impedance WSP The required RAM specified in the Examples manual is the value estimated by EMPOWER They are approximate and are determined by algorithm rather than a test of memoty used The execution times are for a 266 MHz Pentium II with 256Mbytes of RAM operating under Windows 98 In most cases execution time is for the discontinuity mode A boatd layout can be created one of two ways e By starting without a schematic e By starting from an existing schematic The first method starts in the GENESYS Environment by creating a layout without an associated schematic The layout is created by drawing lines and placing footprints in the LAYOUT editor The second method begins in with a schematic and creates a boatd layout based on the schematic objects This method is normally used when a linear simulation using GENESYS has been performed on a schematic and an EMPOWER simulation is desired or when any lumped elements ate needed in the EMPOWER Simulation In addition to the schematic objects any desired LAYOUT objects can be added to the board before simulation For
32. 117 dBc Gaussian to 150 dBc 200 Chan BW Data will be ignoted that is farther than 200 channels away from the center frequency With this 3 element lowpass prototype the attenuation 30 channels from the center will be about 150 dBc Randomize Noise This checkbox enables random noise When enabled random noise will be added around the resulting analyzer sweep In this way the output will be more representative of a typical spectrum analyzer at the expense of additional computation time Add Analyzer Noise This checkbox enables the analyzer noise floor All spectrum analyzers have a limited dynamic range They are typically limited on the upper end by intermods and spurious performance at the internal mixer output On the lower end they are limited by the noise of the analyzer This noise is a function of the internal architecture of the specific spectrum analyzer and the internal RF attenuator The user has the ability to enter a noise floor fot the analyzer to more accurately represent the data that will be measured in the lab Analyzer Noise Floor When the Add Analyzer Noise is checked analyzer noise will be added to the resulting analyzer trace This parameter will also aid the user in correlating the simulation results with what would actually be measured on a spectrum analyzer Limit Frequencies This checkbox enables frequency limiting of the analyzer mode By default the entire spectrum from the Ignore Spectrum F
33. Consequently for systems with large number of nodes the convolution routines used to calculate the analyzer traces alone can be time consuming if the analyzer properties are not optimized If simulation speed is important then using the narrowest filter shape will have the best simulation speed File Size The size of the data file will increase when the analyzer mode is enabled Furthermore the file size can grow rapidly depending on the settings of the analyzer mode For example the smaller the resolution bandwidth the more data points are needed to represent the data the larger the data file will be and most likely the simulation time will increase Analyzer Troubleshooting What does it mean when the signal doesn t seem to be lined up with the integrated spectrum All this means is the frequency resolution isn t small enough to accurately represent the signal of interest If this is the case there are a few things that can be done to increase this resolution First the resolution bandwidth can be reduced If this is inadequate the Limit Frequencies feature should be enabled and the user can specify the Start Stop and Step frequencies used for the analyzer System Simulation Parameters Options Tab This page contains miscellaneous SPECTRASYS options Tip Any of the parameters in this dialog box can be made tunable by placing a in front of the parameter 97 Simulation 98 System Simulation Parame
34. Creating A Modelo etre acp re at ke e ae EO D e atro e re ERE 165 User Model Example A Self Resonant Capacitor seen 167 Model Properties ese ure A Using A Model In SCHEMAX Single Part Models os csset NU avete fte iis e A cad Test Model Detnrtions eei onte ehe Rec eme n AE OVENI EW OR 175 SPICE File Compatibility airis e te te rtr ere eite dei deta 176 Link to Spice File Linear Measurements Nonlinear Measurements minita toa Operatoria Dd AA ER Sample Measurement sno oo gitana etos I E TE Ue aicid Using Non Default Simulation Data Using Equation Results post processing S Patameitetsz anc e An ter Pe iv ou qute deest AAA id 185 HzPatatetets 5 dte aan E 186 Ma PAP Arne tens cscs seca pore dt dA epe ro ir od 186 Table Of Contents VAINA E PE sets 187 Voltage Standing Wave Ratio VSWR Jeera eni ae E AN nennen 188 Input Impedance Admittance ZINI YINI eene tentent nnt 189 Volar Grati 4c eoe tan porem a Re e PROCHE IR REDEANT UE 189 INGis Meastire NMEAS in nto ette a d Ri desea eas 190 Noise Figure NF Minimum Noise Figure NFMIN eee 191 Constant Noise Circles INCL ir ta te eiecti 191 Noise Correlation Matrix Paramotor ee e eee e t E AA ii 192 Simultaneous Match Gamma at Port 1 GM1 seen 193 Simultaneous Match Admittance Impedance at Port i ZMi YMi sse 193 Maximum Available Gain GMAX sse 194 Available G
35. In the circuit theory schematic on the left there are two ports Each port has two terminals with the bottom terminal generally being ground In the EMPOWER illustration there are two z directed ports one at each end of the line These z directed ports are mapped onto the grid along Z much in the same way as a viahole would be mapped See the Basics section for mote information on mapping to the grid As in the circuit theory schematic there are two ports and each port has two terminals The bottom terminals which are true ground in the circuit schematic are connected to the bottom wall ground plane a physical representation of ground Z directed internal ports can be used in GENESYS to connect elements just like a node in SCHEMAX or in a text file In other words components like resistors and transistors can be connected directly to these ports You simply place a z directed port in the center of the pad for the component in these cases Note SCHEMAX does this automatically as is desctibed later in this section 297 Simulation 298 Note GENESYS will automatically add lumped elements to your simulation if components ate on yout layout This section is for background information and advanced applications The citcuit shown below contains an EMPOWER circuit which was drawn completely in LAYOUT The schematic for this network was blank It has 4 ports ports 1 and 2 are external and ports 3 and 4 are internal EMPOW
36. System diagram The value that is reported for a node along a path that has more than two elements is the value seen by the series element in the path entering the node For example in the following example we have defined two paths Path1_2 which is the path from node 1 to node 2 and Path3 2 which is the path from node 3 to node 2 On a level diagram or in a table the value reported at node 5 for Path1_2 would be the value of the measurement leaving terminal 2 of the resistor R1 entering node 5 Likewise the impedance seen along this path is that seen looking from terminal 2 of the resistor R1 into node 5 Consequently the impedance seen by R1 is the L1 to port 3 network in parallel with the C1 to port 2 netwotk In a similar manner the value reported at node 5 for the Path3 2 would be the value of the measurement leaving terminal 2 of inductor L1 entering node 5 The impedance for the node looking from terminal 2 of inductor Ll is most likely to be completely different from the impedance seen by R1 or even C1 because from the inductors perspective the R1 to port 1 network is in parallel with the C1 to port 2 network SPECTRASYS knows about the direction of all of the paths and will determine the correct impedance looking along that path As a result all measurements contain the correct values as seen looking along the path of interest Remember absolute node impedance and resulting measurements based on that impedance don t make any s
37. To User View 1 10 Saves the current viewer settings into the selected view The settings can be restored later by selecting the desired from the load sub menu described above The options in this menu can also be selected by pressing Shift the number key corresponding to the desired save 305 Simulation 306 Tip The save and load functions are extremely useful If you totate and pan to a view that you like press Shift plus a number not an arrow to save that view Simply press the number by itself to return to that view These views are remembered even if you exit the viewer so you can easily store your favorite views C X Y Z XY Button Pressing this button toggles between the four possible modes X Displays the x directed current density distribution Y Displays the y directed currents density distribution Z Displays the z directed currents XY Displays additive surface current density distribution function D Animate Button This button toggles viewer animation on the current image When this option is sclected the button appears pressed The viewer animation is accomplished by multiplying the individual currents by exp jw where w cycles from 0 to 2pi and plotting snapshot graphs for sequential time moments What is animated is controlled by the Display Option Button see E below E Display Option Button This button selects the current display option Real Displays the real po
38. XTB Advanced Modeling Kit begin B of T B pow T T NOM XTB end endfunction The function is called by the line BF T B of T BF T T NOM XTB System tasks and functions System functions provided access to system level tasks as well as access to simulator information These functions return simulator environment information temperature Circuit ambient temperature in Kelvin abstime Absolute time in seconds realtime sca e realtime can have an optional argument which scales the time If no atgument is given realtime s return value is scaled to the time unit of the module which invoked it If an argument is given realtime shall divide the absolute time by the value of the argument i e scale to the value specified in the argument The argument for realtime follows the semantics of the time unit that is it shall consist of an integer followed by a scale factor Valid integers are 1 10 and 100 valid scale factors are s seconds ms milliseconds us microseconds ns nanoseconds ps picoseconds and fs femtoseconds vt U emperature vt can optionally have Temperature in Kelvin units as an input argument and returns the thermal voltage kT q at the given temperatute vt without the optional input temperature atgument returns the thermal voltage using temperature These functions provide access to display and file operations 83 Simulation Sfopen f le name fopen opens
39. XY amp Real Solid Freq GHz h15 aE elole alel Top Front side ose n To get this snapshot we stopped animation by clicking the Animation camera icon adjusted the view slightly and toggled the background color to white To obtain this view simply press the Oblique button on the toolbar after starting the viewer All other settings are the default e Show XY current density distribution XY X Y Z button e Show Real part of the current density distribution View Menu Switches Value Mode or Value Mode button e Show Absolute values of the current density quantities View Menu Switches Absolute Value Display e Animation is off and time is set to initial View Menu Switches Animation or Animation Camera button e Scaleis on View Menu Switches Scale e Solid polygons view View Menu Switches Wireframe or Solid Wire button Note For printing Toggle Background Color from the File menu was also used to change the background to white To reset the time to zero the animation was turned off and the Real Mag Angle button was clicked three times returning the mode to real but resetting the time The resulting picture in the main viewer window is a 3D plot of the surface current density shown with the grid generated to solve the problem The axes in the metal plane grid plane correspond to the X and Y axes in the box The origin of the coordinates X and Y
40. arrayinit element list y where param arrayinit element ist is made of param arrayinit element param arrayinit element 75 Simulation 76 where para arrayinit elementis a constant expression The type real integer is optional If it is not given it will be derived from the constant assignment value A parenthesis indicates the range can go up to but not include the value whereas a square bracket indicates the range includes the endpoint The value range specification is quite useful for range checking Some examples of this are parameter real Temp 27 from 273 15 inf parameter R 50 from 0 inf and value ranges can have simple exclusions parameter R 50 from 0 inf exclude 10 20 exclude 100 Analog Block Conditional statement if else statement The conditional statement is used to determine whether a statement is executed ot not The syntax is if expression true_statement_or_null else false_statement_or_null If the expression evaluates to True non zero then the true_statement will be executed or not if false If there is an else fa se_statement and the expression evaluates to False the false_statement is executed instead Case statement A case statement is useful for multiple actions to be selected based on an expression The format is case casex casez expression case_item case_item y endcase where case_item is expression 1 expression y
41. but instead is partially filled with a dielectric and the remainder of the cavity is filled with air then the dominant mode resonant frequency is reduced and may be approximated using a filling factor Johnson 1987 Assuming the substrate is mounted on the floor of the cavity the resonant frequency of a partially filled rectangular cavity fpartiah 18 E GE l t I satio xx fioi e 1 whete t is the thickness of the substrate and h is the height of the cavity without a substrate For example fio fot the 2x4 inch box is reduced from 3299MHz to 3133MHz with t 62mils and e 4 8 This expression is approximate because the electric field lines ate not parallel to the z axis and a component of these lines terminate on the side walls This mode is referred to as a quasi TEM101 mode Relatively spatse signal metal has little effect on the resonant frequency Larger metal segments particularly when grounded significantly reduce the resonant frequency To obtain a feel for the significance of signal metal you may add extraneous metal to the substrate in Example 10 Box Modes and observe the shift in the transmission peaks Transmission line discontinuities disturb current flow and energy is lost from the transmission structure While this lost energy is typically small the Q of the resonant cavity is high and coupling at these frequencies is significant Removing the cover of the enclosute causes energy to be lost to free space
42. model directory in their native ASCII form This link is transparent to you when you place a model in a schematic To use a model from the library just enter the base nonlinear model that you would like for example a PNP and then change the model to the desired part using the Model button on the part parameter dialog You can use your nonlinear device with four methods e Link to an existing SPICE file e Create a single part model e Create a schematic based User Model e Enter the parameters directly into a nonlinear model on the schematic 163 User Models User models allow the creation of new elements by the user These models behave just as if they wete built into GENESYS This capability is one of the mote powerful features in GENESYS To create a new model you must generally know three things 1 An equivalent circuit for the model 2 Equations which define the component values in the equivalent circuit 3 The parameters that will be specified if any each time that the model is used You can name and give descriptions for each of parametets A model can be created from any existing schematic or from scratch In addition the user can create a new symbol for this model which will aid in distinguishing the new model from other schematic elements See the section on symbols for details Note You must have purchased SCHEMAX to create and save a schematic model If you have not you may create a text mode
43. they have been snapped correctly to the top metal layet dose p IE 5 x Draw EMPort layout editor or Footprint Port Footprint editor Variable Filter Layout of the schematic 353 Simulation 18 Next we need to set the EM layout properties as shown below This can be done by bringing up the Layout Properties by double clicking the layout background and then selecting the EMPOWER Layers tab LAYOUT Properties x General Assaciations General Layer EMPOWER Layers Fors Tet Tand Surface Imp Current Thick Metal yp Sigma Value or File Direction Slow 0 094 Sub Default 1 42 Sub Default 51 Sub Defautt 1 42 0 094 Normal Thin Down E OASIS Sub Default 42 19 The next step is create an EM simulation of the layout We do this by tight clicking on Simulations Data folder and selecting Add Planar 3D EM Analysis Then you should set up your simulation by changing the number of points Your EMPOWER options should be setup just like ours below Pressing Recalculate Now will start the EM simulator This simulation takes a couple minutes on a Pentium III 500MHz CPU with 192MB of RAM Note We specified a wider simulation frequencies to get a bigger picture of the response 354 EMPOWER Advanced M FILTER Example General Viewer Far Field Advanced Layout to simulate Miet ly v Port impedance ES Generalized Setup Layout
44. this command will be gray and the simulation will not be re run To force a new simulation either make some change in the design or select Delete internal simulation data Mark results up to date Changes the status of a simulation to current Use this feature when a change has been made to the design that does not affect the simulation results such as changing a value and then changing it back Automatically Calculate Toggles on or off the state that starts a simulation any time a change is made to the design 51 Simulation 52 Active for Opt Yield Recalc Toggles on or off the simulation status If not Active the simulation will not be run when during optimization yield analysis or when the recalculation button is clicked Write all internal data Creates a set of external ASCII files containing the simulation netlist the simulator log messages raw simulation results and simulation errots Delete internal simulation data Discards all existing calculated results Selecting this menu will cause the simulator to start from a new state on its next run Properties Opens the HARBEC Options dialog box Show HarBEC monitor window Opens a window that contains detailed information about the HARBEC simulation run Only available for harmonic balance simulations GENESYS supports four different way to enter nonlinear models e Direct Schematic Entry e Single Part Model e Nonlinear Model Library e SPICE Link The s
45. 1985 Jansen 1985 Rautio Harrineton 1987 Dunleavy Katehi 1988 Instead of continuous TE 331 Simulation 332 and TM rectangular waveguide eigenwaves Samarskii Tikhonov 1948 their grid analogues ate used as a basis to expand the electromagnetic field inside a layer The number of the grid TE and TM waves is finite and their system is complete This means that instead of a summation of series as in the spectral domain approach we have finite sums Moreover each basis grid eigenwave has a grid correction that provides convergence of sums to the seties obtained by the continuous spectral domain approach Note that a backward process is impossible and a simple truncation of the series does not give the same answer as the grid technique The finite sums and the grid corrections are the most impottant things for monotonic convergence of the algorithm To construct the GGF matrix in the grid spectral domain the impedance form of the solution for a layer was used The base of the solution is a layer admittance matrix in the grid spectral domain This matrix relates the grid analogues of the tangential electric and magnetic field components at opposite surfaces of the layer z directed currents and integrals of z directed grid electric field along the z directed current inside the layer All of these are in the basis of the grid eigenwaves thus we have a set of independent matrices for each pair of grid eigenwaves Uniting those matrices for all
46. 20 3 1 3 Returns the magnitude of the voltage at node 5 from 0 to 3 for the first swept parameter and from 1 to 3 for the second parameter All measurements have default operators For instance on a table using S21 will display in dB angle form and Z32 will display in rectangular real amp complex form Likewise on a graph S21 graphs in dB while Z32 graphs the real part of 732 Note To avoid confusion measurements used in equations for post processing must specify an operator Operator Description Meas must be MAGANG Linear magnitude and angle in range Complex 180 to 180 MAGANG2360 Linear magnitude and angle in range 0 Complex to 360 DBANG dB magnitude and angle in range 180 Complex to 180 DBANG2360 dB magnitude and angle in range 0 to Complex 360 RECTI Rectangular real imag Complex MAGI Linear magnitude Real Complex ANGI Angle in range 180 to 180 Complex ANG360 Angle in range 0 to 360 Complex RE Real part of complex measurement Complex IM Imaginary part of complex Complex measurement DBI dB Magnitude Real Complex GD Group delay Complex QL Loaded Q QL 2 pif GD Complex 2 TIME Converts Frequency domain to Time Complex Real domain via inverse Fourier Transform Intended for use with Voltage Current to get time waveforms For post processing equation purposes the magnitude is in the real part of the result and the angle is in the complex part of the
47. 200 Max 200 Max 10 Time based ns bal Divisions 10 Divisions 10 3t Divisions 10 Enter the name of a parameter to graph or RM t Wizard press a wizard button to guide you through RE the process of creating a measurement EN Equation Wizard Cancel Help 4 The output graph should appear as follows Out ys In Power Workspace HB Walkthru olx Output vs Input Power DEMP AGH 204 40 32 24 16 8 0 INPWR e DBM P2 CD Note It is important to choose Input Power Sweep Amplifier as the default simulation data or equations field 15 Walkthrough SPECTRASYS SPECTRASYS is a spectral domain system simulator Because of its unique implementation it has several advantages over traditional simulators The main focus of SPECTRASYS is to aid the user is analyzing and optimizing the RF performance of a chosen architecture which consists of two or more RF blocks or elements The best way to think about SPECTRASYS is to compare the SPECTRASYS schematic ot block diagram to a circuit board and the SPECTRASYS simulation graph to a spectrum analyzer Just like a circuit board SPECTRASYS propagates every source and derived spectral component harmonics intermods spurs etc to every node in the system The graph can then be set to examine the spectrum at any node in the system Since a channel and a schematic path can
48. 8 COUPLER1_1 IL 1 dB CPL 10dB ATTN 3 DIR 30 dB L 4 dB RFAMP 1 RFAMP 2 G 20dB G 10 dB NF 2 dB NF 5 dB OP1DB 11 dBm OP1D8 20 dBm OPSAT 13 dBm OPSAT 23 dBm OIP3 20 dBm OIP3 30 dBm For the power from RFAMP 2 at node 7 consider the second harmonic i e 2xS1 One component is generated in the first amplifier and first appears at node 4 The Sources SPECTRASYS System designator is 2xS1 4 6 8 7 The amplitude is about 95 dBm as shown either in the flyover box or in the matker text Notice that the flyover text has the long form of the identifier whereas the marker text is the short form The component generated in the second amplifier RFAMP 2 has the designator 2xS1 7 since it first appears at node 7 The amplitude is 90 dBm Amp 2 Out Workspace Getting Started 8 Al x 2nd Amplifier Output 200 MHz 95 029 2xTone2 RFAMP_1 COUPLER1_1 ATTN_3 RFAMP_2 Frequency MHz 9 DBM P7 TROUBLESHOOTING If the identifiers do not appear on the graphs make sure the mouse cursor is over the graph data point Graph data points can be turned on and off through the graph menu or toolbar Also make sure this option is enabled by checking the Composite Spectrum page of the System Analysis dialog box Make sute that the Identify Individual Components Above box is checked If intermods or harmonics are desired put a check mark in the Sho
49. ABC B DEF C A B After this code C ABCDEF Concatenation is the only operator currently defined for string variables all other operations give undefined results If you create a model and want it to take a string variable as a parameter put a tilde in front of the parameter name in the Model Properties dialog box to indicate that it is a string Furthermore if the parameter starts with the word or is the word FILENAME a browse button will be given to the user in the schematic part dialog box Arrays Vectors and Matrices 148 GENESYS allows you to create vectors and matrices in the Equation Window Each element in a vector or matrix can hold any type of data real complex string swept or even a nested array Equations are made most easily with the array concatenation operator semi colon For example X 3 455 Y X 1 X 3 Y contains 8 3 5 places an atray of values 3 4 and 5 into variable X and uses these values in Y To make a two dimensional array use parenthesis X 15253 45536 7 859 Y X 2 2 Y contains 5 The operator can be combined with other operators and complex values Equation Reference W 1 2 3 X 8 sqr 4 3 5 Y COMPLEX W X Y array 1 38 2 j5 3 j5 There are also two functions which you can use to create arrays in your equations VECTOR x returns a vector 1 dimensional array of x real zeros Elements are accessed using square brackets and ate bas
50. Amplifier is found on the System toolbar 24 Walkthrough SPECTRASYS ISO 1 IL 1 dB ISO 40 dB 3 dB Resistive Pad 1 RFAMP 1 G 15 dB R 141 9 ohm NF 5 dB OP1DB 40 dBm OPSAT 43 dBm OIP3 50 dBm OIP2 60 dBm 122 dB 1 Ifyou haven t been saving your work you should save your file now 2 Open the Output Spectrum graph With the input power tuned to 0 dBm and the measurement bandwidth set to 1 MHz you should see the following graphs Note that the noise has risen 20 dB 15 dB from the amplifier gain and 5 dB from the amplifier noise figure output Spectrum Workspace 4 Tuning Parameters 0 x 2t 8 8 1 100 MHz a a 114 702 25 ic Total from Port2 Y b 9 008 b Total from RFAMP_1 0 1b 25 50 Pu 75 z m 2 400 la Y 125 150 175 200 0 100 200 300 400 500 Frequency MHz e DBM P2 25 Simulation HE Level Diagram Workspace 5 Amplifier ini x 2 DB CG AIN 4 6 8 9 DB CGAIN Note that on the output spectrum you can see the harmonics Try passing your mouse ovet the harmonic to see the level and the soutce Note The walkthrough at this point is saved in Examples NSPECTRASYS Walkthrough N5 Amplifier WSP Add a Mixer Next we will mix our 100 MHz signal up to 2 GHz using a 1 9 GHz LO and a mixer 1 Modify the
51. Designs in the workspace window and select Add Layout from the LAYOUT menu Enter Stub for the layout name The Create New Layout dialog appears The tabs and prompts on this dialog are described in detail in the Basics section Note For all dialog boxes be sure that your screen looks exactly like the boxes shown in the figures Box Dimensions Note In EMPOWER the layout s box dimensions are used to define the bounding box The box dimensions ate shown below Box Width was chosen as 425 the width of the filter since there are two 200 mil lines and a stub width of 25 mils The filter height is 275 mils including the stub length and series line width The box height was chosen as 600 mils to give plenty of spacing on either side of the filter This minimizes wall interference in the filter s frequency response Create New Layout x General Associations General Layer EMPOWER Layers Fonts eee Units Box Settings The UNITS box at left show units ESA al x Millimeters Grid Spacing X 25 Iv Show Box Design Mils gius pas Grid Spacing Y i25 M Show Grid Dots IV Show EMPOWER Grid Box Width X 425 as Cells m Object Dimensions Line Width 125 Box Height Y 600 as Cells Pad Width 50 Origin fo fo Drill Diameter ao Drawing Options 4 Port Size 25 SUENE Rot Snap Angle 30 E Remove MultiPlace Parts il
52. Frequencies are 2099 94MHz to 2300 05MHz 7 Under the Options tab we should select the manufacturing process For this example we will use microstrip standard as the Process The conversion process should look similar to what we have below Press OK and you should have an schematic that looks like ours below 347 Simulation Pi e Pio Substrate Default Untitled 1 Square Coax Square Conductor Irsa fiso aid Cancel C Square Coax Round Conductor 7 Coplanar Via Hole Radius 12 5 mil Help Coplanar With Ground Conversion Frequency 2200 MHz C Ideal Zo amp Degrees Ideal Zo amp Physical Length JV Automatically add DisCos About Discos amp Micro tandard IV Use chamfered comers C Microstrip Inverted i Microstrip Suspended IV Use symmetric steps C Slabline Round Rod IV Absorb DisCos preserving circuit response when possible C Stripline Standard C Stripline Offset Advanced TLINE will convert the selected schematic elements to the process chosen above If Automatically add DisCos is selected then discontinuities e g tee step bend will be added to the schematic If Absorb DisCos is checked TLINE will adjust line lengths to compensate for the addition or removal of DisCos Schematic of the synthesized unoptimized filter C8 C12 C 2 53 pF CAP1 C 2 53 pF CAP1 10 C 2 507 pF CAP2 912 1 10 TL7 W 83 909 mil y m L 200 578 mi
53. GENESYS EXAMPLES VIEWER You may load them as you follow along with the following examples The viewer displays current distributions as two or three dimensional graphs The viewer has several modes that are used to view various components of the currents from different view perspectives The best view of most problems is often found by minor adjustments of the view orientation The following examples include a few examples of such adjustments The examples are simple problems selected because the results are predictable Nevertheless they ate interesting and illustrate concepts which may be applied to mote complex problems Consider the possible graphs for a simple line segment analysis The schematic file for this example is METR16 WSP It contains description of a segment of the 50 Ohm standard stripline Rautio 1994 that is also discussed in the Examples Chapter The segment is 1 4423896 mm wide by 4 996540 mm long and the box size along the z axis is 1 mm The segment length is 90 degrees at 15 GHz and 180 degrees at 30 GHz Load METR16 WSP in GENESYS Run the viewet by selecting Run EMPOWER Viewer from the right click menu of Simulation EM1 The default plot seen in the main window is an animated surface electric current density distribution function reflecting the surface currents in the strip plane At the initial time t 0 it will look similar to the graph shown below 311 Simulation empower Viewer V6 5 MEE File View
54. In determining which simulation type to use several points should be considered Linear or Electromagnetic 1 Should I use both circuit theory and EM simulation Circuit theory simulation in GENESYS is amazingly fast and interactive No other program at any price approaches the speed of GENESYS EMPOWER simulations are more accutate and do not require the use of specific geometric objects for which circuit models have been developed EM simulation complements rather than replaces circuit theory simulation What is the highest frequency used in the circuit If below about 1 GHz lumped elements are often used in place of distributed elements In this case the final boatd layout usually won t add any significant parasitics ot coupling concerns Often however customers use EMPOWER to simulate the final boatd layout to make sure that it doesn t differ from the linear simulation How big is the circuit If the circuit itself is very small compared to a wavelength at the highest frequency of concern electromagnetic simulation may not be needed This is because resonances occur at quarter wavelengths and circuits much smaller than this usually behave as predicted by a complete linear simulation Does the circuit have non standard metal shapes patterns or geometries If so electromagnetic simulation may be the only option EMPOWER can simulate any arbitrary shape such as ground plane pours A linear simulator requires a netlist or schemat
55. Journal of Computational Mathematics and MathematicalPhysics v 32 1992 N 1 p 40 58 B V Sestroretzkiy V Yu Kustov Yu O Shlepnev Analysis of microwave hybrid integrated circuits by informational multiport network method in Russian Voptosi Radioelektroniki ser OVR 1988 N 12 p 26 42 B V Sestroretzkiy V Yu Kustov Yu O Shlepnev Technique of electromagnetic analysis of microstrip devices using general purpose programs in Russian Voptosi Radioelektroniki ser OVR 1990 N 1 p 3 12 Yu O Shlepnev Method of lines in mathematical modeling of microwave integrated circuit planar elements in Russian Ph D Thesis NEIS Novosibirsk 1990 V Yu Kustov B V Sestroretzkiy Yu O Shlepnev Electromagnetic analysis of planar devices with resistive films and lumped elements Proc of Europ Symp on Numerical Methods in Electromagnetics JEE 93 Toulouse France 17 19 November 1993 p 227 234 V Yu Kustov B V Sestroretzkiy Yu O Shlepnev Three dimensional electromagnetic analysis of planar devices with resistive films and lumped elements Proc of 27th Conference on Antenna Theory and Technology ATT 94 Moscow Russia 23 25 August 1994 p 352 356 361 Simulation 362 K N Klimov V Yu Kustov B V Sestroretzkiy Yu O Shlepnev Efficiency of the impedance network algotithms in analysis and synthesis of sophisticated microwave devices Proc of the 27th Conference on Ant
56. Layout CES nes suma teh ee re L Iv C fue Teton o 0 055 E C Sub Teflon paeem S 0004 e ponencia pop O EMPOWER Basics Create New Layout xj General Associations General Layer EMPOWER Layers Fonts l Surface Imp Value or File Top Cover Cover Sub Teflon 55 255 00004 Sub Teflon 2 0 09 Normal Sub Teflon 55 255 0 0004 Sub Teflon BOT METAL 5 a y i Sub Teflon 2 0 094 The EMPOWER Layer Tab consists of the following main entries Top Cover and Bottom Cover Describes the top and bottom covers ground planes of the circuit e Lossless The cover is ideal metal e Physical Desc The cover is lossy These losses are described by Rho resistivity relative to coppet Thickness and Surface Roughness e Electrical Desc The cover is lossy and is described by an impedance or file See the desctiption below under metal for mote information e Semi Infinite Waveguide There is no cover and the circuit is simulated as if the box walls and uppermost substrate air layer extend up or down forever an infinite tube e Magnetic Wall The cover is an ideal magnetic wall This setting is only used in advanced applications e SCHEMAX substrates Choosing a SCHEMAX substrate causes the cover to get the rho thickness and roughness parameters from that substrate definition We recommend using this
57. Microstrip Housing Design MSN amp CT 1987 Feb p 100 102 107 109 J C Rautio R F Harrington An electromagnetic time harmonic analysis of shielded microstrip circuits IEEE Trans v MTT 35 1987 N 8 p 726 730 359 Simulation 360 B V Sestroretzkiy V Yu Kustov Electromagnetic analysis of multilevel integrated circuits on the base of RLC networks and informational multiport approach in Russian Voprosi Radioelektroniki ser OVR 1987 N 1 p 3 23 L P Dunleavy P B Katehi A generalized method for analyzing shielded thin microstrip discontinuities IEEE Trans v MTT 36 1988 N 12 p 1758 1766 T Uwato T Itoh Spectral domain approach in Numerical techniques for microwave and millimeter wave passive structures Edited by T Itoh John Willey amp Sons 1989 R H Jansen Full wave analysis and modeling for CAD of mm wave MMICs Alta Frequenza v LVIIL 1989 N 5 6 p 115 122 A Hill V K Tripathi An efficient algorithm for the three dimensional analysis of passive microstrip components and discontinuities for microwave and millimiter wave integrated circiuts IEEE Trans v MTT 39 1991 N 1 p 83 91 M G Slobodianskii A new method of approximate solution of partial differential equations and its application to the theory of elasticity in Russian Prikladnaia Matematika i Mekhanika Applied Mathematics and Mechanics v 3 1939 N 1 p 75 82 O A Li
58. Noise can come from any of three different sources These are 1 Thermal noise of passive components 2 Added noise of all components 3 Noise soutce applied to a port SPECTRASYS uses the parameters found on the Options page and Calculate page of the System Simulation dialog box to determine the frequency range power level and number of points needed to represent the broadband noise In the real world noise occuts at all frequencies Since SPECTRASYS is a continuous frequency simulator we need to provide a way to limit the frequencies of the noise For example the users may not be interested in noise at 10 GHz when looking at an 800 MHz system In other cases this may be necessary The frequency limits for noise are explained below Lower Noise Frequency Limit Is determined by the frequency set by the Ignore Spectrum Frequency Below parameter The default for this parameter is O Hz Upper Noise Frequency Limit Is determined by the frequency set by the Ignore Spectrum Frequency Above parameter The default for this parameter is 5 times the highest source frequency Thermal Noise Power This power is determined by the System Temperature parameter This noise power is used by all of the elements in SPECTRASYS to create their noise power Obviously the total noise power in a given bandwidth is equal to the noise powet density dBm Hz multiplied by the integration bandwidth For channelized measurements the Channel Measurem
59. Port Modes Use ports from schematic Necessary for HARBEC co simulation M Electromagnetic simulation frequencies Co simulation sweep Start freq MHz 1950 Stop freq MHz 2450 IV Use EM simulation frequencies Start freq MHz 1950 Number of points fia Stop freq MHz 2450 Harber Freq z Number of points ia Max critical freq 2200 v Tum off physical losses faster Recalculate Now Automatic Recalculation Automatically save workspace after calc 20 After the simulation is done you should first take a look at the Empower Listing file Right click the Empower simulation titled EM1 in the workspace tree and select Show Listing File Inspect this file to verify the simulation geometry As you can see this listing matches the desired layout MB EMI Listing File Workspace mfilter_temp 21 Now we would like to see the EM response on the same graph as the linear response to compare the two We can do this by opening the linear graph s properties MFilter1 Response and typing in MFilterl EM1 DB S21 and MFilter1 EM1 DB S11 on line three and four of the measurements just like it s illustrated below 355 Simulation 356 Graph Properties x Default Simulation Data or
60. Post processing 145 150 153 179 181 183 184 Do RR 1 Precedenc n uso d reete 144 Preferred Cell Count A2 TE PRIMG sssees 227 PRNE eene 226 Problem Formulation 326 Provided Device Data sss 158 Q iT 181 R R1341 Radians multiplier sss 148 REsan avalos a 145 181 REAL 2e nte testate eer ied 145 Real Time Tuning 256 Recalculat NOW eisiea 51 Recalculation button sse 51 Record Keeping neces 160 REGCT eeu 179 181 Rectangular Cavity sss 321 322 Rectangular waveguides ss 326 Ref Plane Shift i nece etie dei 281 Reference Plane s 284 290 295 Reflection Coefficient 32 35 36 39 Relational eu Mero e tenetis 154 Relative Dielectric Constants Zo Relative Error wee 43 Relative permittivity AY Relative Tolerance 44 53 Rello aio 41 Resista CE iia 179 ResisttVily cie nta e EE 257 Resonance 275 301 321 323 RETURN ctt atc 141 154 Reverse Nodes SB ecco OO ARDOR 196 Semi Infinite Waveguide Sensitivity ees Setup Modes dialog box 290 SED Rito IV eeu 228 Signal Metal Effects 223 A t pt op 1 SiirinlatiOn sso tentent 31 183 Simulation Data ies 183 Simulations Data 1 Simultaneous match impedance 179 SIN S Memes fenes wee 145 Single Part model 452 1735 SEIN ET 145 SIGE
61. RECT ZP11 real imaginary parts RE ZP22 real part MAGANG ZP21 Linear magnitude and angle in range of 180 to 180 Other Operators MAG ANG ANG260 IM MAGANG360 Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield ZP22 RE ZP22 real part of ZP22 RECT ZP Shows real imaginary parts of all Z Parameters MAG ZP21 Linear Magnitude of ZP21 Linear Magnitude of ZP21 ZP Shows real imaginary parts of all Z Parameters Not available on Smith Chart Voltage Standing Wave Ratio VSWR 188 The VSWR measurement is a real function of frequency The measurements are made looking into the network from the port with other network terminations in place The frequency range and intervals are as specified in the Linear Simulation dialog box A port number 7 is used to identify the port VSWR is the Voltage Standing Wave Ratio looking in from pott 7 The VSWR is a measure of the energy reflected back to the port The VSWR is related to the s parameter S11 by VSWR 1 Su 1 Su Therefore as the reflected energy goes to zero S11 goes to zero and the VSWR approaches unity As the reflected energy increases Si1 approaches unity and VSWR goes to infinity Values Real value versus frequency Simulations Linear Default Format Table RE Real Graph RE Real Smith Chart Si plots s parameters Commonly Used Operators None Ex
62. Recalculation Automatically Calculate Available gain circles sss B134 179 Back annotation plo 41 Back annotation Al Balanced amplifiers 160 BASE ncmo uat no BREITE 141 Basic GEO 257 Batch Runs Berkeley syria reete BESSELJO reitera Binary Files Bottom Covet 257 264 Box 1 242 261 274 281 297 Box Modes 1 275 321 322 323 Broadband Noise sse 116 Built in Functions 145 150 Calculate Intermods Along Path 90 112 Galeulate NOISE it oett mus 90 Calling C C Programs eee 155 Carrier to Noise Ratio Cascaded Gain sss 209 210 211 Cascaded Noise Figure 133 212 Cavity Absorber 554223 M 321 261 273 276 311 325 Cavity tesonators Cell Size CGAINIMOG eerte rie neben 210 Chamfered corners Channel Path Frequency econo 104 Channel Frequency eee 104 Channel Noise Powet ees 215 Channel POwW6etzL eee etoile 215 Characteristic impedance sss 286 Simulation 364 S arACte rS HCSA e nM 1 CIMSPz soc 234 Circles 32 38 39 179 183 Coaxial TSUNCON vicario 257 MN A pee ens 106 Goherent Addition sitet 90 COMBINE WSP Compensation Admittance COMPLEX 2 oret ie yes 145 Components cncncrncnncnnonconcancononnonconcancanenno
63. SMTLP and MMTLP models ate automatically created during the LINE portion of the EMPOWER run For the MMTLPS lines the file WSP Simulations EMPartl EMPOWER L2 was used This corresponds to the second set of inputs for PART1 You should view the listing file Right click on EMPart1 and look at the port numbers to determine which EMPOWER L file contains the line data you need Note Files with names like WSP Simulations EMPart1 EMPOWER L2 are taken from within the current workspace For a complete explanation of how these files are names see the File Formats section in this manual 293 Simulation 294 The substrate must also be specified but only the UNITS parameter is used by the MMTLPS model A variable was setup LENGTH so that the lengths of line can be tuned in GENESYS simultaneously changing the size of the spiral and thus the inductance vety quickly File Edit View Workspace Actions Tools Synthesis Window Help lex Osp Bbrjocje temas as E lt Designs Partl Layout IS Part2 Layout i SPIRAL Schem 15 COMBINE Sche 15 INDUCTOR Sel ulations D ata Sij EMPartl Part1 Si EMPart2 Part2 Sij Linear 0 to 100 3 Outputs B Graphi 52 Equations q Ss z 5000 b Freq MHz The results from this are shown above Notice that even with only 5 analysis points across the band the interpolation is very good To illustrate this the spiral inductor was recalculated with 10 poi
64. Setting the slider to zero turns off thinning See your EMPOWER manual fot details on thinning 268 EMPOWER Basics Thin out electrical lossy surfaces If checked lossy metal described using electrical parameters will also be thinned Since the thinning out model assumes that most current flows on the edges of the lines this option will be somewhat less accutate for resistive films where current flows more evenly throughout the material In these cases you should probably also check the Solid thinning option shown below Solid Thinning out slower If checked slower solid thinning out model is used This model restores capacitance lost due to thinning out and can be most useful for when large sections of metal have been thinned out Use planar ports for one port elements This box should almost always be checked When not checked EMPOWER uses z directed ports at each terminal for all devices When it is checked EMPOWER uses in line ports for elements like resistors and capacitots two terminal one port devices The only time this can cause a problem is when you have a line running under an element for example running a line between the two terminals on a resistor in the same metal layer as the resistor pads Note EMPOWER planar ports cannot be used for ground referenced elements such as transmission lines even though the element might only have terminals Add extra details to listing file If checked extra info
65. Spectrum at Outp ATA T T T T T T T T niM amp z a 173 9134 gt p J 1 EN Total from Port2 b 72 DBM P2 Total from RFAMP 1 S1 1 4 5 6 8 2 8041c B L L 34 2 20MHz a 173 9134 fb Total from Port2 804 E J b 150 5059 Total from RFAMP_1 c 179 2x51 2 DBM P2 3 90 MHz a 173 9134 Total from Port2 b 131 3914 Total from RFAMP 1 c 131 4481 52137 5582 Frequency MHz One of the most useful featutes of composite spectrum is is the ability to identify the origin and path of each spectral component See Identifying Spectral Origin and System Simulation Parameters Composite Spectrum for more information Identifying Spectral Origin Since each spectral component is tracked separately and SPECTRASYS knows the direction of travel of all signals the user can find the otigin and path of each spectral component by placing a marker on the graph or simply flying the mouse over the spectral component of interest When a graph marker is added to a plot the marker will attach itself to the closest data point Also the mouse flyover text appears when the mouse is over the marker symbols trace segment endpoints or the marker text on the right side of the graph These marker symbols can be enabled or disabled The default marker symbols look like large round dots If the user is having a difficult time
66. a THR three port data device was placed on the blank schematic using the EMPOWER SS file from the EMPOWER run An input and output were added on nodes one and two of the THR block the ground was added to the ground node and a capacitor was connected from port 3 to ground This has the effect of putting the capacitor across port 3 in the EMPOWER simulation The rules to follow for Along X and Along Y internal ports are simple e Do not attempt to use them for transistors or other 3 terminal or more devices e Set the Current Direction of the EMPort to Along X along the x axis if the current along the component flows from left to tight as on the layout on the left above Set the Current Direction of the EMPort to Along Y along the y axis if the current along the component flows from top to bottom as if the capacitor were turned 90 degrees from the one on the layout above e Connecting a lumped element in SCHEMAX from the port to ground when you use the resulting data is equivalent to connecting the lumped element accross the EMPOWER Lumped Elements and Internal Ports length of the port in the LAYOUT This does not mean that the component is grounded It simply means that the component is connected accross the port This concept is key to understanding X and Y directed ports When the S Parameters of MYNET ate displayed in a graph you see the resulting S Parameters of the entire circuit Often when a circ
67. about many of these parametets Meas Desctiption Default Operator Shown on Smith Chart SZ S Parametets DBANG SZ Hy H Parameters RECT YPZ Y Parameters RECT ZPG Z Parameters RECT ZIN7 Impedance at port with network RECT Sii terminations in place YIN7 Admittance at port with network RECT SZ terminations in place ZPORT7 Reference Impedance at port 7 RECT VSWRi VSWR at port 7 Linear real S Ez Voltage gain from port to port j with DBANG network terminations in place Ni Noise correlation matrix parameters RECT GMAX Maximum available gain dB real NF Noise figure dB real NMEAS Noise measure Linear real 179 Simulation NFT Effective noise input temperature Linear real GOPT Optimal gamma for noise DBANG YOPT Optimal admittance for noise RECT ZOPT Optimal impedance for noise RECT RN Normalized noise resistance Linear real NEMIN Minimum noise figure dB real ZMi Simultaneous match impedance at port 7 RECT YMz Simultaneous match admittance at port 7 RECT GM Simultaneous match gamma at port 7 DBANG K Stability factor Linear real B1 Stability measure Linear real SB1 Input plane stability circle None Circle SB1 Circles Note Filled areas are unstable regions SB2 Output plane stability circle None Circle SB2 Circles Note Filled areas are unstable regions NCI Constant noise circles shown at 25 5 1 None Circle NCI Ci
68. an EMPOWER run See the EMPOWER Basics and Box Modes sections for mote information on covets See the Edge Coupled Filter example for an example of the impact that removing a cover has on circuit performance If you do not need information about circuit loss you can check the box labeled Don t use physical loss Faster when starting an EMPOWER run Turning off losses will generally make a problem require 1 2 the memory and 1 4 the time as a lossy problem We recommend that you define all layers with their proper characteristics including losses You can then quickly change between lossy and lossless modes as described above A common technique is to analyze a circuit first without losses then turn on losses and run an analysis with a few points in it This allows you to determine the amount of loss and confirm that it has no other major effect on performance while not having to wait the additional time while doing most of your analyses There is an additional caveat regarding loss described in the section on Slot type structure See the Natrowband Interdgital example for an example of the effect of loss on an interdigital filter Looking at cutrents in the viewer is a great way to get insights into circuit performance However generating this viewer data requires additional time increasing the length of a run by a factot from two to ten and sometimes requiring additional memory also Generating viewer data has no effect whatsoever on
69. and we set the Ignore Frequency Below limit to 200 MHz then the entire IF signal would not be present and consequently neither would the 2 GHz RF signal Level Below default 200 dBm All spectrums that are below this threshold will not be created by SPECTRASYS This threshold should be set to the highest acceptable level if optimal speed is an issue Spectrums ate not actually ignored if they ate not more than about 20 dB below this threshold since several spectrums can be added together to give a total result that would be greater than this threshold Frequency Below default 0 Hz All spectral components whose frequency is below this threshold will be ignored and will not be created Spectrums falling below this limit will not continue to propagate Howevet there are several cases where negative frequencies may be calculated at interim steps i e through a mixer which will be folded back onto the positive frequency axis This parameter will only affect the final folded frequencies and not the interim frequency steps Likewise this is the lower noise frequency limit Frequency Above default 5 times the highest source frequency All spectral components whose frequency is above this threshold will be ignored and will not be created Spectrums falling above this limit SPECTRASYS System will not continue to propagate Likewise this is the upper noise frequency limit Simulation Speed Up As with
70. antenna the Air Below layer should not be used The substrate layer instead should be used The Bottom Cover should be set to Lossless type and the Top Cover should be set to Electrical type with surface impedance set to 377 ohms EMPOWER Options 3 x General Viewer Far Field Advanced Vv Generate Viewer Data slower Port number to excite fi Mode number to excite fi rv Generate Far Field Radiation Data V Sweep Theta Start Angle jo Stop fiso Step 1 degrees Y Sweep Phi Start Angle jo Stop so Step 1 degrees Cancel Specifying Sweep Parameters In order to generate far field radiation data Generate Viewer Data slower and Generate Far Field Radiation Data must be checked You may then select either Theta Phi or both to be swept Data is generated for all points between Start Angle and Stop Angle for both Theta and Phi with a step size specified in the Step field All angles are in degrees In the above figute data is being generated sweeping both Theta and Phi Theta is being swept from 0 to 180 degrees in 1 degree increments while Phi is being swept from 0 to 90 degrees also in 1 degree increments 309 Simulation 310 Measurements and Plotting Once far field radiation data is generated the following measurements can be plotted ETHETA phis thetas freqs the theta component of the total electric field Phi Thetas and freqs can either be single values
71. any other type of simulation the larger the number of spectral components that need to be processed the more time the simulator will take Setting these limits to only calculate the frequencies and amplitude ranges of interest can speed up the calculation process especially when calculating intermods However take caution when setting these limits so that intentional spectrums are not ignored User Defined Offset Channel This group is only used in conjunction with the Offset Channel Frequency and Offset Channel Power measurements Freq Offset From Channel This is the relative frequency offset from the current channel frequency Measurement Bandwidth This is the integration bandwidth for the Offset Channel Powet measurement See Offset Channel for additional information Maximum Number of Spectrums To Generate This group is used to limit or restrict the maximum numbet of spectrums that will be created by SPECTRASYS Max Spectrums Limits the maximum number of spectrums that SPECTRASYS will create Once this limit is reached during a simulation no additional spectrums will be created This option must be used with cate since a premature limitation of the number of total spectrums may affect the accuracy of the measurements Range Warning for Mixer Multiplier etc This group is used to control range watnings used by some elements in SPECTRASYS Tolerance Range This threshold range is used by some elements
72. are Measurements Linear I YP 11 Vi YPi2 Va I YP21 Vi YP22 Va Values Complex matrix versus frequency Simulations Linear Default Format Table RECT Graph RE Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Description Result Type Operator RECT YP11 real imaginary parts RE YP22 real part MAGANG YP21 Linear magnitude and angle in range of 180 to 180 Other Operators MAG ANG ANG360 IM MAGANG360 Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield YP22 RE YP22 real part of YP22 RECT YP Shows real imaginary parts of all Y Parameters MAG YP21 Linear Magnitude of YP21 Linear Magnitude of YP21 YP Shows real imaginary parts of all Y Parameters Not available on Smith Chart Z Parameters This Z parameter or impedance parameter measurements are complex functions of frequency The frequency range and intervals are as specified in the Linear Simulation dialog box The Z parameters for an n port network are of the form ZP fori j equal 1 2 n For a two port network the equations relating the input voltage V1 and current I4 to the output voltage V2 and current 12 are Vi ZP11 h ZP I2 V2 ZP l ZPz k2 Values Complex matrix versus frequency Simulations Linear Default Format Table RECT Graph RE Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators 187 Simulation Operator Description Result Type
73. be defined the user can examine any one of over 30 spectrum integrated measurements along this user defined path on a level diagram SPECTRASYS has many advantages over traditional system simulators e SPECTRASYS is completely integrated into the GENESYS environment and provides the platform that ties all of the synthesis circuit simulation layout electromagnetic simulation and testing together e Any linear component can be placed in the system schematic along with any of over 45 RF behavioral models e Arbitrary topologies and multiple paths are automatically accounted for e The user can view full spectrums at any node in the system e Frequency dependent VSWR interactions between stages are automatically included e All measurements are channel based and are a result of spectrum integration e Level diagrams can display any of over 30 measurements along any user defined path e The origins and paths of all spectral components on every node can be easily identified e Broadband noise is readily analyzed and processed The first step in creating a SPECTRASYS simulation is to create a schematic For this walkthrough we will create the following schematic 17 Simulation ISO 1 IL 1 dB ISO 40 dB 3 dB Resistive Pad gt AN A R1 R2 R 8 5 ohm R 8 5 ohm ATTN 1 L 2 dB S R3 R 141 9 ohm 0 The following circuit elements are used in this schematic Input Standard INP on main toolbar or press I A
74. between cells zero cells wide This is legal but is not normally recommended and should be used only for very high impedance lines where accuracy is not important such as DC powet lines The gtid and the box are controlled with parameters in the Preferences box from the LAYOUT File menu The Dimensions Tab shown below is as it was setup for the microsttip bend above Create New Layout xj General Associations General Layer EMPOWER Layers Fonts Designs to include an Box Settings The UNITS box at left show units Design Grid Spacing 20 M Show Box sm F P HA feo 7 idD 3 uu 3 Custom Joos Grid Spacing Y Show Grid Dots IZ Show EMPOWER Grid Object Dimensions Box width px f300 Afi5 elg Line Width 30 BoxHeighttvi 300 i5 Cels PadWwidt feo Origin fof Drill Diameter 50 PA Drawing Options Port Size 2o Widths Rot Snap Angle so 10 20 Remove I Multi Place Parts 50 Add New r Default Viahole Layers Top Layer l TOP METAL Bottom Layer iJ Bottom Cover y The following entries ate especially relevant to EMPOWER Show EMPOWER Grid Turning on this checkbox forces LAYOUT to display the rectangular EMPOWER grid It also allows different grid spacings in the X and Y dimensions I s strongly recommended to turn this checkbox on whenever you are creating a layout for EMPOWER Grid S
75. built into SPICE so guideline 2 must be considered Does the circuit contain distributed parts If so linear simulation is a must since SPICE does not include distributed models The electrical transmission line models in SPICE can be used but for final verification of the physical implementation of the lines linear or electromagnetic simulation should be used Often both SPICE and linear simulation ate useful in a design For example in amplifier design the linear portion gain matching can be done in SUPERSTAR and the device biasing can be done in SPICE Walkthrough DC Linear HARBEC Harmonic Balance Walkthrough Note This walkthrough is for customers who have purchased HARBEC for Harmonic balance and DC simulation If you have not purchased HARBEC you can follow the walkthrough given in the SCHEMAX section of the User s Guide which only includes linear simulation BJT Amplifier Design and Simulation Here is a complete DC linear and HARBEC simulation This example shows a common emitter BIPNPN transistor and its biasing circuit CREATING THE DC CURVES 1 The first step is to create the schematic Click the New button on the workspace tree and find Add Schematic as shown below Name the schematic NPN Sch ol eal el sal Synthesis NINE 26m Analysis Add Layout Output ye Add Ne Add Equations renews SERE Add Schematic s Add Schematic Symbol
76. came from To do this 18 19 20 21 22 Double click on System1 in the workspace window Click on the Composite Spectrum Tab Check Signals and Intermods and Harmonics Select the radio button Individual Components Press OK You will see a graph like the one below Placing a marker on the peak will show the source of the signal and moving the cursor over the marker will give more details In this case the green signal started at the input INP_PAC1 went out the port and through the listed nodes and elements Note You can zoom in easily on the graph using your mouse wheel or using the zoom buttons on the toolbar 21 Simulation output Spectrum Workspace 2 Add Simulation o x 9 8 1 100 MHz a 115 205 Total trom Port2 20 2 L b 55 992 Total from R2 c 55 992 S1 1 5 3 4 2 40 te DEM P2 H 100 MHz 55 992 60 A INP_PAC1 Port1 ATTN_1 I50_1 R1 R2 DBM P2 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Frequency MHz Note The walkthrough at this point is saved in Examples SPECTRASYS Walkthrough 2 Add Simulation WSP Level Diagrams 22 Another tool in SPECTRASYS is the level diagram To create a level diagram 1 You must first add a path to the system simulation Double click on System1 in the workspace window 2 On the Paths tab click Add Path Enter the beginning path node 1 and
77. conducted third order intermod powet SPECTRASYS System Generated Third Order Intermod Power GIM3P is the total third order intermod power that is created in a particular stage This measurement will only show the intermod levels for the stages that created them Conducted Third Order Intermod Powet CIM3P is the total third order intermod power conducted from the prior stage This measurement when used in conjunction with the Generated Third Order Intermod Power GIM3P will identify the stages in the chain that are the weakest link and are the highest contributor to the total intermod power The stage ptior to the stage where the conducted intermods are dominant through the rest of the chain is the weak link in the chain See the SPECTRASYS examples for an illustration of these measurements Tone Dissimilar Amplitude SPECTRASYS automatically accounts for the amplitude of all input signals that create a given intermod This yields accurate intermod results since frequency response is taken into account which cascaded intermod equations do not Channel Bandwidth and Intermods The bandwidth of third order products is greater than the individual bandwidth of the sources that created them For example if two 1 Hz tones were used to create intermods the resulting bandwidth would be 3 Hz The bandwidth follows the intermod equation that determines the frequency except for the fact that bandwidth cannot be subtracted For examp
78. defined to be 1 Hz Furthermore the number of points has been set to 2 points and can not be changed by the user MODULATED A modulated source is cutrently represented by a uniformly distributed spectrum of constant amplitude This type of spectrum is currently time invariant The user can set the following parameters center frequency bandwidth power level phase shift and number of points USER DEFINED The user defined source is a very powerful feature of SPECTRASYS This is a time independent source that is defined in the frequency domain The user can specify the complete source frequency amplitude and phase in both relative and absolute values Relative frequency amplitude and phase parameters are entered into a text file src The values stored in the src file ate relative to the absolute frequency amplitude and phase parameters contained on the system source parameters dialog box Having relative values specified in a source file is a great advantage because the absolute center frequency power level and phase shift can be tuned from within the system source dialog box Absolute values would not allow the user the ability to tune these parameters Furthermore the Step and Repeat function can also be used with source files that contain relative values The number of points parameter is not needed for this particular type of source since each frequency point is specified in the data file There are sevetal keywords u
79. elements can be generated and added automatically EMPOWER Lumped Elements and Internal Ports The citcuit below uses automatic port placement Initially the circuit on the left is drawn in SCHEMAX The layout on the right of the figure was then created The footprint for the chip capacitot was automatically placed The lines and EMPorts were then manually added When EMPOWER is invoked internal ports are automatically added so the circuit simulated is virtually identical to the one on the left below and the result is a 4 port data file MYNET 1 e 0 E a mm EMPOWER then automatically creates a network which is identical to the network shown in the previous section This result is fundamentally the same as the result from MYNET below When the capacitor below is tuned or optimized the networks MYNET and EMPOWER ate both updated simultaneously Even if you cteate a file with a layout only no schematic you can still use automatic port placement Simply put the parts down onto a blank schematic connecting them into a dummy network The parts will now show up in LAYOUT and can be moved as needed ignoring any rubber bands The rubber bands come from the meaningless connections in the dummy network When you display the EMPOWER simulation results it will include the components You do not need to display the results from the schematic Note EMPOWER will create planar ports for lumped elements if the Use Planar P
80. entering parameters The figure below shows the model used in this example along with its equations I GENESYS V7 5 oy x File Edit View Workspace Actions Tools Schematic Synthesis Window Help DGEH 8 amp 2 j amp Hacia ara r A gt 4 Y 4 A Lumped Linear Noninear Tine Coar Mitostip Slabine Stipine Wave BE BE Self_Resonant_Capacitor Workspace Self Resonant nf x Variable Value Tunes 5 None EQ Designs Models Self _Resonant_Capacitor User Model Schematic Simulations D ata A EE Resonant frequency in Radians Second reme W 2 PI F 1eG nm Equivalent series inductance in nH E Notes L 1e9 C 1e 12 w0 2 of pmi Line 2 Z To cteate this model 167 Simulation 1 Create a new workspace by selecting New on the File menu 2 Right click the Designs Models node in the Workspace Window as shown below Outputs e Equations Add Us Schematic gg Optimizations 3 Select Add User Model Schematic 4 Name the model Self Resonant_Capacitor Note Spaces are not allowed in model names so it is important to use the underscore chatactet as shown It is next to the zero on most American keyboards with shift 5 The following dialog appears Creating Model 6 Ifyou answer Yes to this dialog GENESYS will automatically load the model in the future making it availa
81. equivalent to the receiver noise floor with a signal to noise ratio of 0 dB In other words the MDS 174 dBm Hz System Noise Figure 10 Log Channel Bandwidth See the Input Third Order Intercept and Channel Noise Power measurements to determine which types of signals are included or ignored in this measurement Values Real value in Watts Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type DB SFDR spurious free dynamic range in dB MAG SFDR _ magnitude of the spurious free dynamic range in Watts Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield DB SFDR DB SFDR DB SFDR MAG SFDR MAG SFDR MAG SFDR Not available on Smith Chart 228 Measurements SPECTRASYS Stage Dynamic Range SDR This measurement along the specified path as shown by SDR n SOP1DB n TNP n dB where n stage number This simple measurement shows the difference between the 1 dB compression point of the stage and the Total Node Powet at the stage output This measurement is extremely useful when trying to optimize each stage dynamic range and determine which stage that will go into compression fitst See the Stage Output 1 dB Compression Point and Total Node Power measurements to determine which types of signals ate included or ignored in this measurement Values Real valu
82. file contains two tables per frequency one each for x and y directed currents Each table contains 4 columns containing the x and y coordinates followed by the real and imaginary part for cach cutrent These tables could be edited but it would be best to leave them alone since they would be very tedious and etror prone to edit them by hand These files should be very useful in other applications as the engineers at Eagleware used third party applications to graph currents before our EMPOWER viewer was completed Written by EMPOWER Type Text Can be safely edited Yes 341 Simulation 342 Average size 1Kbyte Use Read by GENESYS when Generalized S Parameters are requested These files contain each port s impedance versus frequency These ports are read by GENESYS if the keyword GEN is used in place of a termination impedance The files are formatted just like RX files in GENESYS GENESYS always requests these files when EMPOWER is run from GENESYS Notes These files are numbered differently than Ln files When these files are numbered each port in a related group of ports is counted individually Written by EMPOWER Type Binaty Can be safely edited No Average size 1 to 5Kbytes but may be larger Use Internal file for EMPOWER but can also be used in the SMTLP and MMTLP models in GENESYS These files ate used in place of Ln files if a filename was given on the PORT line in the TPL file When tun from GENESYS this file
83. graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield DBM CNP DBM CNP DBM CNP MAG CNP MAG CNP Not available on Smith Chart Channel Power CP This measurement is the total integrated power in the main channel identified by the Channel Frequency and the Channel Measurement Bandwidth of the specified path This measurement includes ALL SIGNALS INTERMODS HARMONICS and NOISE traveling in ALL directions through the node that fall within the main channel For example if the Channel Measurement Bandwidth was specified to 03 MHz and the Channel Frequency was 220 MHz then the CP is the integrated power from 219 985 to 220 015 MHz Values Real value in Watts Simulations SPECTRASYS 215 Simulation Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Desctiption Result Type DBM CP channel power in dBm MAG CP magnitude of the channel power in Watts Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield DBM CP DBM CP DBM CP MAG CP MAG CP Not available on Smith Chart Desired Channel Power DCP This measurement is the total integrated power in the main channel identified by the Channel Frequency and the Channel Measurement Bandwidth of the specified path This measurement includes ONLY SIGNALS ORIGINATING on the beginning node of the path traveling in FORWARD pa
84. inside a layer but they can change from layer to layer which gives a possibility to discretize the problem along the z axis Thus we have all six components of the electric and magnetic fields inside a layer with constant cutrent across it X and y current components can exist only in a signal layer z dj parallel to medium layer interfaces Generalized boundary conditions for the signal layer are 1 IH dj H dj 1 E dj E dj 0 A 2 The signal layer plane can contain arbitrarily shaped regions of perfect metalization regions with complex surface impedances lossy metal resistive films and regions modeling lumped element connections All regions have zero thickness The top and bottom walls of the box can be ideal electric amp magnetic walls or walls with surface impedance The structure can also be terminated by semi infinite rectangular waveguides in the planes of the box top and bottom walls A clarification of the boundary conditions for the media layer interfaces A 2 are given in the following table z ui CENE NN Port Region along X Axis or Internal Port Lumped Element fs dy zer E No X Region along X Axis the same C for y axis C is region cross section l is region length 327 Simulation 5 Internal Port along Z axis Ji ddy Y E a C l Input ports in the structure are modeled by line segments approaching the outer boundaries line conductors and surface current sou
85. laplace_zp expr z r laplace zd implements the zero denominator form of the Laplace transform filter The laplace np implements the numerator pole form of the Laplace transform filter laplace nd implements the numerator denominator form of the Laplace transform filter Z transform filters The Z transfotm filters implement linear discrete time filters Each filter uses a parameter T which specifies the filter s sampling period The zeros argument may be represented as a null argument The null argument is produced by two adjacent commas in the argument list All Z transform filters share three common arguments T t and t0 T specifies the period of the filter is mandatory and must be positive t specifies the transition time is optional and must be nonnegative zi zp implements the zero pole form of the Z transform filter The general form is zi zp expr z r T 0 zi zd implements the zero denominator form of the Z transform filter zi np implements the numerator pole form of the Z transform filter zi nd implements the numerator denominator form of the Z transform filter 80 Advanced Modeling Kit Sequential block A sequential block is a grouping of two ot more statements into one single statement The format is begin block_identifier bloc item declaration y statement y end where block_item_declaration is parameter declaration integer declaration real dec
86. layers in a structure gives a grid spectral GGF representation The construction procedure is completely automated for arbitrarily layered configurations This technique is similar to the impedance approach in the spectral domain Uwano Itoh 1989 The grid spectral GGF representation was also called a GGF eigenvalue vector but that term is not quite correct The dimension of the vector is about 3 L M if there is only one signal layer All we need now to get the GGF matrix in the initial space is to perform a backward transformation of the GGF eigenvalue vector from the grid spectral domain to the spatial domain To do it an auxiliary array called general sums array is introduced The dimension of the general sums array is also about 3 L M Each element of the GGF matrix can be obtained as a sum of four elements of the general sums atray The general sums array depends only on the box and media structure and the grid cell size Its elements are calculated via the discrete Fourier transforms of the GGF eigenvalue vector using the Prime Factor algorithm This stage is based on the maximal utilization of internal symmetries of the bounded equidistant grid and usually takes negligibly small CPU time Moreover it can be done only once for all structures with the same box media and grid The described technique is quite similar to the main matrix filling procedure designed for the spectral domain technique Hill Tripathi 1991 except that it has been don
87. loop To initiate or provide start up impetus to our circuit we will insert an OSCPORT component into the circuit The placement is not critical any node is useable however best results are obtained if we do not place it on the output port or node We access the OSCPORT element from the source selection icon on the GENESYS toolbar 2 GENESYS 2003 03 Osct Open Loop Match Workspace Harbec Osc Example Dele Edt yew Workspace Actors Took Graph Syntheds Window Bep BDE 28 DA HU PURA BZ d m vis E EESLIES Osc1 Open Loop Match Ne NZ lso ho 5 El Synthesis Sosa amp DesignsModels AP Closed Schematic t NAAG Unkto SPI 47 Osct Schematic E Smulsrons Dete goa E HB1 Cosed S Oct 10010 200 5 63 opus Osc1 Open Loop C Osc1 Open Loops i Oscillation Criteria Parameters of HB1 E Spectrum of HET I wevotorms for HB Equations 3 Equations for H81 E Subsretes l Optimizations PA Vita s lt gt 777 Errore HARBEC DC amp Harmonic Balance From the Simulations Data folder in the GENESYS Wotkspace window add a DC Analysis simulation to determine the operating point of our device This is necessary ptior to any Harmonic Balance simulation From the Simulations Data folder in the GENESYS Workspace Window add a Harmonic Balance analysis Accept the default name or choose another Note that the default analysis is for the c
88. mode Tip Any of the parameters in this dialog box can be made tunable by placing a in front of the parameter System Simulation Parameters General Paths Calculate Composite Spectrum Options I Show Spectrum Contributors IV Show Totals Y Show Signals IV Show Intermods amp Harmonics Show Noise IV Identify Individual Components Above 200 dBm rM Enable Analyzer Mode Resolution Bandwidth RBW fi MHz IV Limit Frequencies Defaults to channel bandwidth Start E 000 MHz Filter Shape Gaussian to 118dBc 60 ChanBw y Stop 2000 MHz IV Randomize Noise y fi IV Add Analyzer Noise 150 dBm Hz Step WEE Eactory Defaults Show Spectrum Contributors This is a graph and table viewing option that will allow the user to determine what is displayed This option only affects the displayed output and will not affect any internal calculations When checked the spectrum at a node can be broken down into general groups or individual components when displayed When unchecked only totals will be shown Spectrum identification will only occur when this options is enabled and the Identify Individual Components Above options is also enabled SPECTRASYS System Identify Individual Components Above This threshold is used to show only individual spectral components above the given threshold This parameter is mainly used to reduce clutter on the graph s
89. of the line at the port In the default mode the nearest wall determines the direction of the line This value rarely needs to be overridden Current Dit Specifies the direction of current flow within the port The first figure below shows the default current direction fot external ports on strip type structures such as microsttip and stripline The second figure shows the default current direction for external EMPOWER External Ports ports on slot type structures such as coplanar waveguide For internal ports the default cutrent direction is Along Z This value also rarely needs to ovetridden YA 0 dx A Along X B Along Y yA slots A _ A y A dy dx x 0 dx 0 A Along Y B Along X Port Type Specifies the basic type of port Normal No Deembed and Internal e Normal ports ate external ports which are deembedded and may be multi mode They ate shown in gray on the layout e No Deembed ports ate external ports which are not deembedded and cannot be multi mode They are shown in white on the layout e Internal ports are also not deembedded and cannot be multi mode They ate shown in white on the layout For mote information on dembedding and multi mode lines see below Deembedding If you are actually building your circuit in the same style as an EMPort that is if your ports consist of a line which stops just short of the end wall as is often the case with a coax micros
90. on the from node If a source has not been created or has been disabled then SPECTRASYS will not be able to locate the path The from node and the to node can be any node in the schematic and is not restricted to an input ot an output port However the first node in the path node sequence must be the from node and the last node must be the to node All nodes in the path must be separated by commas and the thru nodes can be in any order Two functions exist on the Paths page of the System Simulation dialog box shown below to aid the user in specifying the path The first is an Add All Paths From All Sources button All possible port to port paths will be added to the System Simulation fot all ports that have a source defined If no soutces have been defined then no paths will be added If the number of paths becomes very large then the user will be prompted before adding the paths The second is an Add Path button which will prompt the user for the 1 Path Name 2 From Node and 3 To Node See the System Simulation Parameters Paths section for additional information Path Frequency This is the same as the Channel Frequency See Channel Frequency for more information Directional Energy Node Voltage and Power When more than two connections occur at a node a convention must be established in order to make sense of the information contained at the node for viewing a table or a level SPECTRASYS
91. or ranges of values EPHI phis thetas freqs the phi component of the total electric field Phis Thetas and fregs can either be single values or ranges of values ETOTAL phAis thetas freqs the magnitude of the total electric field Phis Thetas and freqs can either be single values or ranges of values ELHCP E field Left Hand Circular Polarization ERHCP E field Right Hand Circular Polarization EAR E field Axial Ratio The measurement wizard can be used to to select these measurements and the proper syntax is automatically generated Rectangular Antenna Polar and 3D charts may be generated to display the antenna data Only one variable out of Phi Theta and Frequency may be swept when displayed on the two dimensional charts and two variables may be swept when displayed on the 3D chart Below is both a rectangular and Antenna plot polar of the ETOTAL measurement where Theta is being swept from 0 to 360 degrees Phi is held constant at 0 and the frequency is held constant This particular antenna is a very small dipole located one wavelength above a ground plane on top of a substrate 2 8 m o i p tin a e DB ETota 0 Examples EMPOWER Viewer and Antenna Patterns e DB ETotal 0 This section illustrates the use of the EMPOWER viewer using a number of examples The WSP files for the examples are located in the subdirectory PROGRAM FILES
92. path and flowing in the same direction as the path IF Intermediate Frequency IIP3 Input Referenced Third Order Intercept Image Channel This is the channel defined by the image frequency of the first mixer and the channel bandwidth For example the channel 1000 to 1001 MHz would have an image channel of 800 to 801 MHz if an LO Frequency of 900 MHz was specified for the mixer LO Local Oscillator Offset Channel User defined channel relative to the main channel For example an offset channel specified as 50 MHz for a main Channel Frequency of 125 MHz would result in a channel of 75 MHz 1 2 Channel Bandwidth OIP3 Output Third Order Intercept LO Side Injection The relative indication of the LO frequency with respect to the mixer RF frequency The RF frequency can be either the input or the output of the mixer 87 Simulation For example if the mixer took a 1000 MHz and down convetted it to a 100 MHz IF then an LO frequency of 900 MHz is Low Side LO injection and an LO frequency of 1100 MHz is High Side LO injection MDS Minimum Detectable Discernable Signal which is equivalent to 174 dBm Hz System Noise Figure 10 Log Bandwidth Non Coherent Signal Two signals which ate not at constant phase offset are not coherent Path The course a signal takes from the source node to the destination node RBW Resolution Bandwidth SFDR Sputious Free Dynamic Range Undesired Spectrum Any
93. port data file which contains impedance data versus frequency This data file will be interpolated extrapolated as necessary See the Device Data section for a description of one port data files e Substrates Choosing a substrate causes the layer to get the rho thickness and roughness parameters from that substrate definition We recommend using this setting whenever possible so that parameters do not need to be duplicated between substrates and layouts Caution Unless thick metal is selected thickness is only used for calculation of losses It is not otherwise used and all strips are calculated as if they are infinitely thin Metal layers have three additional settings available Slot Type Check this box to simulate the non lossless metal areas as opposed to the metal areas in EMPOWER Use this for ground planes and other layers which are primarily metal Do not use this for lossy layers See your EMPOWER manual for details Current Direction Specifies which direction the current flows in this layer The default is along X and Y X Only and Y Only can be used to save times on long stretches of uniform lines Z Up Z Down XYZ Up and XYZ Down allow the creation of thick metal going up down to the next level or covet Thick Metal Checking this box forces EMPOWER to model the metal including thickness EMPOWER does this by putting two metal layers close together duplicating the traces on each and connecting them
94. ports all ports Add Path Invokes a wizard to assist the manual creation of a path Name Specifies the path name This name is used in output graphs to select the path s data Path from Node thru Node to Node a sequence of node numbets is specified here The system simulator chooses the shortest path which goes through the specified nodes in order Channel Frequency MHz Specifies the path frequency at the start node By default this parameter is blank which means that SPECTRASYS will use the frequency of a single source located on the s ar node If there is more than one source located on the start node the channel frequency is ambiguous and cannot be determined An error will appear in this case and the user must specify the desired channel frequency This frequency and the Channel Measurement Bandwidth make up the main channel for this path Delete Paths can be deleted by clicking the Delete button System Simulation Parameters Calculate Tab This page controls calculation of Intermods Harmonics and Noise Tip Any of the parameters in this dialog box can be made tunable by placing a in front of the parameter 90 SPECTRASYS System System Simulation Parameters Y x General Paths Calculate Composite Spectrum Options Harmonics and Intermods gt rv Y Calculate Harmonics 4 Manual Advanced These settings v From Sources Only amount of data MHz I Odd Orders Onl
95. result Only the following parameters can be displayed in dB form S GM E GOPT GMAX NF NEMIN and NMEAS Note that not all operators can be used with all measurements The Measurement must be column above indicates which type of parameter each operator can use For example ANGI Angle cannot be used with a real valued parameter such as GMAX so ANG GMAX is not allowed Measurements Overview Note All available measurements and their operators for a given circuit or sub circuit with their appropriate syntax are shown in the measurement wizatd To bring up the measurement wizard select measurement wizard from the graph properties dialog box Sample Measurements Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield S22 dB Magnitude of S22 dB Magnitude plus angle of S22 QL S21 Loaded Q of S21 Loaded Q of S21 MAG S21 Linear Magnitude of S21 Linear Magnitude of S21 IM Zin1 Input reactance at port 1 On a Smith Input reactance at port 1 chart S11 will be displayed while IM Zin1 will be used for the marker readouts S Shows dB Magnitude plus angle of all S Parameters RECTIS Shows real imaginary parts of all S Parameters SB1 On Smith or polar chart shows input Displays center radius and stability plane stability circles parameter of input plane stability circles NCI On Smith or polar chart shows Displays center and radius of all noise circles constant noi
96. setting whenevet possible so that parameters do not need to be duplicated in SCHEMAX and LAYOUT Air Above and Air Below The presence of air at the top of the box as in microstrip or the bottom of the box as in suspended microstrip is so common that special entries have been provided for these cases Checking the box to turn these layers on is the equivalent of adding a substrate layer with Er 1 Ur 1 and Height in units specified in the Dimensions tab as specified 259 Simulation 260 Caution When setting up a new circuit be sure to check the height of the air above as it is often the only parameter on this tab which must be changed and is therefore easily forgotten Metal Layers In LAYOUT multiple METAL layers e g copper and resistive film are automatically converted to one EMPOWER signal layer if no media layer is in between the metal layers All metal layers from the General Layer Tab are also shown in the EMPOWER Layer tab These layers are used for metal and other conductive material such as resistive film The following types are available e Lossless The layer is ideal metal e Physical Desc The layer is lossy These losses are described by Rho resistivity relative to copper Thickness and Surface Roughness e Electrical Desc The layer is lossy and is described by an impedance or file This type is commonly used for resistive films and superconductors If the entry in this box is a number it
97. signals since energy can be transferred to other frequencies in a nonlinear device Large signal S parameters are very useful in characterizing devices operating in the nonlinear range Note You must have a signal at the input port to use these measurements Measurements There ate three large signal S parameters measurements They are described as follows LargeSdb output port input port Magnitude of Large Signal S Parameters in dB i e LargeSdb 2 1 LargeSAng output port input port Angle of Large Signal S Parameters in degrees i e LargeSAng 2 1 LargeS output port input port Rectangular value of Large Signal S Parameters i e LargeS 2 1 Steps for Large signal S Parameter Analysis 1 Create a schematic with a PAC AC Power input at the input port Make sure soutce frequencies and powet levels have been specified 2 Create vatiables that are intended to be swept i e frequency power etc in the equations window 3 Adda HarBEC simulation 4 Add parameters sweeps of the desired variables such as frequency or power These sweeps ate added under the Simulation Data workspace folder 5 Adda graph Graphs are added under the Outputs workspace folder 6 Inthe graph select the correct sweep to use then type the measurement such as LargeS 2 1 for S21 Currently the measurement wizard cannot be used to add large signal S Parametets For an example of Large Signal S P
98. spectral tones and 2 the circuit has a steady state solution HARBEC works by solving Kirchoff s current law in the frequency domain It applies the stimulus sources to the designed network It then searches for a set of spectral voltages that will result in currents that sum to zero at each node and each frequency in the circuit It adjusts the voltage levels a spectrum of voltages at each node through a variety of methods until the sum of the currents is less than a user specified level see Absolute 43 Simulation 44 Error and Relative Error on the Harmonic Balance dialog box in the Reference Manual This process of searching is known as convergence The length of time it takes to take a search step is roughly equal to the cube of the product of the number of frequencies and the number of nonlinear nodes Thus if you double the number of frequencies in the circuit you can expect the solution to take roughly 8 times longer Howevet this is only a rough estimate The convergence process is complex and difficult to predict At a fundamental level harmonic balance solves a simultaneous set of nonlinear differential equations No mathematical approach is guaranteed to find a solution to the problem Years of work have gone into HARBEC to develop the most robust strategies available To add an harmonic balance simulation 1 Inthe Wotkspace Window click the New Item button and select Add Hatmonic Balance Analysis from the An
99. spectrum Noise Spectrum All spectrums created from noise sources in the schematic ate placed in the Noise Spectrum and also in the Total Spectrum Intermod Spectrum All spectrums created from intermods between two or more signals are placed in the Intermod Spectrum and also in the Total Spectrum Total Spectrum Every spectrum passing through a node will appear in this spectrum categoty Level Diagrams A level diagram is a diagram that can display measurements of cascaded stages along a uset defined path Each horizontal division of the x axis of the graph represents a stage along the path The first division represents the input to the cascade and the last division represents the output of the cascade The value of the measurements ate displayed on the vertical axis The concept of level diagrams has been around for several years RF designers have used level diagrams for decades to atchitect and design RF systems These diagrams have not appeared in commercial RF simulation software until SPECTRASYS Eagleware s implementation of a level diagram is unique and will help the RF engineer to optimize the RF system performance right from the diagram Level diagrams give the user a quick visual indication of the performance of the entire cascade Node numbers ate placed on the horizontal axis to show the node sequence of the path Furthermore schematic symbols ate extracted from the schematic and placed at the bott
100. spectrums will be created from this non linear spectrum and the peak LO spectrum frequency Any negative frequencies created during the difference calculations will be shifted by 180 degrees and folded back onto the positive frequency axis For all signals traveling from the RF port to the IF port the IF port amplifier is effectively bypassed The non lineat spectrum created by the internal amplifier on this pott will also appear on the input port and be propagated backwards due to the reverse isolation of the mixer It is assumed that the reverse isolation of the mixer is equivalent to the RF to IF isolation Signal Spectrum Arriving at the IF Port Spectrums will be treated identically to the RF port except for the fact that the amplifier on the IF port is used to create the non lineat spectrum appeating at the IF port input and the amplifier on the RF port will be bypassed Mixer LO Level Warning Maintaining proper mixer LO level is important to guarantee the performance of any mixer Typically this is a level that can easily be ovetlooked from one design turn to another The user must specifically check the LO power level to ensure that the mixer is operating in the expected range With SPECTRASYS this process is much easier and the user will automatically be notified if the mixer is being over or under driven The user has control of the LO drive level of each mixer and a global system simulation parameter that will check that the LO power is
101. the Channel Power measurement to determine which types of signals are included or ignored in this measurement Values Real value numeric Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type DB CGAINALL _ cascaded gain in dB MAG CGAINALL numeric value of the cascaded gain Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield DB CGAINALL DB CGAINALL DB CGAINALL MAG CGAINALE MAG CGAINALL MAG CGAINALL Not available on Smith Chart Carrier to Noise Ratio CNR This measurement is the ratio of the Desired Channel Power to Channel Noise Power along the specified path as shown by CNR n DCP n CNP n dB where n stage number 211 Simulation Both the Desired Channel Power and Channel Noise Power measurements use the main channel Note See the Desited Channel Power and Channel Noise Powet measurements to determine which types of signals are included or ignored in this measurement Values Real value numeric Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type DB CNR catrier to noise ratio in dB MAG CNR numeric value of the carrier to noise ratio Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization
102. the Desired Channel Power measurement to determine which types of signals are included or ignored in this measurement The only difference between this measurement and the Desired Channel Powet DCP measurement is that this measurement applies to the IM3 analysis pass only Consequently this will be the same measurement as DCP in the Calculate Intermods Along Path Manual Mode since a dedicated IM3 analysis is not created and the normal analysis is also the IM3 analysis pass Remember intermod bandwidth is function of the governing intermod equation For example if the intermod equation is 2F1 F2 then the intermod bandwidth would be 2BW1 BW2 Note Bandwidths never subtract and will always add The channel bandwidth must be set wide enough to include the entire bandwidth of the intermod to achieve the expected results The Automatic Intermod Mode will set the bandwidth appropriately Values Real value in Watts Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Desctiption Result Type DBM DCPIM3 desired third order intermod channel power in dBm MAG DCPIM3 magnitude of the desired third order intermod channel power in Watts Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield DBM DCPIM3 DBM DCPIM3 DBM DCPIM3 MAG DCPIM3 MAG DCPIM3 Not available on Smith Chart Offset Channel Power OCP The
103. the numerical model That eventually leads to monotonic convergence of calculated data and predictable errors of calculations The high grade of internal symmetries of the MoL based algorithms makes it possible to substantially reduce the numerical complexity of the main matrix computation stage The main restriction of using a regular grid related with its potentially excessive number of vatiables has been overcome by introducing thinning out and re expansion procedures Basically the discrete analogue of a problem is processed in a way similat to the method of moments but in discrete space like the finite difference approach which facilitates different aspects of the solution and programming Thus the main advantages of the MoL are reliable solution with the predictable calculation error relatively straightforward algorithms that facilitate development of general purpose programs and a lot of possibilities to speed up calculations and to increase accuracy of solutions For these reasons and others we decided to use it for the 325 Simulation 326 electromagnetic simulator This section summarizes the theoretical backgrounds with emphasis on the problem formulation and acceleration techniques Most commercial electromagnetic EM simulators designed for MIC and MMIC work are based on integral equations and the method of moments MoM EMPOWER is based on the method of lines MoL This technique has excellent error convergence propetties a
104. the same line as the parameter are assumed to be a description of the parameter Additionally units can be given inside squate brackets Currently supported units include Hz Ohm mho H F V A s C deg m W and DB If you use any of these units then other related units such as pF or dBm can be specified when the parts ate used Unrecognized units such as 1 V 3 above are simply put into the description so that the user knows what units must be entered for the part Additionally if the comment starts with Unused or Alias then the parameter is not shown to the user in GENESYS and the default value is used If the comment starts with Required then GENESYS will give an error if the parameter is not specified If the value NOT GIVEN is used as the default then GENESYS will not show a default but will just show optional for the default value Eagleware extension keywords 84 Advanced Modeling Kit All Eaglewate extension keywords are placed inside comments in the Verilog A and are always placed between two pairs of percent signs like A AKEYWORD MAKEYWORD value o Since these keywords are placed in comments they will be ignored by other simulators The keywords must be placed inside the module that they are to affect after the module statement Keywords only affect one module If you have multiple modules in your VA file you will need to duplicate any keywords which ate to affect multiple modules DEV
105. the solution given so you should not EMPOWER Tips have this option turned on unless you actually intend to run the viewer You can turn this option on and off by using the checkbox labeled Generate Viewer Data Slowet when starting an EMPOWER run You will not normally need viewer data and when it is needed you will not normally need viewet data at evety frequency Our recommendation 1 Run all problems the first time without generating viewer data If the answer is completely unexpected check for errors in your description of the file This can save a lot of time in the experimenting stage 2 Ifyou decide you want viewer data open the EMPOWER Options dialog box Reduce the number of frequency points to be analyzed and turn on Generate Viewer Data Slower Recalculate the EMPOWER simulation and you will now have viewer data at some points 3 If your problem is very large you may want to increase the cell size or make other tradeoffs to reduce the time required for calculation If you use this technique save the file with a new name before you generate viewer data so that you do not corrupt your existing S Parameter data See the EMPOWER Viewer section for more information In the normal mode EMPOWER solves for the currents in the metal There is an additional mode where EMPOWER solves for the voltages in the gaps and in lossy metals This mode must be turned on manually by checking Slot type structure when sta
106. this material because MoL is less well known than the method of moments or the finite difference method MoL can be represented as a simple combination of both method of moments and finite difference method Thus we have skipped common parts and given our attention to the otiginal parts of the algorithm More details on particular algorithm parts accuracy and convergence investigation results can be found in publications listed in the References section in the EMPOWER Engine Theory and Algorithms section Basically the theory behind the simulator can be reduced to the following An initial 3D problem in a layered medium is reduced to a 2D problem through a partial discretisation of the Maxwell s equations and its solution for a homogeneous layer in a grid spectral domain The resultant matrix relating local grid currents and voltages is reduced to an immitance matrix relating integral currents and voltages in ports To extract a generalized scattering matrix of the problem from the immitance matrix the method of simultaneous diagonalizations is used After this introduction we are ready to formulate the reasons for using MoL as a basis for an electromagnetic simulator The 3D problem is discretized only in two directions and reduced to a 2D one that cotresponds naturally to the planar MIC structures In contrast with the method of moments the MoL gives a self regularized solution with only one vatiable grid cell size defining all parameters of
107. to simulate it This is much mote efficient than using an extra metal layer Click OK The LAYOUT editor appears The screen should look like similar to EMPOWER Operation Y GENESYS FA Equations 3 Substrates Optimizations Drawing the Layout To draw the series line 1 Select the Rectangle button from the LAYOUT toolbar This is the third button on the bottom toolbar 2 Click on the left edge of the page border and drag toward the right and down until the status bar shows DX 425 and DY 50 3 Release the mouse button This is the series transmission line The screen should now look as below Don t worry if the line isn t at the exact same position on the page the layout will be centered later 245 Simulation 246 E Layout Workspace WorkSpace 1 To draw the open stub 1 Select the Rectangle button from the toolbar 2 Click at the bottom edge of the line just drawn one grid cell left of the series line s center 3 Drag to the right and down until the status bar shows DX 25 and DY 225 4 Release the mouse button The screen should now look like the following If the stub line isn t centered horizontally on the screen select the stub by clicking on it and drag it to the proper position EMPOWER Operation E Layoutl Workspace WorkSpace 1 As a general rule EMPOWER simulation time is greatly reduced if the circuit to be simulated exhibits symmetry in any o
108. types tenga deett 276 277 Smith Chart sica 32 39 179 181 183 Solid Wire button voces 303 311 SOPIDB iia 230 SOPSAT ue 232 Sources S pafaAMEtEet occse 35 158 160 S Parametets 179 185 340 Special Options sse 44 Spectral Origin 124 SPECTRASYS eee ww 17 18 SPECTRASYS Broadband Noise 116 SPECTRASYS Channel Frequency SPECTRASYS Coherency SPECTRASYS Composite Spectrum 122 SPECTRASYS Creating a Schematic 17 SPECTRASYS IIP3 Distortion 112 SPECTRASYS Intermods and Harmonics 108 SPECTRASYS Level Diagrams 121 SPECTRASYS Measurement Bandwidth 104 SPECTRASYS Mixer 26 SPECTRASYS Offset Channel 105 SPECTRASYS Options see 105 SPECTRASYS Sources 127 SPECTRASYS Spectral Origin 124 SPECTRASYS Tone Channel Frequenieys 214 Spectrum 120 SPICE tas 1 52 177 SPICE File Compatibility 176 Spiral Inductor 275 289 290 295 296 Spt adsheets AA eee ee teniy 134 Spurious Free Dynamic Range 228 SOR ie tii Aa 145 Ail e 41 SS 342 Stability iacere orte 179 183 Stability Circles te sieben 196 Stability Factor rinc n 196 Stability Measure sees 196 Stage Dynamic Range sss 229 Stage Noise Figure sse 229 Stage Output 1 dB Compression Point 230 Stage Out
109. users and assumes that you are familiar with basic concepts of binary arithmetic and logical operators Whenever a logical operation such as amp or is performed the values used are first converted to 32 bit signed integers truncated The operation is performed and then the numbers are converted back to floating point format This causes logical operators to work as expected when combined with relational operators true is given a value of 1 which corresponds to all ones in binary notation false is 0 which corresponds to all zeroes So when a logical operation is performed after a relational test the value is either 1 true or 0 false This is the rationale for having the IF THEN GOTO Statement branch on a nonzero value Relational operators act as expected on binary numbers although there are no facilities included for conversion between binary and decimal format So the value of 5 amp 4 is 4 and the value of 128 64 is 192 The not operator I changes each 0 in the binary representation to a 1 and changes each 1 to a 0 Here are logical operator truth tables A B lA A amp B 0 0 1 0 o gt H 1 0 1 o 0 0 h Hh 0 1 User Functions Functions can be created in GENESYS Their format is FUNCTION same parm parm2 equations RETURN expression Functions take zero or mote parameters as input and return exactly one value as output All variables used within a function are local that is variables cannot be sha
110. will be used in Verilog A SPECTRASYS System Linear Y mattix models are created from the behavioral models in SPECTRASYS These Y matrix models are used to determine the impedance of each element along the propagating path of the signals Once the impedance and gain are known the correct node voltage for a given spectral component can be determined for every node for all elements Using this technique VSWR interactions are automatically accounted for For the system non linear devices such as the RF amplifier and mixer RFAMP MIXERP and MIXERA a Y matrix model is also used to determine the impedance and gain However the non lineat parameters of the models such as P1dB PSAT IP3 and IP2 are used to determine the non linear behavior of the model such as harmonic intermod generation mixing and gain compression Adjacent Channel This is a channel that has the same bandwidth as the main channel but center frequency moved up or down by the channel bandwidth ACP Adjacent Channel Power Channel The combination of the channel frequency and channel measurement bandwidth For example the channel 99 5 to 100 5 MHz would be specified as a channel frequency of 100 MHz with a channel bandwidth of 1 MHz Coherent Signal Two signals which are at a constant phase offset are coherent In SPECTRASYS coherent signals must come from the same soutce Desired Spectrum This is the spectrum that originated along the specified
111. will be a nonlinear part such as a BJT model 4 Enter the parameters for the part The parameters that you enter will be used as the default for the part 5 Use the part in a schematic Enter a part that has a desired symbol Change it to use yout new Single Part model using the Model button on the part dialog Alternately use the More button on the toolbar Then change the model and symbol as prompted One advantage of the single part model is that default values can be easily overridden when used in a design If you are used to Model statements in other simulators single part models allow you to follow this paradigm while giving more flexibility 173 Simulation Change Model x Category Buitin Microstrip y New Modet Cancel Text Model Definitions Note The preferred method for creating models is to use the schematic based model editor described in User Model Example A Self Resonant Capacitor If you do not have SCHEMAX you may cteate a text description of your models The format is as follows MODEL name parm barm2 model equation lines model description lines DEEP nodel node2 noden name whete e name is the name of the model parm ate the parameters specified by the user model equation lines contain the equations for the model model description lines contain elements which make up the model e nis the number of external nodes on the model node are the external nodes u
112. with a regular grid while keeping the main advantages of the equidistant grid The described procedure with total elimination of some currents inside the solid metal regions is called the wire model It basically substitutes a problem with another one with removed small metalization pieces It certainly gives an additional error but fortunately this error is opposite to the regular grid model error In other words the wire thinning out model actually increases the solution accuracy if the structure is thinned out properly However if too much metal is removed the thinning out error dominates Thus a solid thinning out model procedure was introduced to avoid it The solid model can be represented as a simple modification of the wire model To explain it we start from the pseudo non equidistant grid of currents formed for the filter and shown above Instead of complete elimination of the currents inside the enlarged grid cells we leave some of them to keep metal surface solid Those currents left are also replaced with just two variables by means of linear re expansion The solid model is more correct but gives a larger number of variables for similarly thinned out problems in comparison with the wire model The solid model is actually a way to form a non equidistant grid with the grid function re expansion in a discrete space EMPOWER Theory The GGF matrix of a symmetrical problem could be reduced to a centrosymmetrical matrix with centrosymm
113. with arbitrary terminations can be visualized on the Smith chart using gain circles SUPERSTAR plots three forms of gain circles transducer gain unilateral circles GU1 for the input network and GU2 for the output netwotk power gain output network circles GP and available gain input netwotk circles GA Shown below are the input and output unilateral transducer gain circles GU1 and GU2 of the Avantek AT10135 GaAsFET transistor SUPERSTAR circles are plotted at the frequency of the first marker in this case 2500 MHz Marker 1 is plotted at the center of the smallest circle the point of maximum gain The gain at the circumference of each circle of increasing radius is 1 dB lower than the previous inside circle 37 Simulation 38 Response SPARAM 50 DB GUt DB GUI DB GU2 DE GUI DE GUI DE GU2 2500 3500 8500 12000 2500 3500 8500 12000 2 91388 4 58296 3 8764 19382 10 3031 12 2167 8 40433 5 35212 2 91388 4 58296 3 8764 19382 0 0 0 0 The arc which is orthogonal to the gain circles is the locus of smallest circle center points from the lowest to highest sweep frequency Tuning the first matker frequency moves the center of the circles along this atc Notice that a complex conjugate match at the input improves the gain by over 3 dB in relation to an unmatched 50 ohm source impedance However matching the output provides less than 1 dB gain improvement An examination of the device S parameter data
114. with z directed currents If thick metal is used then Current Direction is ignored 279 Simulation Element Z Ports This sctting specifies the default direction for automatically created clement potts either to the level above or to the level below Generally you should choose the electrically shortest path for this direction 280 EMPOWER External Ports Overview Every EMPOWER circuit must contain at least one port These ports are divided into two major categories external ports which are at a sidewall and internal ports which are inside the box This section will cover only external ports internal ports are discussed in a later section of this manual Placing External Ports By now you should be familiar with the placement of external ports EMPorts If not you should follow the first example To briefly review An external port is placed in LAYOUT by selecting EMPott from the toolbar These ports are generally placed on the edge of the box at the end of a line This figure shows a comparison between a pott in circuit theory and a pott in EMPOWER In the circuit theory schematic on the left there are two ports Each port has two terminals with the bottom terminal generally being ground In the EMPOWER illustration shown on the right the figure the section of line stops before the edge of the box generally one cell width away and a pott begins in its place See the Grid discussion in the Basics section t
115. within a user specified widow of the LO drive level The user specified mixer LO parameter is the Mixer LO Range specified on the Options tab of the System Simulation dialog box During system calculations SPECTRASYS will integrate the entire LO spectrum power and this power will be compared to the mixer LO drive level If this LO power is outside the specified LO range a local error will be created and the mixer will change color indicating to the user that a potential error has occurred in the mixer Desired Output The Desired Output mixer parameter is only used by SPECTRASYS to determine the desired channel frequency along a path defined through the mixer This parameter does not affect the operation of the mixer in any way LO Drive Level The LO Drive Level parameter is currently only used by the mixer to determine if the target LO power level of the mixer This information combined with the Warning Range on the Options Tab in the System Simulation Dialog Box is used to watn the user if the mixer is being statved or over dtiven Noise Arriving at the RF and IF Ports A noise soutce is treated just like any other signal source However since this is currently a time independent simulator noise will not create intermods harmonics and be used with reverse isolation 115 Simulation 116 Broadband Noise Broadband Noise SPECTRASYS can ptocess latge blocks of spectrum very quickly and broadband noise is no exception
116. you should look at the information area at the top of the screen to see if symmetty is active If it is not recheck your problem to see if it is exactly centered on the box and to see if it is in fact symmetrical Two tools can help with this 1 Using Center Selected on Page from the Edit menu in LAYOUT This command makes it easy to make sure that your circuit is exactly centered on the page 2 Showing the listing file by selecting Show Listing File from the EMPOWER right click menu This file shows exactly how the problem was put on the grid and lack of symmetry is often obvious Making an unsymmettical problem symmetrical will make it run 4 times faster in most cases and will make it 16 times faster if your problem can use two mirror symmetty See EMPOWER Basics section for more information on cells and the problem geometry Sec the Files section for more information on the listing file For most examples the default thinning out should be used As a general rule you will get better accuracy for a given amount of time and memory when you use thinning Thinning out helps by removing currents which have little or no effect This reduces the number of vatiables in the problem considerably with little effect on the accuracy of the solution There are a few cases where thinning out should not be used and they generally involve vety large sections of metal which are affected too much by thinning out The Dual Mode Powet Dividet ex
117. 03 7280 7290 7350 7371 7392 7425 7488 7500 7546 7560 7644 7680 7700 7722 7776 7800 7840 7875 7920 7938 8000 8008 8019 8064 8085 8100 8125 8190 8192 8232 8250 8316 8320 8400 8424 8448 8505 8575 8580 8624 8640 8736 8748 8750 8775 8800 8820 8910 8918 8960 9000 9009 9072 9100 9152 9216 9240 9261 9360 9375 9408 9450 9477 9504 9555 9600 9604 9625 9702 9720 9750 9800 9828 9856 9900 9984 10000 EMPOWER Tips Using Thick Up or Thick Down metal will greatly increase the complexity of an EMPOWER run as all metal layers must be duplicated for the top and bottom of the thick metal and z directed currents must be added along the sides of all metal The detailed of defining metal layers is found in the EMPOWER layers dialog box as follows Metal Layers All metal layers from the General Layer Tab are also shown in the EMPOWER Layer tab These layers are used for metal and other conductive material such as resistive film The following types are available e Lossless The layer is ideal metal e Physical Desc The layer is lossy These losses are described by Rho resistivity relative to copper Thickness and Surface Roughness e Electrical Desc The layer is lossy and is described by an impedance or file This type is commonly used for resistive films and superconductors If the entry in this box is a number it specifies the impedance of the material in ohms per square If the entry in this box is a filename it specifies the name of a one
118. 1 The figure below shows the plot from this example This plot of S11 shows a return loss minimum at 1500 MHz the capacitor s self resonant frequency 171 Simulation WP Plot of 11 iG x Freq MHz Model Properties To open Create a new User Model Model Properties x Parameter 7 M r Input Resistance RES ohm 12 Cain Current Gain None i3 None a None 5 None e None None B None zl Note In GENESYS 8 0 all parameters are converted to GENESYS standard units before being passed into your model They are the ones shown on the units combo box NL nonlinear units are a convenience when using nonlinear devices which are generally specified using fundamental units Layout Association TWO OK Cancel Parameter These entries ate the parameter variables that can be used in model equations When referring to these parameters in a model they must appear precisely as entered here with the exception of upper lower case they ate not case sensitive Description Human readable description of each parameter This description is shown in SCHEMAX part dialog boxes Units Describes what type of units that each parameter uses Layout Association Defines which association table entry to use for this model This defines the default footprint which w
119. 14 SPECTRASYS will aid the user in understanding the output spectrum of the mixer and all of its non ideal characteristics such as isolation Three types of mixers are available in SPECTRASYS they are Passive Active and Intermod Table Mixer The only difference between the Passive and Active mixer is respectively the Conversion Loss and Conversion Gain See RF Mixer and Intermod Table Mixer in the Element Manual fot more specific information about each mixer Passive and Active Mixer Model The mixer can be thought of as two amplifiers one on the RF port and the other on the IF port both facing an ideal frequency translation or mixet as shown in the following figure RF 1 IF 2 LO to RF Isolation LO to IF Isolation LO 3 The isolation parameters appear port to port and bypass the effects of the amplifiers and ideal mixer Any signal appearing on any of these ports will be propagated to all of the other ports through the respective isolation Obviously no frequency translation is taking place during the isolation calculations Signal Spectrum Arriving at the LO Port All spectrums arriving al the LO port will be propagated without a frequency translation to the RF and IF ports with their respective isolations However only the highest power level LO signal is currently being used to create the mixed output spectrum of the mixer Obviously no mixed output spectrum will be created unless an LO signal is present o
120. 226 Measurements SPECTRASYS Commonly Used Operators Operator Desctiption Result Type PRNF Stage Generated Noise Figure as a Percent Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield PRNF PRNF Not available on Smith Chart Percent Third Order Intermod PRIM3 This routine calculates the Percent Third Order Intermod Contribution by each stage to the final Total Third Order Intermod Power of the path PRIM3 Percent 3rd Order Intermod Power GIM3P Generated 3rd Order Intermod Power CGAINIM3 Cascade Gain for the Intermod Pass TIM3P Total 3rd Order Intermod Power IM3REF Equivalent 3rd Order Intermod Power Referenced to the Output IM3REF GIM3P n CGAINIM3 nLastStage CGAINIMO n PRIM3 n IM3REF n TIM3P iLastStage this is a ratio in Watts Where PRIM3 0 0 n is the current stage and nLastStage is the last stage along the designated path This measurement will help the user pinpoint all stages and their respective contribution to the total third order intermod power of the selected path This measurement in unit less since the measurement is a percentage There can be a few cases where the percentage sum of all the stages in the path does not equal 100 For instance if the architecture contains parallel paths then each path would contribute to the total third order intermod power but only a single path is considered in this measurement Another
121. 323 1344 1350 1365 1372 1375 1386 1400 1404 1408 1430 1440 1456 1458 1470 1485 1500 1512 1536 1540 1560 1568 1575 1584 1600 1617 1620 1625 1638 1650 1664 1680 1701 1715 1716 1728 1750 1755 1760 1764 1782 1792 1800 1820 1848 1872 1875 1890 1911 1920 1925 1944 1950 1960 1980 2000 2002 2016 2025 2048 2058 2079 2080 2100 2106 2112 2145 2156 2160 2184 2187 2200 2205 2240 2250 2268 2275 2288 2304 2310 2340 2352 2376 2400 2401 2430 2450 2457 2464 2475 2496 2500 2520 2548 2560 2574 2592 2600 2625 2640 2646 2673 2688 2695 2700 2730 2744 27750 2772 2800 2808 2816 2835 2860 2880 2912 2916 2925 2940 2970 3000 3003 3024 3072 3080 3087 3120 3125 3136 3150 3159 3168 3185 3200 3234 3240 3250 3276 3300 3328 3360 3375 3402 3430 3432 3456 3465 3500 3510 3520 3528 3564 3575 3584 3600 3640 3645 3675 3696 3744 3750 3773 3780 3822 3840 3850 3861 3888 3900 3920 3960 3969 4000 4004 4032 4050 4095 4096 4116 4125 4158 4160 4200 4212 4224 4290 4312 4320 4368 4374 4375 4400 4410 4455 4459 4480 4500 4536 4550 4576 4608 4620 4680 4704 4725 4752 4800 4802 4851 4860 4875 4900 4914 4928 4950 4992 5000 5005 5040 5096 5103 5120 5145 5148 5184 5200 5250 5265 5280 5292 5346 5376 5390 5400 5460 5488 5500 5544 5600 5616 5625 5632 5670 5720 5733 5760 5775 5824 5832 5850 5880 5940 6000 6006 6048 6075 6125 6144 6160 6174 6237 6240 6250 6272 6300 6318 6336 6370 6400 6435 6468 6480 6500 6552 6561 6600 6615 6656 6720 6750 6804 6825 6860 6864 6875 6912 6930 7000 7007 7020 7040 7056 7128 7150 7168 7200 72
122. 40 3 0 44 145 2 47 43 115 61 43 48 3 5 46 137 2 15 33 133 58 43 58 4 0 46 127 1 91 23 153 53 45 68 4 5 47 116 1 72 13 178 50 46 75 5 0 49 104 1 58 3 201 47 48 82 159 Simulation 160 6 0 59 81 1 34 17 247 36 43 101 lf Fmin Gammaopt Rn Zo GHz dB MAG ANG 0 1 1 2 42 3 0 17 0 5 1 2 10 14 0 17 1 0 1 3 05 28 0 17 2 0 1 7 30 154 0 16 4 0 3 0 54 118 0 35 A sample 1 port Z parameter data file is shown below This data file could be used to specify a port impedance that varied over frequency Notice that the data is real and imaginary RI impedance Z data taken across several frequency points 13 90 to 14 45 MHz that has been normalized to 1 ohm R 1 MHZZRIR1 3 90 30 8 29 2 4 00 31 6 6 6 4 05 32 0 4 7 4 10 32 4 16 0 4 15 32 7 27 2 4 20 33 1 38 4 4 25 33 5 49 5 4 30 33 9 60 7 4 35 34 3 71 7 4 45 35 1 93 7 Most device files provided with GENESYS are S parameter files in the usual device configuration typically common emitter or common source Devices you add to the library may use the ground terminal of your choice Howevet if you always keep data in a consistent format recotd keeping chores are greatly minimized Export S Parameters in the File menu writes S parameter data from any simulation or data source This output data file has exactly the same format as S parameter files used to import data This allows the user to analyze tune and optimize sub networks which are th
123. 7 MHz It is interesting to note that if a and 4 lt d then the frequency of the dominant mode is not a function of the cavity height This is not the case for certain higher order modes The mode which is next higher in frequency than the dominant mode is a function of the relative values of h a and b Consider for example the previous 2x4x0 5 inch box or any size box with the size ratios b 2a and 1 4 Therefore the wave numbers ate J 2 T 2 2 mo m 16n E p zw a 4 j The wave numbers for the lowest frequency modes for this shape box and the resonant frequencies with a 2 inches are listed here Freq MHz a 2 Mode Wave inches 1 118pi a 3299 1 414pi a 4173 1 803pi a 5319 2 062pi a 6083 EMI 2 236pi a 6598 3 01 104 105 01 106 esr 2 693pi a 7945 EN 3 041pi a 8974 ES 3 162pi a 9331 Notice that higher order modes occur frequently after dominant mode resonance It is possible to minimize perturbations in narrowband applications by operating between resonant frequencies However the above analysis assumes a pure homogeneous 322 EMPOWER Box Modes rectangular cavity and dielectric Partial dielectric loading and signal metal within the cavity will influence the frequency mote conservative and safer approach is to enclose the circuit in a box with the dominant resonant mode higher than the highest frequency of interest If the cavity is not homogeneous
124. 797 Fmin dB 0 64 0 71 0 75 0 87 0 99 1 17 1 34 27 0 20 679 32 8 20 328 52 7 18 378 71 1 16 211 87 2 14 148 172 7 5 243 144 9 3 914 125 9 3 037 113 2 2 457 Gammaopt 0 22 0 09 0 06 0 09 0 19 0 26 0 38 25 97 139 175 147 125 101 159 1 0 0221 155 0 0 0267 140 2 0 0409 127 7 0 0531 117 7 0 0614 109 4 0 0695 48 8 0 5440 102 6 0 0747 46 1 0 4736 96 5 0 0795 91 3 0 0850 86 4 0 0893 84 1 0 0917 64 8 0 1147 48 5 0 1359 34 4 0 1524 22 5 0 1699 72 0 0 9326 70 8 0 9157 63 9 0 8256 57 2 0 7212 52 2 0 6237 44 0 0 4168 41 9 0 3619 40 4 0 3209 40 1 0 3021 34 7 0 1662 27 8 0 1538 21 3 0 1899 15 8 0 2239 Rn Zo where Zo 50 MAG ANG 0 12 0 08 0 09 0 10 0 08 0 11 0 17 INFINEON TECHNOLOGIES Munich noise parameters 19 2 22 9 36 4 47 9 57 4 65 0 72 0 77 5 83 3 88 2 90 9 120 6 173 1 151 8 124 4 Device Data GENESYS is supplied with a large number of nonlinear parts in its libraries Models for these parts are based on data supplied by the manufacturets the best source of the latest part information The libraries consist of several workspace files that contain models for a range of parts from each manufacturer You can examine the exact contents of any of the files by simply opening the workspace files which are located in the Model subdirectory Most models are represented as a link to a SPICE file The spice files are located in the
125. 80 Other Operators MAG ANG ANG360 IM MAGANG360 Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield N22 RE N22 real part of N22 RECT N Shows real imaginary parts of all N Parameters MAG N21 Linear Magnitude of H21 Linear Magnitude of N21 N Shows real imaginary parts of all N Parameters Not available on Smith Chart 192 Measurements Linear Simultaneous Match Gamma at Port i GMi The Simultaneous Match Gamma is a complex function of frequency and is available for 2 port networks only Computes the reflection coefficient that must be seen by the input port to achieve a simultaneous conjugate match at both the input and output Values Complex value versus frequency Simulations Linear Default Format Table RECT Graph RE Smith Chart GM Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type RECT GM1 real imaginary parts RE GM1 MAGANG GM2 Linear magnitude and angle in range of 180 to 180 Other Operators MAG ANG ANG360 IM MAGANG360 Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield GM real imaginary parts of gamma for all ports GM1 RE GM1 RECT GM1 Simultaneous Match Admittance Impedance at Port i ZMi YMi The Simultaneous Match Admittance is a complex function of frequency and is available fot 2 port networks only This is the value of ad
126. 9 Note that this is an EMPOWER Theory observation and it cannot be proven to work for all problems The technique used here for the descriptor matrix evaluation using current sources in the metal plane is empirical The evaluation accuracy depends on parasitic high order modes that could be excited by cutrent soutces and if they ate close to their cutoffs or even ate propagating the estimated descriptor matrix could be far away from the cotrect one This can be expected however since teal circuits which have unexpected high order modes near the cutoff usually do not work properly either empower S B Worm R Pzegla 1984 K S Yee 1966 Also T Weiland 1977 B Sestroretzkiy 1977 G Kron 1944 furo wenimle Esker Rss Grid Green s Function The Grid Green s Function GGF has been mentioned quite a few times The GGF is a solution of the differential difference analogue of Maxwell s equations A 1 excited by a unit grid current Jx Jy or Jz The solution or response function is a discrete function in the xy plane and continuous inside layer along the z axis Actually to solve the formulated problem we need just a contraction of the GGF to the signal plane and to the regions with non zero z directed currents This contraction is a matrix due to the discretization To find the GGF matrix we used a spectral approach similar to one used in the spectral domain technique or in the method of moments Nikol skii 1982 Vesnin
127. AG VTP2 voltage at test point TP2 MAG VTP2 Not available on Smith Chart Reference Impedance ZPORTI 202 The reference impedance measurements are complex functions of frequency The measurements are associated with the network terminations The frequency range and intervals are as specified in the Linear Simulation dialog box This measurement is the same as the linear measurement of the same name A port number 7 is used to identify the port ZPORT is the reference impedance for port 7 Values Complex value versus frequency Simulations Linear Default Format Table RECT Graph RE Smith Chart None Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type RECT ZPORT 1 real imaginaty parts RE ZPORT2 real part MAGANG ZPORT3 Linear magnitude and angle in range of 180 to 180 Other Operators MAGI ANGI ANG360 IM MAGANG360 Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield Measurements Nonlinear ZPORT2 RE ZPORT2 RECT ZPORT2 RECT ZPORT Shows real imaginary parts for all ports MAG ZPORT1 Linear Magnitude of ZPORT2 Linear Magnitude of ZPORT1 ZPORT Shows real imaginary parts of all ports Large signal S parameters can be measured in a HarBEC simulation Unlike linear S parameters nonlinear large signal S parameters depend upon the signal magnitude and must take into account the harmonic content of the input and output
128. Add New r Default Viahole Layers Top Layer E TOP METAL y Bottom Layer IB Bottom Cover y Cancel Apply The EMPOWER grid settings for this example are shown in the upper right above EMPOWER simulation time is greatly reduced if dimensions are chosen so that metal lies exactly on as large a grid size as possible The grid width and height settings for this filter were chosen as 12 5 since the filter dimensions 425x275 are exactly divisible by this value General Layers The general layer settings for this example are shown below 242 EMPOWER Operation LAYOUT Properties x General Associations General Layer EMPOWER Layers Fonts TOP MASK Mask m nm mj m e 2 TOP SILK Silk E rn r m i gt TOP METAL Metal O B rr r we i SUBSTRATE Substrate Y r mw fe i5 BOTMETAL Metal mE B nm Iv Ive 8 BOT SILK Silk mu 4r Iv mp 7 BOT MASK Mask E r vr e None m n r Vv io e None B E O m io g None E Jr H Vv jo g None E a O EH We E Only three layers had to be defined for this filter e Top Metal e Substrate e Bottom Metal These are the only layers that are needed to simulate the microstrip filter For a general layout more layers ate often included for purposes only For example defining a silk screen or mask layer would not affect simulation since none of the filter metal is placed on those lay
129. CNP 0 CNF n in dBm where n stage number 223 Simulation The MDS value at stage n represents the MDS of the entire system up to and including stage n Consequently the MDS of the entire system is the value indicated at the last stage in the path ot chain The minimum detectable signal is the equivalent noise power present on the input to a receiver that sets the limit on the smallest signal the receiver can detect For example if the thermal noise power input to a receiver is 174 dBm Hz and the channel bandwidth is 1 MHz 10 Log 1 MHz 60 dB then the input channel power would be 114 dBm For a cascaded noise figure of 5 dB the minimum detectable signal would be 109 dBm See the Channel Noise Power measurement to determine which types of signals are included or ignored in this measurement Values Real value in Watts Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Desctiption Result Type DB MDS minimum detectable signal in dBm MAG MDS magnitude of the minimum detectable signal in Watts Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield DB MDS DB MDS MAG MDS MAG MDS Not available on Smith Chart Image Channel Power IMGP 224 This measurement is the integrated power of the image channel from the path input to the first mixer After the first mixer the Mixer Ima
130. Description Result Type DB SNF stage noise figure in dB MAG SNF numeric value of the stage noise figure Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield DB SNF DB SNF DB SNF MAG SNF MAG SNF Not available on Smith Chart Stage Output 1 dB Compression Point SOP1DB This measurement is the output 1 dB compression point specified in the element parameters for the particular stage This parameter is currently only available for the SPECTRASYS non linear behavioral models such as amplifiers and mixers For all stages where this parameter is not specified a large default value of 100 dBm is used Values Real value in Watts Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type DBM SOP1DB stage output 1 dB compression point in dBm MAG SOP1DB numeric value of the stage output 1 dB compression point Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield DBM SOP1DB DBM SOP1DB DBM SOP1DB MAG SOP1DB MAG SOP1DB MAG SOP1DB 230 Measurements SPECTRASYS Not available on Smith Chart Stage Output Second Order Intercept SOIP2 This measurement is the output second otder intercept specified in the element parameters for the particular stage This parameter is cutrently only available for the SPECTRASYS non l
131. ER will create a 4 port data file for this circuit E N s Note Internal ports and no deembed ports must always have higher numbers than normal external deembedded ports In the figure above the internal ports are numbered 3 and 4 while the external ports are numbered 1 and 2 The data file created by EMPOWER can then be used in GENESYS The circuit on the tight above uses the resulting data in a complete network First a FOU four port data device was placed on the blank schematic The name assigned to this FOU block was the name of the internal file from the EMPOWER run WSP Simulations EM1 EMPOWER SS An input and output were added on nodes one and two of the FOU block the ground was added to the ground node and a capacitor was connected across ports 3 and 4 This has the effect of putting the capacitor into the EMPOWER simulation This capacitor can then be tuned and optimized just like any other element in GENESYS When the S Parameters of MYNET ate displayed you see the resulting S Parameters of the entire circuit One advantage of EMPOWER is its true integration In most electromagnetic simulators you would have no choice but to go through the complicated steps above Imagine how tedious this would be if you had 10 lumped elements 2 transistors and an op amp chip in the box Fortunately when EMPOWER is combined with SUPERSTAR SCHEMAX and LAYOUT the internal ports and lumped
132. Equations MFilter1 MFilterl M TA arme Tenia Hae Color MH Em O C mmm ip pers M CC i3 Mritert EM1 S21 C C I MFitter1 EM1 511 Iv r O m C C C C Li m xl Left Y Axis Right Y Axis X Axis IV uto Scale v Auto Scale Iv Auto Scale Log Scale Help Cancel Min 50 Min 5 Min 1950 SA Measurement Wizard E x Max 0 Max o Mag 2450 A Equation Wigard Divisions ro Divisions Divisions Advanced Properties Enter the name of a parameter to graph or press a wizard button to guide you through the process of creating a measurement Note You can also use the Measurement Wizard instead of manually typing in the measurement 22 Now it s time to analyze what each simulation is showing us Below is the graph which shows us both linear and EM simulations Notice how the EM response is slightly down in frequency The linear simulator does not take parasitic losses and box effects into account like the EM simulator does The main reason why the EM response is shifted down in frequency is because the footprint pads for the capacitors actually add more capacitance to the filter The filter responses ate shown below The red and blue response is S21 and S11 of the linear simulation and the orange response is S21 and the green response is 11 of the EM simulation mrilter1 Response Workspace EmWalkthru of x Lislag iwa Lew Lslaa
133. GTF Journal of Theoretical Physics 1948 v 18 p 959 970 P I Kuznetsov R L Stratonovich The propagation of electromagnetic waves in multiconductor transmission lines Pergamon Press Oxford 1964 originally published in Russian 1958 K S Yee Numerical solution of initial boundary value problems involving Maxwell s equations in isotropic media IEEE Trans v AP 14 1966 p 302 307 V V Nikol skii Variational approach to internal problems of electromagnetics in Russian Moscow Nauka 1967 J Meixner The behavior of electromagnetic fields at edges IEEE Trans v AP 20 1972 N 7 p 442 446 B V Sestroretzkiy RLC and Rt analogies of electromagnetic space in Russian in Computer aided design of microwave devices and systems Edited by V V Nikol skii Moscow MIREA 1977 p 127 128 T Weiland Eine Methode zur Losung der Maxwellschen Gleichngen for Sechskomponentige Feleder auf Dikreter Basis Arch Electron Uebettragungstech v 31 N 3 1977 p 116 120 Computer aided design of microwave devices in Russian Edited by V V Nikol skii Moscow Radio i Sviaz 1982 R H Jansen The spectral domain approach for microwave integrated circuits IEEE Trans v MTT 33 1985 N 10 p 1043 1056 S G Vesnin Electromagnetic models for design of microstrip microwave structures in Russian Ph D Thesis MPEI Moscow 1985 E F Johnsom Technique Engineers the Cavity Resonance in
134. ICE_CLASS keyword The DEVICE_CLASS keyword tells GENESYS what type of device the module represent This allows GENESYS to e Select a appropriate symbols e Create multiple models for N or P class devices such as NFET or PFET from one Verilog A soutce e Automatically reverse pins 1 and 2 for transistor class devices This reversal is necessaty since in SPICE and in most Verilog A source the input is pin 2 and the output is pin 1 In GENESYS and most RF Microwave simulation the convention is for the input to be pin 1 and the output to be pin 2 Some examples of device class statements are DEVICE_CLASS DIODE DEVICE_CLASS FET NFET PFET DEVICE_CLASS MOS NMOS type 1 PMOS type 1 The general format of the keyword is DEVICE_CLASS aype option varl valuel option2 var2 value2 o type is required and should be one of DIODE BJT BJT4 BJT5 FET JFET MOS RESISTOR CAPACITOR CCCS CCVS VCCS VCVS BJT4 adds a substrate node and BJT5 adds substrate and temperature nodes MOS supports both three and four pin devices aption option2 are not required If they are given GENESYS will create one model for each option Additionally if var is not given for an option the value of the option will be set to 1 For the FET example above GENESYS will make two models with NFET and _PFET added to the base model name For the NFET model the value NFET will be set to one Additionally NFET an
135. Intercept Point H4 Fundamental Tone Hp 2nd Harmonic H 3rd Harmonic IM Nth Order Intermods IMn m Nth Order Intermods due to M tones SPECTRASYS uses the formulas for calculation of the nonlinear products which correspond to the small signal model Taylor expansion of the nonlinear characteristics 2nd Order Intermod Products The amplitude of the second order intermod products F2 F1 and F1 F2 are equal to the tone power level minus IP2 or in other words IM2 Ptone IP2 2nd Harmonics 109 Simulation 110 The amplitude of the second harmonics are calculated as follows The amplitude of the second harmonic is equal to the tone power level minus the difference between IP2 second order intercept and the tone power level of the device 3rd Order 2 Tone Products The amplitude of the third order products 2F1 F2 2F2 F1 2F1 F2 and 2F2 F1 ate equal to 2 times the quantity of the tone power level minus IP3 or in other words IM3 2 Ptone IP3 Carrier Triple Beats 3rd Order 3 Tone Products When more that two carriers are present in a channel 3rd order intermod products can be created by the multiplication of three carriers These intermods are called cartier triple beats SPECTRASYS will create triple beats for all combinations of 3 or mote carriers Working out the math carrier triple beats will be 6 dB higher that the 3rd order 2 tone products This calculation of the triple beat level assum
136. NESYS also supports the convention 33 Simulation 34 MAG S21 which is linear and DB S21 which is the decibel form With reflection parameters the linear form is often refered to as a relection coefficient and the decibel form as return loss S11 dB input reflection gain 20 log S11 S22 dB output reflection gain 20 log S22 S2i dB forward gain 20log S21 S12 dB reverse gain 20log S12 S21 and S12 are the forward and return gain or loss when the network is terminated with the reference impedance The gain when matching networks are inserted at the input output ot both is described later S11 and S22 coefficients are less than 1 for passive networks with positive resistance Therefore the input and output reflection gains S11 and S22 ate negative decibel numbers Throughout Eagleware material the decibel forms S1 and S22 are referred to as return losses in agreement with standard industry convention To be mathematically correct they have been left as negative numbers As such the rigorous convention would be to call them return gain Input VSWR VSWR and S11 are related by VSWR 1 Su 1 Su The output VSWR is related to S22 by an analogous equation A circle of constant radius centered on the Smith chart is a citcle of constant VSWR The complex input impedance is related to the input reflection coefficients by the expression l Zo 1 S1 1 S1 The output impedance is similarly related to S22 S
137. NIHIL A TE AI PR RS OS SS EOS gt ESSE EEES EEE gt gt i eee A LS RO O AA O ta ta OS AAAA AAAA CO KASA ASE a KK RL MIDE LK IH RPI KE KS KID KARR OQ OPERI RRR MPD LR SS AS IS AR DIOS SS IIA O AS AS CS O A RXR ASS KN OS RK oe AROS OO A A O AS A AS PPI NN AS PP On EREMO ROS PI AIN POO OO SIC I RECTE TUNI CC ASS PEO A PARAR TO Id E AOS A EEES AS AS ES gt E OS gt gt SSE PP ODI ILIO I LD DDI IND LDP DAI PE Rr AR rn EELEE CEEE EEEE m AS hrs 5 FS ES the ground vias gt should be moved up so the drill hole is at the top of the upper capacitor pad as shown on the left resonator synthesized schematic by using the arrow keys Your layout should look like to pull them away from the center of the resonators to the edge to match the what we have below extend beyond the length of the resonators Furthermore 16 Next we need to change the placement of the input and output lines We want 15 We need to move the capacitor footprints so that the capacitor pads do not 352 EMPOWER Advanced M FILTER Example Tip You can move the designator text if desired by grabbing the handle in the middle of the text block 17 Now it is time to add an input and output port EM ports are found in the GENESYS toolbar below The EM ports should line up exactly on the pwb edge and the gray shaded bar underneath the EM port will appear showing that
138. ODptlOIs cess astra ROCHE ROO Om aet t eei e ti 281 O 283 MultiMode Ports att 284 Generala PA LOSA 286 O EE 289 Basicas atan tede rates netus ttu s 289 Spiral Inductor Example 2 eter deter ta P OE 290 LOSSES ATA e ate ead euin e ete ob Iv e to WS E RE niente A 295 Port Numbeting ite ettet eade be MIU ie iO e Ans 296 OCEAN 297 placing Internal Port ina id AA iaa 297 Manually Adding Lumped Elemehts un eee e CEA 298 Automatic Port Placement 5 canoa dU RD e RR eed 298 Planar X and Y Directed Ports 52 a meo tie d AR de tei s 299 Resohancers ene Re RU RUINIS RADI RARE UR 301 VEL VIS PP ads 303 Intefface ua o ut ee ES 303 Pat Field Radiation Pattern Viewet aiii 308 EXAMPLES ia 311 MultiMode Viewer Data a 315 Xia Hole Viewer Example iran ia deep RE de 316 Viewer tas 317 OE 319 Oido ari at 321 Homosened s Rectangular Caviar Renee i ern Rt 321 Higher Order Box Modes etn de tete did 322 ParaalDielectec Eoadino d 323 Signal Metal Effects ete a Rr qin UTAH ERREUR C EM t o een 323 Table Of Contents Kien 323 Cavity JADSOTDOG aane trar 323 Historical Backetoutid rata Rt et Rd 326 Probleme Torne UOT 552m actes ra eR ac a aC mid 326 Methodiof Emes co oe eoe t eso ete t esee 328 Mapping otn the Gfid s Lee e ete aot eet a ee 329 Grid Gr ens Function oc bre prete teta tad 331 Information MUPa essan E E EAE tee 332 Numerical Acceleration Procedutres
139. OIP3 DBM SOIP3 231 Simulation MAG SOIP3 MAG SOIP3 MAG SOIP3 Not available on Smith Chart Stage Output Saturation Power SOPSAT This measurement is the output saturation power specified in the element parameters for the particular stage This parameter is currently only available for the SPECTRASYS non linear behavioral models such as amplifiers and mixers For all stages where this parameter is not specified a large default value of 100 dBm is used Values Real value in Watts Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type DBM SOPSAT stage output saturation power in dBm MAGJ SOPSAT numeric value of the stage output saturation power Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield DBM SOPSAT DBM SOPSAT DBM SOPSAT MAG SOPSAT MAG SOPSAT MAG SOPSAT Not available on Smith Chart Input Third Order Intercept IIP3 This measurement is the third order intercept point referenced to the path input along the specified path as shown by IIP3 n OIP3 n CGAINIM3 n dBm where n stage number This measurement simple takes the computed Output Third Order Intercept and references it to the input by subtracting the cascaded gain of the intermod path from the input to the current stage The last IIP3 value for a cascaded chain will always b
140. Oblique End Shows an oblique view of the current image This view is top down on the x y plane with a slight offset This option can also be selected by pressing End Rotate The objects in this sub menu rotate the current image Rotate Left Left Arrow Rotates the current image clockwise in a horizontal plane perpendicular to the screen The center of the viewer image window is always the center of rotation Rotate Right Right Arrow Rotates the current image counter clockwise in a horizontal plane perpendicular to the screen The center of the viewer image window is always the center of rotation Rotate Up Up Arrow Rotates the current image forward in a vertical plane perpendicular to the screen The center of the viewer image window is always the center of rotation Rotate Down Down Atrow Rotates the current image backwatd in a vertical plane perpendicular to the screen The center of the viewer image window is always the center of rotation Rotate Clockwise PgDn Rotates the current image clockwise in the plane of the screen The center of the viewer image window is always the center of rotation This option can also be selected by pressing Page Down Rotate Counter Clockwise PgUp Rotates the current image counter clockwise in the plane of the screen The center of the viewer image window is always the center of rotation This option can also be selected by pressing Page Down
141. Offset Channel Frequency and Offset Channel Power are very useful measutements in SPECTRASYS These measurements give the user the ability to create a user defined 217 Simulation channel relative the the main channel The user specifies both the Offset Frequency relative to the main Channel Frequency and the Offset Channel Bandwidth As with the Channel Frequency measurement SPECTRASYS automatically deals with the frequency translations of the Offset Channel Frequency through mixers Both the Offset Frequency and the Offset Channel Bandwidth can be tuned by simply placing a question matk in front of the value to be tuned This measurement returns the integrated Offset Channel Power for evety node along the specified path For example if the Channel Frequency was 2140 MHz Offset Channel Frequency was 10 MHz and the Offset Channel Bandwidth was 1 MHz then the OCP is the integrated power from 2149 5 to 2150 5 MHz Tip This measurement is simply a Channel Power measurement at the Offset Channel Frequency using the Offset Channel Bandwidth Values Real value in Watts Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type DBM OCP offset channel power in dBm MAG OCP magnitude of the offset channel power in Watts Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimiza
142. Pan The objects in this sub menu shift the apparent location of the viewer window relative to the current image Pan Left Ctrl Left Moves the viewer location to the left relative to the current image This moves the image to the tight in the viewer window Pan Right Ctrl Right Moves the viewer location to the right relative to the current image This moves the image to the left in the viewer window EMPOWER Viewer and Antenna Patterns Pan Up Ctrl Up Moves the viewer location up relative to the current image This moves the image down in the viewer window Pan Down Ctrl Down Moves the viewer location down relative to the current image This moves the image up in the viewer window Pan Zoom In Ctrl PgUp Moves the viewer location closer to the current image This increases the size of the image in the viewer window Pan Zoom Out Ctrl PgDn Moves the viewer location away from the current image This decreases the size of the image in the viewer window Toggle The objects in this sub menu toggle the available options listed below Toggle Absolute Value Display When selected the viewer displays absolute values only If not selected an actual value with information about flowing direction is displayed The difference is that absolute value is always positive whereas the actual current values can be positive for forward directed currents and negative fot backward directed curren
143. Parameters that will Use Linear Parameters All non linear SPECTRASYS models may not have all the following behavioral parameters However any of the following behavioral parameters will be substituted by the linear parameters of a sub network or S parameters e Gain e Noise Figure Noise parameters should be added to S parameters files that do not contain them so that noise can be accurately modelled e Reverse Isolation e Input Output Impedance e Corner Frequency e Rolloff Slope Behavioral Parameters that Cannot Use Linear Parameters The following nonlinear behavioral parameters will still be used to generate nonlinearities in the hybrid mode of operation e Gain Even though this is a linear parameter this value is needed to determine the operating point of the nonlinearites since they ate created before being applied to the linear parameters This gain is used to convert all output nonlinear parameters to input parameters This gain should be set to the nominal gain used by the linear parameters for the frequencies of interest All nonlinear warnings dealing with compression saturation and intercept points use this gain value not the linear parameter gain value e 1 dB Compression e Saturation Power e Intercept Points Key Assumptions In real world nonlinear circuits a transfer function exists between the circuit input and the location where the nonlinearities are created Furthermore there will be another transfer func
144. Powet to Image Channel Noise Power along the specified path as shown by IMGR n CNP n IMGNP n dB where n stage number This measurement is very useful in determining the amount of image noise rejection that the selected path provides For this patticular measurement basically two channels exist both with the same Channel Measurement Bandwidth 1 main channel and 2 1st mixer image channel The only difference is between these two channels are their frequencies one is at the Channel Frequency and the other is at the Mixer Image Frequency See the Channel Noise Power and Image Channel Noise Power measurements to determine which types of signals are included or ignored in this measurement Values Real value numeric Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Desctiption Result Type DB IMGNR mixer image rejection ratio in dB MAG IMGNR numeric value of the mixer image rejection ratio Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield DB IMGNR DB IMGNR MAG IMGNR MAG IMGNR MAG IMGNR Not available on Smith Chart Minimum Detectable Signal MDS This measurement is the minimum detectable discernable signal referred to the input and is equivalent to the input channel noise power plus the cascaded noise figure of the specified chain as shown by MDS n
145. RE IL2 MFilter1 200 IL1 MFilter1 100 S1 Milterl 50 Lead Mfilter1 150 CAP1__MFilter1 2 53025 CAP2__ MFilter1 2 5075 ZS Mfilterl 50 End MFilter MFilter1 Equations 11 Next we need to change the resonator widths for all four transmission lines TL1 etc by double clicking on each of these schematic elements and changing the Width or Width of all strips to 80 mils A Part Properties For MCN6 IL1 Mfittert Deiat Umien El EMPOWER Advanced M FILTER Example 12 The optimized readjusted filter schematic should now appear as follows 600 cel ll l 612 C 2326pF CAP1 T C 2 326 pF CAP1 qi C 2 312 pF pen t2 q 10 TL7 w 80 mil y m L 200 mil IL2 mM 1 3 3 8 2 X 2 TL1 TL14 W 80 mil TL3 W 80 mil i m i L 150 mil Lead W 80 mil L 180 mil Lead L 100 mil IL1 Ig n en HE 13 You also may need to change the capacitor footprints to 0603 depending on your default footprints This can be done by bringing up the Layout Properties by double clicking the layout background and then selecting the Associations tab Then proceed to click on the Change button and choose CC1608 0603 Chip Capacitor from the SM782 LIB General Associations General Layer EMPOWER Layers Fonts all GROUND BOTTOM 75mil SAMPLELIB Change a 7 LC3216 1206 Chip Inductor SM782 LIB ange
146. Yo Yorr Notice that gamma goes to zeto if the reference admittance is optimal Values Real value versus frequency Simulations Linear Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart GOPT Commonly Used Operatots none Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield GOPT gamma coefficient gamma coefficient Optimal Admittance Impedance for Noise YOPT ZOPT The Optimal Admittance for Noise is a complex function of frequency and is available for 2 port networks only The optimal admittance is the value of the input admittance which minimized the noise figure of the network The optimal admittance is defined in terms of the source admittance Ys and the noise resistance Rn and the noise figures NF NFMIN as 197 Simulation NF NFMIN Rw Re Ys Ys Yorr The optimal impedance is the inverse of the optimal admittance i e Zopr 1 Yorr Values Complex value versus frequency Simulations Linear Default Format Table RECT Graph RE Smith Chart GOPT Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type RECT YOPT real imaginaty parts RE YOPT real part MAGANG YOPT Linear magnitude and angle in range of 180 to 180 Other Operators MAGI ANG ANG360 IMI MAGANG260 Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield YOPT real part of optimal admittance real imaginary parts of admittance
147. a point Cou where Rout S12821 S22 D 2 Cou S22 DS11 I7 DJ The region inside ot outside the circle may be the stable region The filled areas of the graphs are the unstable regions The input plane stability circle equations are the same as the output plane equations with 1 and 2 in the subscripts interchanged If SB1 and SB2 are placed on a table you can see the PAR value If it is zero then the region is outside the circle is stable If it is 180 then the region inside the circle is stable 196 Measurements Linear Note See the section on S Parameters for a detailed discussion of stability analysis Values Complex values versus frequency Simulations Lineat Default Format Table center MAG ANGJ radius Linear par Graph none Smith Chart Circle Commonly Used Operators None Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield SB1 input stability circle center MAG ANGI radius Linear par SB2 output stability circle center MAG ANGI radius Linear par Available on Smith Chart and Table only Parameter indicating the unstable region Optimal Gamma for Noise GOPT The Optimal Gamma for Noise is a real function of frequency and is available for 2 port networks only The optimal gamma is defined in terms of the reference admittance Yo and the optimal value of admittance Yopr as GOPT Yo Yorr
148. ad impedances for a given noise figure as a function of frequency This locus is plotted on a Smith chart with noise figure degradations of 0 25 0 5 1 0 1 5 2 0 2 5 3 0 and 6 0 dB from the optimal noise figure Note See the section on S Parameters for a detailed discussion of noise circles Values Complex values versus frequency Simulations Linear 191 Simulation Default Format Table center MAG ANGJ radius Linear Graph none Smith Chart Circles 6 Commonly Used Operators None Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield NCI noise circle locus of load impedances for optimal noise figure for each circle center MAG ANGI radius Linear Available on Smith Chart and Table only Noise Correlation Matrix Parameters The noise correlation matrix elements are complex functions of frequency The frequency LL range and intervals are as specified in the Linear Simulation dialog box For a n noise sources the elements ate of the form Ng for i j equal 1 2 Note See References 5 6 for a complete discussion of noise cotrelation matrix properties Values Complex matrix vetsus frequency Simulations Linear Default Format Table RECT Graph RE Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type RECT N11 real imaginaty parts RE N22 real part MAGANG N21 Linear magnitude and angle in range of 180 to 1
149. ailable on Smith Chart and Table only Unilateral Gain Circles at Port i GU1 GU2 A unilateral gain circle at port 1 is a locus of source impedances for a given transducer power gain below the optimum gain This locus is plotted on a Smith chart and is only available for 2 port networks The center of the circle is the point of maximum gain Circles ate displayed for gains of 0 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 dB less than the optimal gain Similarly the unilateral gain citcle at port 2 is a locus of load impedances for a given transducer power gain below the optimum gain The transducer power gain G is defined as G power deliver to load power available from source For the unilateral transducer gain S12 is set to zero Note See the section on S Parameters for a detailed discussion of Gain Circles Values Complex values versus frequency Simulations Linear Default Format Table center MAG ANGJ radius Linear Graph none Smith Chart Circles Commonly Used Operators None Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield GU1 unilateral gain circle at port 1 center MAG ANGI radius Linear GU2 unilateral gain circle at port 2 center MAGT ANGI radius Linear 195 Simulation Available on Smith Chart and Table only Stability Factor K Stability Measure B1 The Stability Factor and Measure parameters are real functions of frequency and are available for 2
150. ain amp Power Gain Circles GA GP sese 194 Unilateral Gain Circles at Port i GU1 GUZ fiannia A E 195 Stability Factor K Stability Measure B1 seen 196 Input Output Plane Stability Circles SB1 SB2 sere 196 Optimal Gamma for Noise GOPT eese teet tenete tenente tenente 197 Optimal Admittance Impedance for Noise YOPT ZOPT sseeeeenns 197 Effective Noise Input Temperature NED sse 198 Normalized Noise Resistance RN esee tette entente Raa a 198 Reference Impedance ZPOR T eene ct rem ee tmu c nm nated 199 Pott Powet Ppott i eene tma tenore 201 Probe Current Iptobeyos eise nip Pen Reed 201 Node Voltage V node i eden Eno han ied ede te 202 Reference Impedance ZPORTI essent tentent nennen nennen 202 Latge Sienal S Parameters int PURI Ce i Ce OTRA D ELITR 203 Load Pull Contours wis tete dai te itte tbe Wa Ri e Pee iaa 205 To create a new file using load pull contours seen 206 Adjacent Channel Power ACP U or T D ronson 207 Adjacent Channel Frequency ACF U or L n enn 208 Added Noise AN s ote i eR AA e p RR EUER RUE ee 208 Cascaded Gain CEGAN iia SOR AUOD EAR AURA RU SA e AR Ate 209 Cascaded Gain Third Order Intermod Analysis CGAINIM3 eee 210 Cascaded Gain All Signals CGainAIl eene teen nene 211 Cartier to Noise Ratio CINR in oie
151. alues are not a function of time and thus sub components are uniquely defined by a set of pott parameter sets such as two port S parameter data Although ONE TWO THR FOU and NPO are typically used for active devices they may be used for any devices fot which you can compute or measure data For example they could be used to characterize an antenna a circuit with specified group delay data or measuted data for a broadband transformer or a pad Data files can be used in GENESYS in two different ways e By adding a Link to a Data File in a simulation This allows measurements to refer directly to the data file without the need to create a design e By using ONE TWO THR FOU or NPO elements in a circuit file or schematic In both cases you must know in advance how many ports the device data represents For transistors this is almost always 2 157 Simulation Link To Data File A Link to Data file allows you to plot data from a device data file without drawing a schematic or creating a netlist To add a data file impott 1 Right click the Simulation Data node on the Workspace Window 2 Select Add Link To Data File For information on the Data File Import Setup dialog see the Reference manual For an example see Model Extract WSP Link to Data File Setup To open double click or create a Link to a Data File Data File Import Setup x Eilename eseagletexamplestmri901 615 Browse Came Number o
152. alysis submenu 2 Complete the HARBEC Options dialog box For details see the Reference manual To edit a Harmonic Balance properties double click the Harmonic Balance Analysis or click the analysis and click the Properties button on the Workspace Window HARBEC DC amp Harmonic Balance HARBEC Options x General Advanced oscillator Design To Simulate E Signal Sources Maximum Mixing Order 10 Temperature 27 0 C Maximum Analysis Frequency D Mie Calculate Automatic Recalculation AutoSave Workspace After Calculation Recalculate Now Oscillator Frequency Search Only Calculate Nonlinear Noise Adds Noise Tone Cancel e General Tab Design To Simulate Defines the schematic or EMPOWER electromagnetic simulation that will be analyzed If an EMPOWER simulation is selected electromagnetic results will be co simulated with the circuit elements associated with the layout Note If an EM simulation is selected it is very important that the Use Ports from Schematic option be properly checked on the EMPOWER Properties dialog Frequency Table and Order Control Name The schematic designator of the source GENESYS searches the specified design for all sources and places them in the table Freq The frequency specified on the soutce GENESYS fills in this value by reading the frequency from the schematic Order The number of harm
153. ample is one of these cases Generally the wall and cover spacing should match the problem which you ate trying to model This will give an accurate assessment not only of circuit performance but also of box resonances However this will not be possible in a few situations 275 Simulation 276 1 The structure will not be in a box 2 You are analyzing part of a larger circuit and the box walls would be prohibitively large to model 3 You are designing a component such as a spiral inductor which will be reused in many different circuits so the cover height is not known In these cases you must use an approximation Set the box size so that the walls are sepatated from the circuit by at least 3 times the substrate thickness preferably 6 times For microstrip set the cover spacing ait above to 5 to 10 times the substrate height See for mote info see Box Modes See Microstrip Line for an example of the effect of wall spacing on line impedance Choosing the correct covet type is absolutely critical to getting an analysis which matches measuted results The choice is usually between whether to use an open cover or a closed covet Choosing the correct cover type usually has no effect on analysis time so there is no feason not to set this to the proper type With an open cover there will be radiation and this can have a huge impact on circuit performance You can choose the correct cover types in the Layers Tab when starting
154. amples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield VSWR1 VSWR1 Measurements Linear VSWR Show VSWR for all ports Not available on Smith Chart plots s parameters Input Impedance Admittance ZINi YINi The port impedance and admittance measurements are complex functions of frequency The measurements are made looking into the network from the port with other network terminations in place The frequency range and intervals are as specified in the Linear Simulation dialog box A port number 7 is used to identify the port ZINz is the input impedance looking in from pott 7 YINi is the input admittance looking in from pott 7 Values Complex value versus frequency Simulations Linear Default Format Table RECT Graph RE Smith Chart Sj plots s paramters Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type RECT ZIN1 real imaginary parts Real RE YIN2 real part Real MAGANG ZIN3 Linear magnitude and angle in range of 180 to 180 Real Other Operators MAG ANG ANG360 IM MAGANG360 Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield ZIN2 RE ZIN2 real part of ZIN2 RECT ZIN Shows real imaginary parts for all ports MAG YIN1 Linear Magnitude of Y21 Linear Magnitude of YIN1 ZIN RE ZIN1 Shows teal imaginaty parts of all ports Not available on Smith Chart Voltage Gain This voltage gain measurem
155. an automatic network analyzer with time domain option IEEE Trans v MTT 37 1989 N 3 pp 479 483 D J Swanson Grounding microstrip lines with via holes IEEE Trans v MTT 40 1992 p 1719 1721 J C Rautio An ultra high precision benchmark for validation of planar electromagnetic analysis IEEE Trans v MTT 42 1994 N 11 p 2046 2050 T Kawai I Ohta Planat citcuit type 3 dB quadrature hybrids IEEE Trans v MTT 42 1994 N 12 p 2462 2467 Y Gao I Wolff Miniature electric near field probes for measuring 3 D fields in planar microwave circuits IEEE Trans v MTT 46 1998 N 7 p 907 913 Index 139 Adjacent Channel Frequency 208 Adjacent Channel Power sss 207 Admittance Ait ADOVes ds tee eU esa A ten 100 Amplitude Stepping sss 54 HT A ERU EPOR GR TINTE 145 181 145 181 in eco Sonic id 181 303 Animate button esee 203 311 TIO FACE RR 41 ARCCOS 145 ARCCOS H ente tad 145 ARCS iN esteso a 145 ARCSIN Asti e Eee 145 ARCANO NUI 145 ARCTANH idi beret ains 145 Array Inde certae temet 144 AE AVS 3 eor ai 144 145 148 150 Artificial intelligence techniques 54 Associations tenete 165 ATN eiecti i EUNT 145 Automatic 2 Tone 1412 Automatic deembedding ss 1 Automatic Port Placement cocino 298 Automatic
156. and Microwave Design Software GENESYS 2004 Enterprise Simulation Eaglewate Corporation owns both the GENESYS software program suite and its documentation No part of this publication may be produced transmitted transcribed stoted in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form without the written permission of Eagleware Corporation Copyright O 1985 2004 Eagleware Corporation All rights reserved Eagleware Corporation 635 Pinnacle Court Norcross GA 30071 USA Main Phone 678 291 0995 Sales Phone 678 291 0259 Support Phone 678 291 0719 Fax 678 291 0971 Printed in the United States of America Version 2004 first printing March 2004 Table Of Contents Simulations Dita el dada LN IA LI MEME E IM ME SAEI E 1 Which Simulator Should Us ege edades 1 Harmonic Balance Walkthrough ina aii ii RR RARO dana 5 BJT Amplifier Design and Simulation eene tnn 5 CREATING AN OUTPUT VS INPUT POWER GRAPH eer 14 OVE EW aci e OI e ERU RII TU RUE AI REMAIN RAINER NEAR GTI RO 17 Creating a Schemlatie cro nee ii 17 Adding a SPECIRASYS simulation crt t actora 18 Level Diarra id 22 System Simulation Parameters Tuning Parametets sssssssseesee eee 23 Add an Aimpliliee sooo e epe CIT eR 24 Adda MIxeE di ia 26 Mul ple Sienals eet dor tte sia ee tefte 27 A NO 31 Emear Simulation Properties ono mio aaa 31 SN A siete t a e noh GR e gehe fer EID ATARI TEM dee OS 32 gua
157. and resonance effects are reduced This greatly reduces coupling between metal segments of the circuit and it is evident in the responses given in the Box Mode example cited earlier with the cover removed Effects of removing a top cover are illustrated in the Examples EdgeCoupledOpen WSP and Box Modes WSP See your Examples manual for details A similar benefit may be derived by placing absorber material on the cover or in the cavity While the poor ultimate rejection in the stopbands of filters is not recovered heavy 323 Simulation coupling between segments is avoided This is sometimes necessaty to eliminate oscillations of high gain amplifiers in oversize enclosures By far the most elegant and safest approach to minimizing box mode problems is placing circuits in small enclosures 324 EMPOWER Theory This section gives a technical description of the basic EMPOWER algorithms Unlike most similar tools on the market EMPOWER is based on the method of lines MoL and comprises a set of numerical techniques designed to speed up calculations while increasing accutacy of computations Incorporation of geometrical symmetties including rotational reduction of problem complexity using thinning out and lineat re expansion procedures and multimode deembedding by the simultaneous diagonalization method are outlined here This theory section is for EMPOWER users familiar with numerical electromagnetics foundations We have added
158. arametets choose File Open Example then load Amplifiers Large Signal S Parameters 203 Measurements Load Pull Load Pull Contours GENESYS can draw load pull data contours such as the one shown below from data contained in Focus and Maury Microwave load pull data files E Contours Workspace Load Pull Contours Example E E ni xi ACORN Notes CN i n P S S E contours datapoints This example File Open Example Load Pull Contours Example wsp loads a Focus Microwaves data file The file contains several columns of amplifier measured data In the plot the Gain column from the data file is used to plot load pull contours from the two Equations shown below contours CONTOUR GAIN 20 30 1 0 2 2 2 2 datapoints PLOTPOINTS GAIN The first equation CONTOUR generates the contours based on the parameters passed to the function See Built In Functions for a description of these functions and their patameters GENESYS supports both Maury Microwave and Focus Microwaves data files 205 Simulation To create a new file using load pull contours 1 From a new GENESYS file right click Simulations on the tree and select Link to Data file 2 After choosing a name select the appropriate file type Maury or Focus and browse fot ot enter the file name Click OK to close this box Add a Smith Chart by right clicking Outputs After choosing a name click measurement wizard Select the load
159. ard The length of a vector from the center to a given point on the Smith chart is the magnitude of the reflection coefficient The angle of that vector with respect to the real axis to the right is the phase angle of the reflection coefficient Several common definitions are used to represent the length of this vector They are referred to as radially scaled parameters because they relate to a radial distance from the center towards the outside circle of the chart HARBEC DC amp Harmonic Balance DC simulation analyzes the static operating points DC voltages and currents at each nonlinear node and port in the circuit When designing circuits using non linear models you should always check the DC operating point before doing linear or harmonic balance simulations DC analysis is very fast and will make sure that you have entered a workable design Note DC Simulation is not generally the same as the DC zero frequency level from a harmonic balance simulation In DC simulation all AC sources are turned off Nonlinear device models have many parameters that can be entered in error To make sure that the model is correct it is a good idea to look at the DC characteristic curves of the device before entering a complete circuit Workspace templates are available Select New From Template from the File Menu then BJT Test wsp that make it easy to create these curves In addition to analysis DC results can be optimized For exam
160. are included or ignored in this measurement Values Real value numetic Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type DB GAIN MAG GAIN numeric value of the gain Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield DB GAIN DB GAIN DB GAIN MAG GAIN MAG GAIN Not available on Smith Chart Gain Third Order Intermod Analysis GAINIM3 This measurement is the individual stage gain of the main channel along the specified path during the IM3 analysis pass The Gain is the difference between the Desired Channel 219 Simulation Power Third Order Intermod Analysis output of the current stage minus the Desited Channel Power output of the ptior stage as shown by GAINIM3 n DCPIM3 n DCPIM3 n 1 dB where GAINIM3 0 0 dB n stage number See the Desired Channel Power Third Order Intermod Analysis measurement to determine which types of signals are included ot ignored in this measurement The only difference between this measurement and the Gain GAIN measurement is that this measurement applies to the IM3 analysis pass only Consequently this will be the same measurement as GAIN when the manual mode is used for calculating intermods along a path since a dedicated IM3 analysis is not created and the normal analysis is also the IM3 analysis p
161. armonics and intermods Conversely when unchecked Harmonics and intermods will be created from all signals appearing at the input to the non linear element This includes intermods harmonics and other undesired signals This option typically requires longer simulation time since more spectral components ate being created For long simulation times see the System Simulation Tips section Odd Order Only When checked only odd order intermod and harmonics will be created the fewer number of intermods created the faster the simulation will be Coherent Addition When checked SPECTRASYS will determine coherency of cascaded signals such as intermod harmonics and mixed signals Generally cascaded intermod equations assume coherent 91 Simulation 92 intermod addition Otherwise all intermods harmonics and mixed signals will assume non coherent addition When unchecked only soutce signals can be coherent and all other derived spectrums including intermods harmonics and mixed signals are considered to be non coherent See the Coherency section for more information Fast Intermod Shape When checked Intermods and Harmonics will be represented by only 2 data points In most cases this will be fine Howevet if one desired to examine one of these signals though a filter then mote points may be needed to accurately represent the shape of the signal When unchecked the average number of points from all inputs signals is used to
162. art In Layout iynthesis E E3 Designs Models Zoom In B Schi Schematic Zoom Dut B E Simulations Data BPF BUTTER 1 Zoom Maximum System Schl FLO 50 MHz Zoom Page N f Sij BPF BUTTER 10 FHI 250 MHz BA Output Spec BA BPF BUTTER 1 R 2 Equations Substrates Optimizations Yield Notes D E Outputs Nes IL 1 dB li Bring To Front APASS 3dB AMAX 100 dB Send To Back Keep Connected Show Part Text Parameters Parms All Parts Schematic Properties a Recent ert Receta 2 Recent Part a Recent Fett Once the user is satisfied with the synthesis results these results can be substituted back into the behavioral model If a behavioral model have been directly synthesized the subnetwork substitution will be automatic as show below SPECTRASYS System Part Properties For BPF BUTTER BPF BUTTER 1 po At this point the parameters for the behavioral model will be disabled For additional information on model substitution see the Simulation Tab section of the Schematic Element Properties page in the User s Guide Troubleshooting How come my noise figure decreases through a cascade The equation for Cascaded Noise Figure measurement in SPECTRASYS is CNF n CNP n CNP 0 CGAIN n dB where n stage number and CNP is the Channel Noise Power and the Cascade Gain measurement is CGAIN n DCP n DCP 0 dB where n stage numb
163. ass Remember intermod bandwidth is a function of the governing intermod equation For example if the intermod equation is 2F1 F2 then the intermod bandwidth would be 2BW1 BW2 Note Bandwidths never subtract and will always add The channel bandwidth must be set wide enough to include the entire bandwidth of the intermod to achieve the expected results The Automatic Intermod Mode will set the bandwidth appropriately Values Real value numeric Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type DB GAIN gain in dB MAG GAIN numeric value of the gain Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield DB GAIN DB GAIN DB GAIN MAG GAIN MAG GAIN MAG GAIN Not available on Smith Chart Gain All Signals GAINALL 220 This measurement is the individual stage gain of the main channel along the specified path The Gain is the difference between the Channel Powet output of the cutrent stage minus the Channel Powet output of the prior stage as shown by GAIN n CP n CP n 1 dB where GAIN 0 0 dB n stage number See the Channel Power measurement to determine which types of signals are included or ignored in this measurement Measurements SPECTRASYS Values Real value numeric Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Lin
164. asurement on this source signal should give the same power level as specified by this source DATA This section is used to specify the actual frequency points of the source along with their amplitudes and phases This data is entered in three columns Frequency Power and Phase ENDDATA This is a keyword that indicates the end of the DATA block NOTE All frequencies power levels and phases n the source file are relative to the source frequency power and phase contained on the system source properties d alog box The following data is a source file example This file is an example of phase noise on a CW carrier UNITS HZ HZ KHZ or MHZ All final values in this table will be relative to Frequency Power and Phase specified in the Source dialog box FREQ 0 Nominal Frequency in UNITS POWER 0 Nominal Power in dBm PHASE 0 Nominal Phase in Degrees IRANDPHASE Remove initial comment character to randomize phase BW 0 Full Power Bandwidth in UNITS 0 for CW Signals SPECTRASYS System DATA All data is Relative to Nominal Values If FREQ is 0 data is Single Sideband offset Freq Power Phase Units dBc Degrees 0 51 30 0 1 50 0 100 70 0 1000 80 0 10000 90 0 100000 95 0 1e6 100 0 ENDDATA NOISE Broadband noise can be added to any CW Modulated or User Defined source Noise is added to these sources by checking the Broadband Noise checkbox Noise is specif
165. at 2500 MHz reveals that the output is originally closer matched to 50 ohms and it is not sutprising that a matching network would be less beneficial Noise Circles To achieve the best available noise figure from a device the correct impedance must be presented to the device The impedance resulting in the best noise performance is in general neither equal to 50 ohms or the impedance which results in minimum reflection at the source The Avantek AT10135 GaAsFET transistor S parameter data given earlier includes noise data This data is comprised of four numbers for cach frequency These numbers are NFopt dB the optimum noise figure when correctly terminated Gopt magnitude and angle the terminating impedance at the device input which acheives NFopt and Rn Zo a sensitivity factor which effects the radius of the noise circles Noise circles plotted by SUPERSTAR for the AT10135 at 2500 MHz ate given below Circles of increasing radius plotted by GENESYS represent noise figure degredations of 0 25 0 5 1 1 5 2 2 5 3 and 6 dB In this case direct termination of the device with a 50 ohm source results in a degredation of the noise figure of 1 dB The arc orthogonal to the citcles is the locus of Gopt versus frequency Linear Simulation Response SPARAM 50 3 09804 8 17871 3 09804 8 17871 Smith Chart In 1939 Philip H Smith published an article describing a circular chart useful for graphing and solving problems asso
166. at that frequency is This image frequency is used to determine the area of the spectrum that will be integrated by the this measurement to calculate the image power The Channel Measurement Bandwidth located in the System Simulation Dialog Box is used as the bandwidth for the this measurement For example if we designed a 2 GHz receiver that had an IF frequency of 150 MHz using low LO side injection then the LO frequency would be 1850 MHz and image frequency fot all stages from the input to the first mixer would be 1700 MHz If the receiver bandwidth was 5 MHz then the image channel would be from 1697 5 to 1702 5 MHz All noise and interference must be rejected in this channel to maintain the sensitivity and performance of the receiver This measurement is simply a Channel Noise Powet measurement at the Image Frequency Values Real value in Watts Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type DBM IMGNP mixer image channel power in dBm MAG IMGNP magnitude of the mixer image channel power in Watts Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table 222 Measurements SPECTRASYS optimization or yield DBM IMGNP DBM IMGNP DBM IMGNP MAG IMGNP MAG IMGNP Not available on Smith Chart Image Noise Rejection Ratio IMGNR This measurement is the ratio of the Channel Noise
167. ata See the Viewet section for more information Port number to excite This option is available if Generate viewer data above is checked It specifies which EMport to excite for viewer data By default mode one is excited but if the input is multi mode then you can add the option Imj to excite mode j instead Mode number to excite This option is available if Generate viewer data above is checked It specifies which mode to excite for viewer data Generally mode one is excited but if the input is multi mode then you can add excite any mode numbet up to the numbet of modes at that input Generate Far Field Radiation Data Checking this box causes EMPOWER to generate data for the radiated electric fields of a structure in the far field region The data generated is specified by the sweeping theta and phi coordinates of the spherical cootdinate system 267 Simulation Sweep Theta This option is available if Generate Far Field Data above is checked It generates data for varying theta in the spherical coordinate system Theta is the angle formed from the z axis to a point in 3 space If Sweep Theta is unchecked a fixed angle will be specified and far field data will be produced only at this theta angle Sweep Phi This option is available if Generate Far Field Data above is checked It generates data for varying phi in the spherical coordinate system Phi is the angle formed from the positive x axis to a point proj
168. ata combination If you have no lumped elements in your simulation you should normally check the Use EM Simulation Frequencies box For circuits with lumped elements you can often save much time by using fewer points in the electromagnetic simulation frequencies above allowing the co simulation to interpolate the EMPOWER data before the lumped elements are added EMPOWER Basics Turn off physical losses Faster If checked EMPOWER will ignore any losses specified in the EMPOWER Layer tab This option is very useful to speed up any preliminary runs Automatically save workspace after calc This checkbox is handy for overnight runs to help protect against a power outage Note that checking this box will force the entire workspace to be saved after each run Empower Options e x General Viewer Far Field Advanced TJ Generate Viewer Data slower Port number to excite Mode number to excite rJ Generate Far Field Radiation Data In Sweep Theta DU ae so Step degrees Sweep Phi Start Angle Stop jo Step degrees DK Cancel Apply Help Viewer Far Field Tab Generate Viewer Data Slower Checking this box causes EMPOWER to generate a EMV file that can be loaded in the EMPOWER current voltage viewer program Selecting this box will increase the amount of time required to solve the problem This box must also be checked in order to generate far field radiation d
169. ation Four conceptual ports or pairs of terminals correspond to a grid cell as shown in the figure The total number of ports oriented along the x axis is M L 1 The total number of ports oriented along the y axis is L M 1 The multiport can also have a set of z directed ports corresponding to via holes or z directed internal inputs Note that we do not need to calculate all elements of the multiport impedance matrix and its order can be reduced taking into account that some ports are no loaded or short circuited The no loaded terminals correspond to regions of the signal layer without any conductivity currents The right half of the figure illustrates the correlation of other types of the boundary conditions to operations with the informational multiport terminals Operations with the z directed terminals are similar The operations in a discrete space of the informational multiport terminals are completely in accordance with the usual electromagnetic theory To connect a lumped element for example we performed both serial connections of terminals along the element that corresponds to the electric field integration along the element and parallel connections that corresponds to the surface current integration across the element see the Table above The analogies described are meant to facilitate understanding of numerical electromagnetics Note that the examples given are not the only possible manipulations with the terminals with physical electro
170. atrices of different sizes are added then the operation is only performed up to the size of the smallest matrix These operations are performed as if the matrices were vectots see the example of linearly accessing a matrix as a vector above All operators and builtin functions will work properly on arrays so for example taking the hyperbolic sine of matrix A using SINH A will take the hyperbolic sine of each element of A Also arrays can be passed to user models and functions so you can create a user model that takes a matrix ot vector as a parametet Strings can be used in vectors and the addition operator will work For example J VECTOR J 1 One JD Two J 3 Three K Element M J K M 1 Element One M 2 Element Two etc Note Vectors and matrices are now base one in GENESYS first element is number one To use base zeto put the statement BASE 0 on a blank line at the top of your equations and at the top of any function To find out how many elements an array has use the COUNT function N VECTOR 71 P COUNT N P 71 Q MATRIX 100 75 R COUNT Q R 7500 One of the more powerful features of the GENESYS Equation Window is post processing sometimes referred to as Output Equations This allows you to perform calculations on the results of your analysis These results can then be displayed optimized ot even used in another design For example Gain Linear1 Filter D B S21 AddToGain 5 To
171. attributes defined in the natures for potential and flow The discipline can bind e One nature with potential e One nature with potential and a different nature with flow e Nothing with either potential or flow an empty discipline The disciplines are typically predefined in the disciplines vams file a portion of which is shown below Electrical Current in amperes nature Current units A 73 Simulation 74 access I idt_nature Charge ifdef CURRENT ABSTOL abstol CURRENT ABSTOL else abstol 1e 12 endif endnatute Charge in coulombs nature Charge units coul access Q ddt nature Current ifdef CHARGE ABSTOL abstol CHARGE ABSTOL else abstol 1e 14 endif endnatute Potential in volts nature Voltage nature Voltage units V access V idt_nature Flux ifdef VOLTAGE ABSTOL abstol VOLTAGE ABSTOL else abstol 1e 6 endif endnature Genvats ate integer valued variables which compose static expressions They are used for instantiating structure behaviorally e g accessing analog signals within behavioral looping constructs genvar ist_of_genvar_identifiers where ist_of_genvar_identifiers is a comma separated list of genvar identifiers Example Advanced Modeling Kit genvar I j Parametets provide the method to bring information from the circuit to the model Parameter assignments are a co
172. averaging of noise spectral amplitudes on the set of the sequential HARBEC analyses each analysis actually generates a sequence differing by initial phases of the noise spectral components Typically each analysis after the first is calculated very quickly because it uses a very good initial guess as a result of the previous analysis and due to the fact that noise spectral components amplitudes are significantly less then the deterministic spectral components The current realization of the NNA suggests that the spectral densities of all sources of citcuit noises are calculated at DC operating point and they will not be changed at time of the HB analysis To create a Nonlinear noise analysis just set the flag Calculate Nonlinear Noise Add Noise Tone in the HARBEC options dialog window 55 Simulation 56 LI x General Advanced Oscilator Design To Simulcte AMA Signal Sources Mame Feammn Order n 100 5 Maximum Mixing Ordar fo Temperature 27 0 Maximum Analysis Frequency MHz Cakulate I Automatic Recalculation AutoSave Workspace After Calculation Recakulate Now F Osciletor Frequency Search Only y Y Calculate Nonlinear Noise Adds Noise Tone Noise Tone xo Hz Fig 1 Harbec options dialog window In the Nonlinear Noise Analysis the set of analysis frequencies FB set of balanced frequencies are defined as FB fb F mF fh ips Max Or
173. aximum Order T Maximum stable gain ea MC Maxwell s equations 325 MDS itinere 2223 Measurement Bandwidth 104 Measurement Wizatd sss 153 179 Measurements 32 41 53 104 117 145 150 179 181 183 184 317 Measuring S parametets eire dA Mestno i ee eerie eere ied dA Nonlinear model esses 52 Nonlinear MOSFET s sss 176 Non standard metal Metallization layet see 257 ZTT Normal deembedded Method of Lines eie eee 328 Normal ports esce pee teens Microstrip Normalized noise resistance MIN Linde ette tette ere enden oed NOT iii iii iia Minimum Detectable Signal 223 Notes gu sons Mirror NP Ovidio das Numerical Acceleration Procedutes O Oblique butt 2 Odd Order Only Offset Channel necne petentes Offset Channel Frequency Offset Channel Powet sse One dimensional FFT Operations 0 Operator descriptions Operators Opt Yield Recalc N Optimal admittance sss Optimal gamma ING ce ioo ae pane OR Oe 183 oL Mc m 179 NEL Circles tine pene HORS 179 Optimal gamma 179 New Data Files Optimization sseeeeneeeee 179 181 183 COEM acercas ci n cinco ite etn 158 Optimizing Simulation Performance 54 New Data Files
174. ay is accessed using the number 1 The statement can appeat more than once in an EQUATION window A new base statement changes the beginning index of all arrays whether they were defined before or after the base statement The form of the statement is BASE 0 or BASE 1 Viewing Variable Values Values calculated in the EQUATION Window may be viewed to verify that the equations yield expected results Right click on Data Outputs in the Workspace Window and select Add Variable Viewer Operators 144 Operator descriptions in precedence otder are Array Index Exponentiation Division N Integer Division Modulo Addition Subtraction Equality Check gt Greater Than lt Less Than gt gt Greater Than or Equal lt lt Less Than or Comments Raises a number to a power For example 2 3 is 8 and 3 2 is 9 The quotient is truncated to an integer result For example 103 is 3 and 3M is zero The numbers are divided and the remainder is returned For example 10 3 is 1 and 7 6 2 is 1 6 Left and right values are compared If the results are equal the value is 1 true otherwise the value is zero false For example 1 1 2 gives 1 and 1 1 3 gives zero Equation Reference Or This symbol is also referred to as pipes It is normally located on the back slash X key using Shift 3 Array Concatenates values to form vectors an matrices See Arrays in this Concatenati
175. be v2 Simulation Default Simulation Data or Equations oci DC Bias q Measurement Wizard lt Equation Wizard Optimize Now Cancel Help Note We increased the weight of iic because we care more about optimizing this measurement than v2 6 Run the optimization When the desired level of performance is achieved stop the optimizer DC bias circuit with resistors set as non tunable values DC Bias Workspace HB Walkthru ME Io gy IDC 10 258 3 A 10 Walkthrough DC Linear HARBEC Copy this schematic into a new schematic named Amplifier Add 100pF capacitors in series with the input and output ports as shown below Add an input port is an AC Power PAC input with a source frequency of 900MHz and a power output of 40dBm Change its Designator to IN DC bias circuit with DC blocking caps and input output ports 10 11 12 13 14 15 cl C 100 pF iml IDC 10 25e 3 A Dis N F 800 MHz PAC 40 dBm 0 V a WZ In the Workspace Window click the New Item button and select Add Linear Analysis in the Analysis submenu Accept the default name Click OK Click OK again to accept the default input values In the Workspace Window click the New Item button and select Add Smith Chart in the Data Output submenu Name the Graph Match Choose Linear1 Amplifier from the Default Simulation comb
176. ble for quick use 7 In the Model Properties dialog enter the following information Model Properties Rojo geescamdaxe CAP C 2 0 Resonant frequency n Mf Fam a je jCepectorGualty factor UU wel This box lists the parameters which must be passed to the model whenever it is used The parameters for this example ate 168 User Models C the actual capacitor value FO the frequency at which the capacitor self resonates Q the quality factor of the capacitor The Layout Association box associates this model with a normal capacitor when choosing footprints for board layouts 8 Press OK to close the Model Properties dialog 9 Draw the schematic as shown in the figure below yn 0 L1 C1 L L nH C C pF 10 The inductor Q can be left blank which defaults the value to 1 million The capacitor Q should be set to Q which is one of the model parameters entered into the Model Properties dialog in step 5 11 Right click on the model in the Workspace Window as shown below Workspace W amp y Designs Models mE Sell Hesonant Capacitor User Model Schematic Simulations D ata Rename 3 Outputs Delete This Design 3 2 Equations 3 Substrates Properties Optimizations Schematic Properties a Yield Edit Model Equations Notes 12 Choose Edit Model Equations 13 Enter the equations as shown below BE Self_Resonant_Capacitor Model Equations Works
177. bove and below so that the total height for both media layers is cotrect In addition to the metalization and substrate layers viaholes and other z directed currents can be used These currents can go from the metalization layer through one media air layer to either the top or bottom walls Besides conductive materials ports are placed on the metal layers and in z directed positions All conductive surfaces and ports must be on a grid This grid is composed of regular rectangular cells An example of mapping a microstrip bend to the grid is shown below The left half of the figure shows the circuit as it appears in LAYOUT The right half of the circuit shows a part of the EMPOWER listing file Each of the plus signs in the listing file represents an intersection of two grid lines as shown on the layout Lines connecting plus signs represent metal Numbets represent port locations Notice that the ports map onto the grid in place of metal so the ports go between the end of the line and ground the wall so each port has a ground reference as would be expected 261 Simulation l l l 12 4 l lll 44 A AAA AR B GB GB GR 6 l LO 4 l Q L t t t t t t RO BOB LENENA ANI l 8 li t t i 4 4 4 4 OB B PELE Pl lt t t t t t t OR BOB OB I3 P4444 tt 6 li t k i t 4 4 4 tt B l IE l Sl AAA Plt l 4 REL B B B 6 4 l LIL 8
178. c value of the mixer image rejection ratio Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield DB IMGR DB IMGR MAG IMGR MAG IMGR Not available on Smith Chart Percent Noise Figure PRNF This routine calculates the Percent Noise Figure Contribution by each stage to the final Cascaded Noise Figure of the path PRNF Percent Noise Figure AN Added Noise CNF Cascaded Noise Figure PRNF n AN n CNF nLastStage this is a ratio in dB Where PRNF 0 0 n is the cutrent stage and nLastStage is the last stage along the designated path This measurement will help the user pinpoint all stages and their respective contribution to the total cascaded noise figure of the selected path This measurement in unit less since the measurement is a percentage There can be a few cases where the percentage sum of all the stages in the path does not equal 100 For instance if the architecture contains parallel paths then each path would contribute to the total cascaded noise figure but only a single path is considered in this measurement Another case would be where there are sufficient VSWR interactions between stages that effect the noise Reducing the architecture to the spreadsheet case will always yield the expected spreadsheet answers with respect to percentages Values Real value numeric Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none
179. calculated cutrent density function is shown here All settings except two are the same as in the previous example The initial view was set to the side view View Menu Side or Side button and the polygon view was set to wireframe View Menu Switches Wireframe or Solid Wire button empower Viewer V6 5 Beles Eile View XY amp Real Wie Freq GHz 1 a lo e a s Top Fon Side Oblique The plot confirms that this is an odd mode and shows the typical current density distribution If currents on the left strip flows in the forward direction the currents on the right strip flow in the backward direction and the center strip currents flow in opposite directions at the opposite strip sides For a dynamic view turn on the animation and rotate the plot for a better view of the propagating wave To calculate the viewer data for the other eigenwaves run EMPOWER and the viewer twice more with Mode Number to excite set to 1 and 3 Note that newly calculated data will overwrite the previous ones To avoid this and to keep viewer data for all excitation experiments you need to save a copy of the existing workspace LNMIT3 WSP in this case before the next run 315 Simulation Via Hole Viewer 316 Example The last visualization example shows a structure with non zero X Y and Z current components A segment of microstrip line terminated by a via hole from Swanson 1992 is described in the file VIA WSP The l
180. can only be accessed through intermod measurements This analysis is run as a two step process The first step will run the simulation as originally specified However for the second step all signals on the specified input port will be disabled and the 3 new signals will be created These signals consist of one small signal that falls within the channel that is used to measure channel gain and two other tones separated in such a way to produce itermods within the channel A 2nd analysis is performed for intermod measurements only This mode will set the channel bandwidth to the cotrect bandwidth to measure all third otder intermod power This mode is enabled as long the Manual Advanced checkbox is unchecked 0 T T i Tone Power Level 20 4 Power dBm 40 50 4 A 4 Desired Signal 80 A Tone Spacing 100 Gain Test Power Level 120 L an a O AS D 20 40 50 80 100 120 Frequency MHz Mixers Passive and Active Mixers Mixers ate key elements in any RF system that translates frequencies like super heterodyne receivers and transmitters Many times their performance is critical to the proper operation of the system and can be one of the most challenging components to characterize and make behave properly under all system conditions 113 Simulation 1
181. case would be where there are sufficient VSWR interactions between stages that effect the intermod levels Reducing the architecture to the spreadsheet case will always yield the expected spreadsheet answers with respect to percentages Sometimes this measurement can be greater than 100 if the equivalent 3rd order intermod power referenced to the output is greater than the actual total 3rd order intermod power A good example of this would be an amplifier where intermods are cancelled at the amplifier output In this case the generated intermod power alone may be much higher that the total intermod output powet Values Real value numeric Simulations SPECTRASYS 227 Simulation Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type PRIM3 Stage Generated IM3 as a Percent Real Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield PRIM PuM3 sis Not available on Smith Chart Spurious Free Dynamic Range SFDR This measurement is the sputious free dynamic range along the specified path as shown by SFDR n 2 3 IIP3 n MDS n dB where n stage number The Spurious Free Dyanmic Range is the range between the Minimum Detectable Discernable Signal MDS and the input power which would cause the third order intermods to be equal to the MDS The MDS is the smallest signal that can be detected and will be
182. ce spectrum can never be coherent with an intermod spectrum and vice versa Source spectrum can be coherent with source spectrum and intermod spectrum can be coherent with intermod spectrum etc 3 Signals must have the same center frequency and bandwidth All coherent signals must have the same center frequency and bandwidth For example a 2nd harmonic cannot be coherent with a 31d harmonic since both the center frequency and bandwidths are not the same However if we had a cascade of two amplifiers then the 2nd harmonic generated in 1st amplifier would be coherent with the 2nd harmonic generated in the 2nd amplifier for the same signal source In this case both the center frequency and bandwidth are the same with both harmonics being created from the same signal source 4 Must have the same LO source mixers only When a new spectrum is cteated at the output of a mixer SPECTRASYS will determine the coherency of the mixer input signal as well as the LO signal A new coherency 107 Simulation 108 number will be assigned for unique input and LO signals If there is more than one mixer in the simulation then coherency numbers for the second mixer may come from the first mixet if the all of the above rules are met for the input signal as well as the LO signal A good example of this is an image reject mixer A single input port is split 2 ways that drive the input to 2 mixers A single LO signal is also split 2 ways and phase shifted bef
183. ch adjustment For example to see how the response of a circuit changes when a capacitor is adjusted you can add a Parameter sweep which sweeps the linear or electromagnetic simulation while adjusting the capacitor value You can then view the results on a 3 D graph To add a parameter sweep 1 Right click the Simulation Data node on the Workspace Window 2 Select Add Parameter Sweep 3 Adda Table or 3 D graph to display the results For advanced applications you can nest Parameter sweeps creating 4 D 5 D or higher data This data can then be viewed on a table For information on the Parameter Sweep Properties dialog see the Reference manual Parameter Sweep Properties To open double click or create a Parameter Sweep Simulation to Sweep pci y Cancel Variable to Sweep ei Help Recalculate Now Automatic Recalculation Factory Defaults r SweepRange 7 Type Of Sweep Linear Number of Points poa Start Value 1 C Log Points Decade 101 C Linear Step Size rz Ston Yoke 10 C List of Values 145610 x Glear List z Simulation to Sweep Chooses which simulation to use for the parameter sweep The selected simulation will be recalculated for each different value of the variable chosen below 139 Simulation 140 Variable to Sweep Specifies which variable gets changed to create the sweep All variables which appear in the tune window marked with are available
184. change the number of EMPOWER points to 31 and recalculate BE Graph Workspace layonly P x 0 175 dB o D a N UN D a 36 215 dB __ 9500 Freq MHz DB S21 A DB S11 The display below is after the EMPOWER run with 31 points The response has not changed noticeably since the 11 point simulation so we must have found the correct notch frequency BE Graphi Workspace layonly x 0 175 dB DB S21 DB S11 Freq MHz DB S21 DB S11 For the example filter the notch occurs at 9 2 GHz instead of the desired 9 5 GHz Much of this shift is due to rounding the line dimensions to the nearest 5 mils Using the Viewer Once the EMPOWER run is completed the viewer can be loaded if Generate Viewer Data was selected in the EMPOWER options dialog Generating this data slows the EMPOWER simulation so it s usually only checked during last run simulations 251 Simulation empower Viewer V6 5 Ele Vi View Mag Solid Freq GHz 9 2 o ale els Y Top Front Side Oblique Right Click the EMPOWER simulation in the Workspace Window and select Run Viewet top down view has been selected and the notch frequency has been specified Port 1 is at the left of the image and port 2 is at the right The plot is color coded to the scale given i
185. ciated with transmission systems 36 Although the characteristics of transmission systems are defined by simple equations prior to the advent of scientific calculators and computers evaluation of these equations was best accomplished using graphical techniques The Smith chart gained wide acceptance during the development of the microwave industry It has been applied to the solution of a wide variety of transmission system problems many of which are described in a book by Philip Smith 37 The Smith chatt as displayed by GENESYS is shown in below Labels for normalized real and reactive components are added L7 be ES 3 H E pnr H LEE we s an OE DS woe The design of broadband transmission systems using the Smith chart involves graphic constructions on the chart repeated for selected frequencies throughout the range of interest Although the process was a vast improvement over the use of a slide rule it is 39 Simulation 40 tedious Modern interactive computer programs with high speed tuning and optimization procedures are much more efficient However the Smith chart remains an important tool for instructional use and as a display overlay for computer generated data The Smith chart provides remarkable insight into transmission system behavior The standard unity radius impedance Smith chart maps all positive resistances with any reactance from to onto a circular chart The magnitude of the linear for
186. cinity of a DSC SSB noise Nn 10 Using more than 1 noise harmonic makes sense for noise analyses of nonlinear circuits working in very nonlinear mode as at saturation or cut off modes where the nonlinear interconnection between different frequency parts of noise spectra become significant ot fot noise analysis in the vicinity of DSC where flicker noise sources are more evident In other cases it will be enough to use only the first hatmonic of noise The noise characteristics of a circuit may be gotten from the spectrum by using an equation The Noise Figure NF is calculated as difference between signal noise ratio SN at signal soutce resistot SNin and calculated from output spectrum SNout SNin dbm Pin dbm k Tin SNout dbm Pout Fout dbm Pout Fout Fnoise NF SNin SNout Where Pin peak power of input tone Pout F peak power of output spectral component having frequency F Fnoise frequency of discretization of the noise spectrum defined by Noise Tone option k Boltzman s constant Tin the absolute temperature of the signal source Kelvin s degrees A simple example of the equations block for nonlinear noise characteristics calculation 59 Simulation Will Equation Workspace HB1noise template Blx F 2100 P 10 Fnoise 300e 6 using hbi schi P2 get dbm p28 F P2noise get dom p2 F Fnoise SN2 P2 P2noise k 1 38044e 23 T 300 Pi
187. cited in the structure is printed out in the listing file see PPLT Input mode ___ will be incident in the listing file An output binary file with the extension EMV is created by EMPOWER to pass data to the viewer program In a GENESYS Workspace the internal name of this file is EMPOWER EMV An optional self documented ASCII data file with extension PLX can also be written for import into other programs To understand the viewer a review of EMPOWER input and mode representations is helpful A circuit can have external and or internal inputs External inputs are transformed to eigenmode space de embedded and notmalized to characteristic impedances of eigenmodes They could be one mode or multimode modally coupled and the incident wave for these inputs can be one of the input eigenmodes The incident wave is a harmonic function of time Its magnitude is unity and it cotresponds both to one Watt instantaneous power and 1 2 Watt time averaged power The initial phase of the incident wave is zeto Other eigenmodes of the structure ate terminated by their characteristic impedances and are perfectly matched It numerically represents a row of the generalized scattering matrix The internal potts ate often locations where lumped elements will be included by GENESYS Parametets of the lumped elements ate not required for the EMPOWER 317 Simulation 318 simulation Thus internal ports default to 1 ohm normalization In this case
188. coherent and non coherent summation is 4 to 5 dB When designing a system it is best to calculate the numbers for both the coherent and noncohetent cases to assess the variation likely to be expected over time and frequency McClanning Kevin and Vito Tom Radio Receiver Design Noble Publishing 2000 Intermods amp Harmonics Calculate Intermods and Harmonics This example will help the user understand how SPECTRASYS deals with intermods and how the nonlinear devices handle these intermods The user will also understand the difference between generated conducted and total third order intermod power See the Amplifier section for more information about the internal amplifier model used in SPECTRASYS Calculated Products Each model in SPECTRASYS has a limitation on the maximum order that it can generate Please refer to the element help to determine the order limit SPECTRASYS System The following example show the nonlinear second and third order products will be created for each pair of input signals F1 and F2 listed in increasing frequency assuming F2 is greater than F1 F2 F1 2F1 3F1 2F1 F2 F1 F2 2F1 F2 F1 2F2 2F2 F1 F2 3F2 2F2 F1 he den IP P ia DAR P i H Ibh Hy Ibba Fh TIME IM The relative levels of spectral components for the small signal regime and equal amplitudes of the signal s tones is shown above Definitions of symbols P Fundamental Tone Power IP Nth Order
189. components you should use single mode ports Use multi mode ports only for connection only with other multi mode ports and multi mode lines e They can be used with decomposition to accurately analyze much larger structures than would be possible in a single EMPOWER circuit See the Decomposition section fot more details To create a multi mode port click on the Mode Setup Button from the EMPOWER setup dialog box when you statt an EMPOWER tun You will see a box similar to the one at the end of this section To make ports multi mode check the boxes between them EMPorts 1 2 and 3 form one multi mode port and EMPotts 5 and 6 form another multi mode port EMPort 4 is a single mode pott To make a multi mode port you must follow these rules 285 Simulation e All EMPorts for a multi mode port must be on the same wall e All EMPorts must have the same length line direction current direction and reference plane shift The EMPorts may and often do have different widths as above e All EMPorts must be Normal not No Deembed or Internal e Port numbers must be sequential and in order For example if you swapped ports 1 and 2 above you could not use a 3 mode port because the ports would be in the order 2 1 3 along the sidewall Running the circuit above in EMPOWER will give 6 port data as would be expected by glancing at the picture However the fourth port is the only normal single mode port In the
190. continuities Discretisation i325 Disctetiz s inetal icone eei 1 DIStOFtO eerte mete eene 53 Distribution 1 316 PELES intet eet e oin 155 Dan T DURER 281 DITOR ient eroe oreet en 148 E Faglewa te eei deniers ttd 1 Edit Menu 274 Effective noise input temperature Eigetmode eee E A nee Era S Electromagnetic Electromagnetic simulation 1 44 257 Elements vns iia dete 165 173 EMport Opti fls tido 281 EMDOEt eet 261 265 281 EMPONWJER rerit tede coi 1 345 EMPOWER viewet 241 EMPOWER Walkthrough 345 EMPOWER Viewet eere 45251 EMPOWER Viewing Results 250 EMV tritio 317 339 Engine Theory esisiini eria 325 EPSO pecurinu rte ie 148 Equality Check see 144 Equation Wizatd zie Rer 153 Equations 1 144 145 148 150 154 165 167 181 183 184 Equtyalence i ir e eee 144 ETAO EXP1 ExponentiatiO sonrisas Exporting Data Files edicti 160 EXPOLIO ase e etas 160 Expr s aiio iie im en 145 Extensions zie eee eee O External Ports 281 297 337 Extra Details ee 340 Exttapol te eese iet ee 150 Fast Intermod Shape matins 90 Fast Newton 44 53 54 lg 44 PIX EE 145 FN A IO riens e HET 145 Precuetncies sic steer rr ae PE Full Jacobian FUNCTION Gath Citclesssa naaa 32 37 179 GAINA EE its 220 GAINIM3 GO aia General Background R
191. correspond to the geometrical origin of the box 0 0 in LAYOUT The z axis perpendicular to the metal plane corresponds to the plotted current voltage values The red color on the axis is for high values and dark blue is for zero The color coded scale makes it possible to evaluate actual values of current density The plotted values are an additive function of interpolated X and Y components of the current density The 312 EMPOWER Viewer and Antenna Patterns current components ate calculated along the cell sides not at the corners of the cells The X and Y current components are interpolated to the grid corners and are then added The X Y current display provides general insight into circuit behavior Again consider the view given above The dominant cigenwave of the stripline is excited at the left input of the structure Observe the typical current distribution in the cross section X 0 click the side view button for a better look at this At this time the current declines to almost zero at the right output click the Front view button This confirms a line length of 90 degrees Next animate the response by clicking on the Animate button again Notice how the dominant stripline wave propagates in the structure The animation is a simple set of snapshots fot the subsequent time moments The time will vaty between zero and the petiod of the incident wave 1 f seconds The previous example illustrates the propagation of the wave For sim
192. d minimum frequency of the linear simulation e Stop Frequency The upper bound maximum frequency of the linear simulation Type of Sweep e Linear Number of Points Allows specification of start and stop frequencies and number of points e Log Points Decade Allows specification of start and stop frequencies and number of points e Linear Step Size Allows specification of start and stop frequencies and space between points e List of Frequencies Allows the explicit specification of analysis frequencies These points are entered into the List of Frequencies box separated by spaces Factory Defaults Resets the sweep propetties to the original known good settings Temperature The ambient temperature of the linear simulation Overview The purpose of this section is to summarize network analysis concepts and to define some of the parameters plotted by GENESYS For further details on measurements see the Measurements section of this manual Netwotks are considered as black boxes Because the networks ate assumed to be linear and time invariant the characteristics of the networks are uniquely defined by a set of linear equations relating port voltages and cutrents A number of network parameter types have been developed for this purpose including H Y Z S ABCD and others These parameters may be used to compute and display network responses and to compute quantities useful for circuit design such as Gmax maxim
193. d PFET will not be shown as parameters in GENESYS GENESYS will also use appropriate symbols for any recognized option The following options are recognized by GENESYS BJT BJT4 BJT5 NPN and PNP FET and JFET NFET NJF PFET and PJF MOS NMOS and PMOS 85 Simulation 86 If var var2 are specified they are set to the specified value instead of the option being set to a value Additionally the parameters referenced are not shown as parameters in GENESYS Otherwise they behave identically to the case above EAGLEWARE LAYOUT keyword Advanced keyword which allows overriding of footptints or association entries EAGLEWARE OPTIONS keyword Advanced keyword which allows specification of additional model options EAGLEWARE NAME keyword Normally the GENESYS model name is the same as the Vetilog A model with any device class options added to this base name The base name can be overridden by YEAGLEWARE_NAME maodelnameYo EAGLEWARE SWAP12 keyword Advanced keyword which reverses pins 1 and 2 in GENESYS Can ovetride DEVICE CLASS swapping if placed later in the file EAGLEWARE NOSWAP12 keyword Advanced keyword which prevents pins 1 and 2 from being swapped in GENESYS Can override DEVICE CLASS swapping if placed later in the file EAGLEWARE IGNORE keyword Tells GENESYS to ignore a parameter For example VARAGLEWARE_IGNORE x will cause the parameter x to not be displayed in GENESYS and the default value
194. d by the voltage test point designator name Iprobe Peak Current through probe probe is the current MAG probe designator name Pport RMS Power delivered at port port is the port DBM number Operators Measurements are combined with operators to change the data format The general format for combining operators with measurements is operator measurement of operator measurement where operator is one of the operators listed in the table below and measurement is one of the measurements listed in the table in the previous section Also available is the operator which may be combined with any other measurement to select a subset of a sweep Its format is operator measurement value where value is the independent value or range to pull data from For ranges separate values by colon For multidimensional data multiple ranges can be specified separated by commas The values can be the actual independent frequency etc data or can be Hindex where index is the zero based index of the data to use such as a harmonic number in a nonlinear simulation Some examples S21 900 Gives all data from S21 at 900 MHz If the data comes from a parameter sweep then the result will be a sweep of values all at 900 MHz vs the swept parameter P2 3 Returns the power in dBm at port 2 at the fourth data point counting DC that is the third harmonic for a single tone simulation 181 Simulation 182 MAG V5
195. dB OIP3 20 dBm zx RF Input 1 gt E p i p Du si BPF BUTTER 1 FLO 8 MHz FHi 12 MHz N 5 IL 0 dB LO Port 3 4 APASS 3 dB y ml fZ 123 Simulation 124 Unlike a spectrum analyzer on the SPECTRASYS composite plot we can actually distinguish the direction of travel of all spectral components Furthermore a trace that represents the total from all directions in a node is represented By simply placing the mouse over the trace the user is able to identify which direction the signals are traveling by seeing which element they are coming from Think of this is as an N way directional coupler with infinite directivity so that we only see the signals traveling in the direction of interest All of these signals from each direction of travel is an independent trace on the composite spectrum plot For example if we had three elements connected to a node we would see signals traveling from each of these elements For the example shown the components in the RF input are at 90 and 100 MHz Notice that the 90 MHz component is identified as from source S2 i e the LO drive The leakage path is from the LO input port S2 or node 3 through nodes 7 and 4 i c the mixer LO to RF isolation and then through attenuator ATTN 1 The power of 25 dBm is the result of the LO power of 10 dBm attenuated by 5 db and passing through the mixer isolation path with 30 db Composite Workspace composite spectrum ut Node Composite
196. dances with commas A 1 Port Device Data File can be used in place of any impedance file to specify frequency dependent or complex port impedances Generalized When this box is checked the impedance for each line as calculated by EMPOWER are used for their terminating impedance See your EMPOWER manual for details on Generalized S Parameters 265 Simulation 266 Use ports from schematic Check this box when co simulating with HARBEC harmonic balance nonlinear simulation This forces all sources and impedances to be considered in the simulation Note Be sure to check Use ports from schematic if you will be using this simulation as the basis for a HARBEC Simulation otherwise there will be no nonlinear sources available Electromagnetic Simulation Frequencies Specifies the frequencies at which to run EMPOWER If you have lumped elements in your simulation you can often turn down the number of frequencies here and increase the number of frequencies in the Co simulation sweep specified below Start Freq MHz Specifies the minimum frequency to analyze Stop Freq MHz Specifies the maximum frequency to analyze Number of Points Specifies the number of frequency points to analyze Points are distributed lineatly between the low and high freq specified above HARBEC Freqs Select this box to cause EMPOWER to simulate the layout at each frequency calculated by the harmonic balance simulator Checking this box makes su
197. data file the first three ports of data are in mode space and the last two ports of data are in mode space For example in the data file e S41 represents the transmission of energy from mode 1 of multi mode port 1 2 3 to port 4 e 25 represents the transmission of energy from mode 1 of multi mode port 5 6 to mode 2 of multi mode port 1 2 3 e S66 represents the reflection of energy in mode 2 of multi mode port 5 6 Multimode data should be carefully connected Multimode ports should be connected only to other identical multi mode port or line configuration same box line widths spacings etc Otherwise the connection is non physical and the results are meaningless See the Spiral Inductor example in the Decomposition section for more information on the use of Multimode lines Setup Modes x These boxes are for modal use only For normal ports clear all boxes 4 1 Iv 6 empower 2 j K Ports Iv 5 tco Generalized S Parameters When normal circuit theory analysis is performed the ports are often terminated with a standard impedance such as 50 or 75 ohms However EMPOWER will give much more 286 EMPOWER External Ports accurate results if you use generalized S Parameters With generalized S Parameters instead of the ports being terminated with 50 or 75 ohms the ports ate terminated with the characteristic impedance of the line as calculated by EMPOWER This is a more internally consistent represe
198. de Signal Signal Type cw Narrow New Custom Source with Phase Noise Center Frequency FRF MHz CJ Step and Repeat Signal Bandwidth es MHz Frequency Offset MHz Power Average 80 dBm Amplitude Offset 0 dB Phase Shift Phase Offset 7 Number of Simulation Points Number of Signals 2 JS Broadband Noise Start Frequency MHz Power IE 74 dBm Hz Stop Frequency 100 MHz Number of Points p When enabled for any source on a port broadband noise is used instead of thermal noise at that port OK Cancel Apply Help mes e Center Frequency This is the center frequency of the source in MHz TIT 128 SPECTRASYS System Bandwidth This parameter is the bandwidth of the source in MHz The lower frequency of the source is the center frequency minus 1 2 the bandwidth and the upper frequency of the source is the center frequency plus Y the bandwidth Power Level This is the average power level of the source in dBm Phase Shift This is the phase shift of the source in degrees Number of Points This is the number of points that represent the source Most of the time 2 points is adequate to represent the source However in cases where the source bandwidth is large and the frequency response of the circuit may affect the bandwidth of the source the user may want to increase the number of the points CW All CW sources have their bandwidth
199. ded a mixed signal language was created to manage the interaction between digital and analog signals A subset of this Verilog A was defined Verilog A describes analog behavior only however it has functionality to interface to some digital behavior Most other Verilog A implementations are interpreted languages and are relatively slow However the GENESYS AMK includes a Verilog A compiler that creates C code which is compiled yielding simulation times similar to hand coded models Additionally since the derivatives symbolically calculated by the AMK are often more accurate convergence of circuits using Verilog A models is generally better This often results in a speed up not slow down when using Verilog A models The GENESYS AMK includes additional nonlinear models not available with the standard HARBEC simulator As of the time of this writing the new models are e AngelovNFET PFET e BSIM4 NMOS PMOS e EKV NMOS PMOS e HiSIM NMOS PMOS e Philips JUNCAP e MEXTRAM NPN PNP e Philips MOS9 NMOS PMOS 67 Simulation 68 Philips MOS11 NMOS PMOS Parker Skellern NFET TFT NMOS PMOS UCSD HBT NPN To access these models 1 2 3 4 Click the More button on the right side of the schematic toolbar Choose the Category Builtin Advanced Modeling Kit Choose the desired model and click OK Generally you will want the default schematic symbol so click OK on the Choose Symbol to Place dialog box Place the
200. den e La Y Jo MaxMixingOnder i l i l This is extended by noise generated frequencies up to frequency set FBz FEn Fbn fois Fuoisjie Me Na Fhn gt 0 foe FB where Nn number of noise harmonics taken into account in the analysis Which means that the noise analyses create the noise harmonics spectrums nearby and at the frequency of every spectral component from the FB set After that each noise circuit element will add its noise current sources at all frequencies in the set FBn For most cases it is enough to use the only 1st harmonic of the noise tone Using more then 1 noise harmonic allows calculating the noise envelope of the discrete spectral components noise side bands with nonlinear interaction between noise components of the sidebands In most cases the interaction is negligible because of the low level of circuit noise The sidebands may be calculated using a sweep of 1 noise tone see the option hb_sweepnoise This significantly decreases the number of balanced frequencies and increases the speed and improves convergence hb noiserecalc the number of noise analyses tecalculations for each set of base frequencies used for averaging of the large signal noise analysis HARBEC DC amp Harmonic Balance hb onesidenoise flag to calculate nonlinear noise for only single sideband SSB of each detetministic spectral component hb sweepnoise if set will use a sweep of only 1 noise harmonic in th
201. der the Analysis sub menu Select Annotate as shown 9 Create a parameter sweep using the New button and find Add Parameter Sweep under the Analysis sub menu Name the sweep Vc Sweep Set the parameters up as shown Parameter Sweep Properties xi Simulation to Sweep ve Sweep eer Variable to Sweep foc y Help _Becacate non Eectory Defauts Recalculate Now Automatic Recalculation Factory Defaults SweepRange y Type Of Sweep Linear Number of Points s gt Start Value 2e 6 Log Points Decade E C Linear Step Size 1 Stop value 10e 6 C List of Values 123456789 a 10 Gear List xl 10 Create another parameter sweep and name it Ib Sweep which will sweep our fitst sweep Vc Sweep and fill in the parameters as shown Simulation 11 Create a rectangular graph using the New button and find Add Rectrangular Graph under the Output sub menu Fill in the parameters as shown Default Simulation Data or Equations o Sweep NPN Sch y ET ment 7 a Pyar aaa AAA Left Y Axis Right Y Axis X Axis T Auto Scale Iv Auto Scale v Auto Scale Log Scale Units Min c Min E Min fe Frequency MHz Max 1 25e 3 Max E Max 10 Time based ns Divisions s Divisions 10 Divisions 10 Enter the name of a parameter to graph or og Measurement Wizard pr
202. dex dim returns the independent data point for dimension dim of a post processed expression See Post Processing later in the equations reference Note If the independent data is frequency GETINDEPVALUE returns the values in Hz not MHz GETVALUE expression index calculates and returns a value of a post processed expression See Post Processing later in the equations reference Equation Reference GETVALUEAT expression indep calculates and returns a value of a post processed expression at a given independent value Only works on 2 dimensional data X vs Y See Post Processing latet in the equations reference Note If the independent data is frequency GETINDEPAT requires values in Hz not MHz IFF condition trueValue falseValue returns trueValue if condition is true and falseValue if condition is false Can be used with any data including post processed data IFTRUE condition trueValue returns trueValue if condition is true and zero if condition is false Can be used with any data including post processed data IMAG expression returns the imaginary part of a complex number Alternate form IM expression INT expression greatest integer less than or equal to the expression Examples INT 5 6 is 5 and INT 1 4 is 2 LOG expression base 10 logarithm LN expression natural logarithm MATRIX rows columns Returns a 2 dimensional array of size rows x columns See Arrays later in the
203. ditional if and case or looping for statements unless the conditional expression is a genvar expression which can not change their value during the course of an analysis e Analog operators are not allowed in repeat and while looping statements e Analog operators can only be used inside an analog block they can not be used inside an initial or always block or inside a user defined analog function Under most cases you can not specify a null argument in the argument list of an analog operator 79 Simulation Time detivative The ddt operator computes the time derivative of its argument The form is ddt expr Time integral The idt operator computes the time integral of its argument The general form is idt expr Linear time delay absdelay implements the absolute transport delay for continuous waveforms The general form is absdelay pat td maxdelay Discrete waveform transition expr td rise_time fall time time_tol filters transition db The slew analog operator bounds the rate of change slope of the waveform The general form is slew expr ax pos slew rate max_neg_slew_rate The last_crossing function returns a real value representing the simulation time when a signal expression last crossed zero The format is last crossing expr direction Laplace transform laplace zp implements the zero pole form of the Laplace filters transform filter The general form for each is
204. ditor will undoubtedly destroy it Some binary files used by EMPOWER and GENESYS are workspace line and Y Parameter files You can normally tell the kind of file you have by looking at its extension the part of the name after the last period Some commonly used extensions include EXE executable TXT text and HLP help Each kind of file used by EMPOWER has its own unique extension These extensions are shown here Each of these types will be discussed individually in the following sections Note Unfortunately Windows can be setup to hide files extensions as well as actual files from the user We would recommend that you turn off this feature Double click on My Computer Select Options from the View menu Click the Viewer tab Click Show all files Deselect Hide MS DOS file extensions for file types that are registered and click OK Different versions of Windows may have slightly different procedures EMPOWER File Descriptions PLX Text Text listing of viewer currents Port normalizing impedances Binary Port deembedding and line data for a port with a user specified deembedding file name Frequency vs impedance data GENESYS Workspace File Text S Parameter results Text Netlist for EMPOWER Binary Y Parameter results SS RG Backup All files with either a name or an extension starting with tilde etc ate backup files and can be safely deleted Written by EMPOWER Typ
205. e Binaty Can be safely edited No Average size 10 to 100Kbytes but may be larger Use Data for viewing currents or voltages EMV files EMPOWER Viewer files are completely self contained files containing all information needed by the viewer to display currents and voltages for a circuit These files contain information about the box and the grid mapping of the circuit as well as actual complex current or voltage values at each frequency EMPOWER creates an EMV file whenever Generate Viewer Data is checked or the In option is specified EMV files can only be tead by the EMPOWER viewer If you want to generate viewer data for import into other programs you should generate a PLX text file For more information on viewer files the Viewer section Written by EMPOWER Type Binaty 339 Simulation 340 Can be safely edited No Average size 1 to 5Kbytes but may be larger Use Internal file for EMPOWER but can also be used in the SMTLP and MMTLP models in GENESYS EMPOWER must perform a separate line analysis for all external ports If no filename is specified by the user then the results from the line analysis are stored in Ln files These files also store all information about the box and pott and are intelligent They are only recalculated if necessary and even then only at frequencies necessary Even if the circuit changes they are only recalculated if the change affects the line analysis Notes When these files are n
206. e nonlinear noise analysis This uses the results of a nonlinear noise analysis as statting point for the noise analysis with different value of the noise frequency It decreases the order of the system of nonlinear equations and speeds up multi noise tones harmonic balance analysis HARBEC Options E General Advanced J oscitator Relative Tolerance Absolute Tolerance 106 6 Maximum Amplitude Step 100 Minimum Amplkude Step 0 01 Yo Frequency Resolion 1 He Reuse Jacobian et Most 1000 Times Full Jacobian Automatic g F Use Previous Solution As Starting Point T Set All Freqs as Harmonks of 1 1 rFFT Force 1 D FFT Allow pseudo harmonic FFT calculation Allow non binary FFT F Use Krylov Subspace Method Krov Iterations 206 Maximum Number of Iterations 500 Special Options HB_NOISERECALC 20 H amp ONESIDENOISE Fig 2 Harbec options dialog window Special Options 1 300e 6 MHz 167 1953 2 10 MHz 50 1558 E i 9 99 MHz 4 3 10 0003 MHz 168 3532 4 20 0003 MHz 170 2028 5 99 9997 MHz 4167 1146 6 100 MHz 35 6297 7 100 0003 MHz 1691575 8 100 0006 MHz 169101 9 9 100 0006 MHz 57 Simulation Fig 3 The solution spectrum with noise This graph includes noise spectral components NSC of each deterministic spectral components DSC Wil Spectrum Workspace HB2noise template
207. e numetic Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type DB SDR stage dynamic range in dB MAG SDR numeric value of the stage dynamic range Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield DB SDR DB SDR DB SDR MAG SDR MAG SDR Not available on Smith Chart Stage Noise Figure SNF This measurement is the noise figure of each individual stage along the specified path as shown by SNF n CNP n CNP n 1 GAIN n dB where n stage number Passive Stages OR SNF n Noise Figure of the Active Stage dB where n stage number Amplifier and Mixer Stages The Stage Noise Figure is the noise figure of each individual stage For all passive devices this noise figure is based on the channel power and stage gain However for amplifier and mixer stages this noise figure will be the noise figure entered in the 229 Simulation parameters for these devices This measurement is used to aid the user in determining the added noise by each stage in the cascade See the Gain and Channel Noise Power measurements to determine which types of signals are included or ignored in this measurement Values Real value numeric Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator
208. e a complete technical reference to Verilog A Rather the objective is to give a model developer enough details to implement complex models without being weighted down with syntax charts and excessive details To purchase a complete reference to Verilog A contact Accellera at www accellera org Preprocessor The preprocessor suppotts certain directives in otder to simplify code development These directives are very similar to their C counterparts The include directive is used to insert the entire contents of a source file during compilation The include can be used to simplify code by including global definitions or without tepeating code within module boundaries The compiler directive include can be specified anywhere within the Verilog A file The filename is the name of the file with either the full or relative path to be included in the source file Only white space or comments can appear on the same line as the include directive A file included in the source using include can contain other include compiler directives howevet infinite nesting is not permitted include filename Examples include user include global_decl vams include myIncludes txt include myFunctions va 71 Simulation 72 String substitution can be performed with the define directive both inside and outside module definitions The macto is used in the source file by insert the character followed by the macr
209. e a preferred number will help so a box 509 x 512 cells is better than one 509 x 509 cells Note that only the time while EMPOWER is working on the Fourier Transform is affected and this is normally only substantial with boxes 100x100 or latger If you see a status with FFT in the message for a long time check to see that the box width and height ate a preferred number of cells across Preferred numbers which fit the form given above 10000 and below are 1234567891011 12 13 14 15 16 18 20 21 22 24 25 26 27 28 30 32 33 35 36 39 40 42 44 45 48 49 50 52 54 55 56 60 63 64 65 66 70 72 75 77 78 80 81 84 88 90 91 96 98 99 100 104 105 108 110 112 117 120 125 126 128 130 132 135 140 143 144 147 150 154 156 160 162 165 168 175 176 180 182 189 192 195 196 198 200 208 210 216 220 224 225 231 234 240 243 245 250 252 256 260 264 270 273 275 280 286 288 294 297 300 308 312 315 320 324 325 330 336 343 350 351 352 360 364 375 3778 384 385 390 392 396 400 405 416 420 429 432 440 441 448 450 455 462 468 480 486 490 495 500 504 512 520 525 528 539 540 546 550 560 567 572 5776 585 588 594 600 616 624 625 630 637 640 648 650 660 672 675 686 693 700 702 704 715 720 728 729 735 750 756 768 770 780 784 792 800 810 819 825 832 840 858 864 875 880 882 891 896 900 910 924 936 945 960 972 975 980 990 1000 1001 1008 1024 1029 1040 1050 1053 1056 1078 1080 1092 1100 1120 1125 1134 1144 1152 1155 1170 1176 1188 1200 1215 1225 1232 1248 1250 1260 1274 1280 1287 1296 1300 1320 1
210. e channel for intercept measurements so that cascaded intermod measurements will be made A desired signal at the channel frequency must be created so that SPECTRASYS can determine the correct in channel gain needed to create input intermod measurements from output measurements The user must specify the location of the Tone Channel or Signal used for IIP3 OIP3 for all intercept measurements NOTE Ensure that interfering signal frequencies are chosen is so that intermods will appear in the main channel If not intermod measurements will be zero NOTE Set the channel measurement bandwidth to the widest intermod to be measured Remember intermod bandwidth is a function of the governing intermod equation For example if the intermod equation is 2F1 F2 then the intermod bandwidth would be 2BW1 BW2 Note Bandwidths never subtract and will always add The channel bandwidth must be set wide enough to include the entire bandwidth of the intermod to achieve the expected results SPECTRASYS System Check the Manual Advanced option on the Calculate page of the system analysis to enable this option Automatic 2 Tone In this mode SPECTRASYS will create the 3 sources needed to calculate intermods and intercept points See the Calculate page for a description of parameters needed to create these signals NOTE These signals and their intermods will be totally transparent to the user when looking at any spectrum plots and
211. e determined by examining the comma delimited sequence of node numbets short form ot reference designators long form which identify the node or element where the spectrum was created and the node or element sequence that the signal took to atrive at the destination node The first node number or reference designator after the closing frequency equation bracket shows the reference designator or node number where the spectrum first appeared or was created The subsequent node numbers or reference designators indicate the path that the spectral component took to atrive at the node under investigation Path Examples S1 2xS2 6 7 8 12 5 2 Would indicated that a third order intermod S1 2xS2 was created at node 6 then traveled through nodes 7 8 12 5 and then arrived at node 2 which is the current node under investigation Feature Activation The spectral identification feature is activated from the Composite Spectrum page of the System Analysis dialog box Please refer to that page for activation information EXAMPLE Consider the following schematic that has cascaded amplifiers Each can cteate second harmonics of the input signal If the output power of the second amplifier is plotted it is easy to identify source and amplitude of each of these harmonics This is true even though they ate of the same frequency Consider the first source S1 at 100 MHz at the input node 1 in the schematic below E Schi Workspace Getting Started
212. e dir argument is an integer expression the other arguments are real If the tolerances are not defined they are set by the simulator If either ot both tolerances ate defined then the direction of the crossing must also be defined The direction can only evaluate to 1 1 or 0 If it is set to O or is not specified the event and timestep control will occur on both positive and negative signal crossings If dir is 1 or 1 then the event and timestep control occur on tising edge falling edge transitions of the signal only For other transitions of the signal the cross function will not generate an event expr_fo and lime fol represent the maximum allowable error between the estimated crossing point and the actual crossing point Examples The following description of a sample and hold illustrates how the cross function can be used module sample and hold in out sample output out input in sample electrical in out sample teal state analog begin Q cross V sample 2 0 1 0 state V in V out lt transition state O 10n end endmodule The cross function maintains its internal state It has the same restrictions as other analog operators in that it can not be used inside an if case casex or casez statement unless the conditional expression is a genvar expression Also cross is not allowed in the repeat and while iteration statements but is allowed in the analog for statements t
213. e give memory requirements for different parts of the simulation MAP OF TERMINALS This section shows the grid representation of the problem EMPOWER File Descriptions SDTC SECTION Symmetry detection sections specify whether the structure is symmetrical The symmetry processing additionally shows where any differences occurred and can be very useful in finding out where the structure is not symmettical The coordinates specified refer to the terminal map shown above LINE ANALYSIS MODE RESULTS This area of the listing contains sections identical to those described above which pertain to the line analysis Below these sections you will find a table of line parameters for each frequency The entties are Nm port number Type impedance type real re or imaginary im Normal lines should have a real impedance Zo ohm Line impedance Gw rad m propagation constant Gw Go propagation constant relative to free space Comp Phase Compensation Admittance value of phase and impedance compensation for deembedding S MATRIX TABLES Each table gives the circuits s parametets at one frequency For normal non multimode inputs as an example S21 is found in the row with input numbers 2 and 1 in that order Written by EMPOWER Type Text Can be safely edited Yes Average size 200 Kbytes to 2Mbytes but may vary Use Importing cutrent data from EMPOWER into another application such as Matlab ot Excel This
214. e here in finite space and we calculate the GGF matrix elements without additional truncation or seties summation errors It can also be reformulated in matrix form in accordance with Pregla Pascher 1989 The GGF matrix can be represented by a sum of Toeplitz and Hankel matrices and their rows can be obtained directly from the general sums arrays The informational multiport term was introduced by B V Sestroretzkiy 1987 and in a nutshell means a model multiport that reflects electromagnetic properties of an object before superimposing an additional boundary condition It comprises information about all possible structures that could be formed by different combinations of the additional conditions The boundary condition superimposing can be represented as a set of simple manipulations with the informational multiport terminals We have added this section to EMPOWER Theory clarify connections of the numerical electromagnetic solution with the circuit theoty This technique is also known as the impedance interpretation of boundary condition superimposition The GGF matrix obtained in the previous section can be represented as an impedance matrix Z of a multiport shown on the left below LAS ideal metallization ae BT 77 LA AS LLLP LLG km Som LLL LL EZ di x ree A suzfa ce LRP x ex impedance Pm F y AS LY The multiport terminals are conceptual and their positions are just a schematic represent
215. e intermod bandwidth would be 2BW1 BW2 Note Bandwidths never subtract and will always add The channel bandwidth must be set wide enough to include the entire bandwidth of the intermod to achieve the expected results The Automatic Intermod Mode will set the bandwidth appropriately Values Real value in Watts Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type DBM CIM3P _ conducted third order intermod power in dBm MAG CIM3P magnitude of the conducted third order intermod power in Watts Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield DBM CIM3P DBM CIM3P DBM CIM3P MAG CIM3P MAG CIM3P Not available on Smith Chart Generated Third Order Intermod Power GIM3P This measurement is the generated intermod power in the main channel created at the output of the current stage during the IM3 analysis pass In equation form the generated third order intermod power is GIM3P n integration of the intermods generated at stage n across the channel bandwidth Using this measurement in conjunction with the Conducted Third Order Intermod Power CIM3P and the Total Third Order Intermod Power TIM3P the user can quickly 235 Simulation identify the weak intermod link in the cascaded chain and will guide the user in maximizing the Spurious Free Dynamic Range SFDR
216. e many signals simultaneously We will add more signals to the input port to see the impact on the system 1 2 Double click on the system simulation Uncheck the Enable checkbox on the first source line to disable the 100 MHz CW signal coming into Port 1 Click on the Add button on the third empty source line Make the source box look like 27 Simulation System Source Parameters 5 Press OK to close the Source box 6 Onthe fitst Forward Path line in the Paths tab enter 100 for the channel frequency This is necessary because we now have many signals coming into the input and we need to specify which one to track for the level diagram 7 Click OK to close the system dialog and start simulation 8 Zooming in on the input and output will show the following spectra You can either use a mouse wheel or the zoom icons on the toolbar Notice all of the junk coming in and out of the circuit 28 Walkthrough SPECTRASYS Workspace 7 Multiple Signals BE Output Spectrum Izdaa Frequency MHz Workspace 7 Multiple Signals WEInput Spectrum rdlwaa 125 150 1754 200 360 400 320 200 240 Frequency MHz 160 120 e DEMIP Note The completed walkthrough is saved in ExamplesNSPECTRASYS Walkthrough V Multiple Signals WSP
217. e one numbering starts at one by default A VECTOR 3 Af 1 A 2 5 A 8 A 1 A 2 A 3 now contains 6 MATRIX x y returns a matrix 2 dimensional array of x by y real zeros Elements are accessed using square brackets and ate base one numbering starts at one by default B MATRIX Q 2 B 1 1 complex 1 3 ps B 1 2 B 2 1 3 B 2 2 complex 1 3 Note for advanced users Elements can also be accessed linearly in row column order which can be useful in some situations Thus the following equations work identically to the equations just given above B MATRIX 22 B 1 complex 1 3 B 2 3 B 3 2 3 B 4 complex 1 3 GENESYS currently contains no special matrix mathematical operators All operations simply work on each element individually For example C VECTOR 2 C 1 5 C 2 3 4 D VECTOR 2 D 1 C 2 3 D 1 now equals 0 4 D 2 COMPLEX 5 6 E C D E is now a two element vector E 1 4 6 E 2 1 6 36 Scalat matrix combination operators also work For instance adding a complex number to a vector adds the complex number to every element of the vector F VECTOR 2 F 1 1 F 2 2 149 Simulation 150 G COMPLEX 3 4 H F G H 1 4 j4 H 2 5 j4 Matrices and vectors are safe out of bounds access is always caught If an out of bounds index is used the first element is used instead If the variable being indexed is not an array its value is used instead If two m
218. e ports are input output ports Line 5 electrical p n Declares that these nodes are electrical If internal nodes are needed they should be added to this line Line 6 parameter real r 50 from 0 inf exclude 7 Declares model parameter r with a default value of 50 This value can range from greater than zero using opening parenthesis to indicate zero is not allowed to infinity Infinity is a legal value since square bracket was used The value 7 is specifically excluded Line7 analog Header fot the analog equations Required in all files Line 8 begin Starts the actual analog equations Often this is combined with analog on one line analog begin Line 9 V p n lt r I p n Advanced Modeling Kit Adds a voltage due to the resistor V IR V p n is the voltage from node p to node n I p n is a branch current flowing from node p to node n Note This branch current is automatically added by the compiler as another variable to be solved and the matrix entries to support this Modified Nodal Analysis relationship are also added automatically Line 10 end Ends the analog equations started at line 8 Line 11 endmodule Ends the resistor module started at line 3 Other commonly used features not shown in this simple example include local vatiables equations and if then statements See the Verilog A examples ot the Verilog A reference section of this manual Verilog A Reference Overview This manual does not giv
219. e te coo ti 145 I Identification ette ee 124 Identifying Spectral Origin 124 Simulation 366 IF 141 Image Channel Noise Power S Image Channel Powet sse 224 Image Frequency 221 Image Noise Rejection Ratio Implication Informational Multiport Input Third Order Intercept Input VS WR zeiten aee ERE 32 Hum ER 145 Integer Division Inter digital a zt remote IntermmOd uet Rn Ree et Intermods Intermods and Harmonics 90 108 Intetmodulation eee 44 53 Intermodulation Distortion SPECTRASYS112 Internal Ports 264 265 290 297 317 326 Interpolate Iprobe TACO OR 44 53 54 K 179 A ER eene 44 54 L1339 Layer Tab TAVE Surprise LAYOUT Creating Drawing i Simulating siens conm ono taps 248 LAYOUT Less Than Level Diagrams seen Line Direction Line impedance Linear Magnitude Linear Measurements eese Linear Simulation Linear Simulation Properties LNMIT3 WSP Load Pull Contouts Loss Taiana da DO crias Lossy metals MAGA eR 145 181 MAGANG 179 181 MAGANG300 181 Magnetic Wall 2297 Magnitude Manufacturets Maximum Amplitude Step 54 Maximum Mixing Otdet sss 54 M
220. e the actual input third order intercept for the entire chain This measurement is only available during the IM3 analysis pass The Calculate Intermods Along Path checkbox must be checked and properly configured in order to make this measurement See the Calculate Intermods Along Path section for information on how to configure these tests See the Output Third Order Intercept and Cascaded Third Order Intermod Gain measurements to determine which types of signals ate included or ignored in this measurement 232 Measurements SPECTRASYS Remember intermod bandwidth is a function of the governing intermod equation For example if the intermod equation is 2F1 F2 then the intermod bandwidth would be 2BW1 BW2 Note Bandwidths never subtract and will always add The channel bandwidth must be set wide enough to include the entire bandwidth of the intermod to achieve the expected results The Automatic Intermod Mode will set the bandwidth appropriately Values Real value in Watts Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type DBM I1P3 input third order intercept in dBm MAG IIP3 magnitude of the input third order intercept in Watts Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield DBM IIP3 DBM IIP3 MAG HIP3 MAG HIP3 Not available on Smith Chart Output Third Ord
221. e their signals to every node in the system since perfect isolation is untealizable with real components Consequently real signals propagate in both directions at every node SPECTRASYS follows this same model and signals travel in both directions at a every node Howevet the user is typically only interested in the RF powet traveling in a particular direction For example if the user created a schematic of a single conversion super heterodyne receiver the cascaded gain for the primary receive path would only make sense looking in the direction from the receiver front end to the IF output The direction of the LO radiation along the path from the LO to the receive antenna port would be in a direction opposite that of the received signal As a result the Desired Spectrum for the received signal would be in the forward direction from the receiver front end to the IF output and the Undesired Spectrum would be any other signal that didn t originate from the receiver front end that is traveling in the reverse direction However looking at the signals along the LO radiation path the SPECTRASYS System LO signals would be the Desired Spectrum and the received signals would be the Undesired Spectrum All signals that are members of the Desired Spectrum and Undesited Spectrum are also members of the Total Spectrum See the example Getting Started 5 wsp for a good illustration of Desired and Undesired
222. ear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Desctiption Result Type DB GAINALL gain in dB MAG GAINALL numeric value of the gain Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield DB GAINALL DB GAINALL DB GAINALL MAG GAINALE MAG GAINALL MAG GAINALL Not available on Smith Chart Image Frequency IMGF This measurement is the image frequency from the input to the first mixer Any energy at the image frequency can seriously degrade the performance of a receiver Even unfiltered noise at the image frequency will be converted into the IF band and degrade the sensitivity by as much as 3 dB The image frequency measurements are provided to help the designet understand the impact of the image frequency on the performance of the receiver Since SPECTRASYS knows the Channel Frequency of the specified path it also has the ability to figure out what the image frequency is up to the 1st mixer After the 1st mixer the Image Frequency measurement will show the main channel frequency This measurement will show what that frequency is This image frequency is used to determine the area of the spectrum that will be integrated by the Mixer Image Channel Power measurement to calculate the image power For example if we designed a 2 GHz receiver that had an IF frequency of 150 MHz using low LO side injection then the LO frequency would be 1850 MHz and image frequency
223. ease the number of frequencies the order used in analysis If not enough frequencies are used the data is being undersampled and cannot accurately represent the solution For example modeling a squate wave with three harmonics will ignore a lot of energy in the circuit often leading to convergence issues Increasing the number of frequencies analyzed will more accurately model the signals at the expense of more time 2 Try Always and Never options for calculating the Jacobian If a Jacobian is calculated the simulator will search in a different direction from the Fast Newton method Sometimes the Jacobian will be a better direction sometimes it will be wotse Try both approaches 53 Simulation 54 3 Ifthe convergence issue occurs during a parameter sweep sweep more points so that that each simulation is closer to the previous one often requiring less total time Or if this is not practical or desired turn off Use Previous Solution As Starting Point This will cause the simulator to start fresh with each new parameter value 4 Increase the value of Absolute Tolerance and Relative Tolerance This should speed up the solution but will be less accurate particularly for low signal levels A variety of methods and parameters are available to control the approach that HARBEC uses to find convergence The speed of performance can be improved by adapting these parameters to the specific circuit being analyzed To understand h
224. easurement Bandwidth which become the main channel for the specified path SPECTRASYS can automatically identify the desired Channel Frequency in an unambiguous case where only one frequency is on the from node of the designated path An error will appear if more than one frequency is available For this particular case the user must specify the intended frequency for this path in the System Simulation Dialog Box A Channel Frequency exists for each node along the specified path Consequently each node along the path will have the same Channel Frequency until a frequency translation element such as a mixer or frequency multiplier is encountered SPECTRASYS automatically deals with frequency translation through these elements The individual mixer parameters of Desired Output Sum or Difference and LO Injection High of Low ate used to determine the desired frequency at the output of the mixer The Channel Frequency is a critical parameter for SPECTRASYS since most of the measurements are based on this parameter If this frequency is incorrectly specified then the user may get unexpected results since many measurements are based on this frequency The easiest way to verify the Channel Frequency that SPECTRASYS is using is to look at this measurement in a Table Values Real value in MHz Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Opera
225. ected on the xy plane in 3 space If Sweep Phi is unchecked a fixed angle will be specified and far field data will be produced only at this phi angle EMPOWER Options B X General Viewer Far Field Advanced Thinning out subarid 1 LU LU L L ECCE TN 5 Thin out electrical lossy surfaces Solid thinning out slower accurate Add extra details to listing file IV Use planar ports for one port elements IV Show detailed progress messages Only check errors and memory do not simulate Command line anced Tab Cu Only check errors topology and memory do not simulate Useful to make sure you have the simulation and layout setup properly before a long EMPOWER run This option provides a very important means both for checking the grid mapping and required memoty EMPOWER just maps the problem onto the grid and calculates the required number of the grid variables for each frequency Check the map of terminals in the listing file to see the grid model of the problem and check the MEMORY lines in the listing file to get some idea about problem complexity and probable simulation time Setup Layout Port Modes Brings up the multi mode setup dialog box as described in the Decomposition section of your EMPOWER manual If this button has exclamation points on it then multi mode lines are active Thinning out slider Control the amount of thinning The default thinning out amount is 5
226. ed as a function of frequency according to the linear parameters 5 Revetse Isolation for Internally Created Intermods and Harmonics Once intermods and harmonics have been created and rolled off with frequency using the linear parameters S21 these intermods and harmonics will appear at the amplifier input after being processed by the linear parameters in the reverse direction 12 and will continue to propagate backwards through the system 6 Revetse Isolation fot Reverse Traveling Signals Reverse isolation will be applied to all reverse traveling signals by applying the linear parameters in the reverse direction 12 that encounter the amplifier output before the input 7 Add Noise Noise is added to the device based on the noise parameters contained in the linear parameters Channel Channelized Measurements and Measurement Bandwidth Over 30 different types of measurements are available for SPECTRASYS Many of these measurements integrate spectrum power A frequency and bandwidth are required in order for SPECTRASYS to know where to integrate the spectrums The Channel Frequency specifies the center integration frequency and the Measurement Channel Bandwidth specifies the range of frequencies to integrate over For example if a power amplifier was designed for a 5 MHz catrier operation in the 2 GHz band then you must set the Measurement Channel Bandwidth to 5 MHz Ifa catrier is injected into the input of the amplifi
227. eferences 359 General Lic 257 General LAayets esent 242 Generalized 325 326 Generalized scattering sss 317 Generalized S Parametets 286 341 Generate Viewer Data 276 303 315 317 319 339 Generated Third Order Intermod Power 235 Index GETINDEPVALUE 145 150 GEIVAEUE iiec 145 150 GETVALUEAT 145 150 GIM BP iaa manae edited 235 GlOSsaty A eed 87 Graphs Greater That Jie centre ete eene Green s function ssssssseeseeneterrees 326 Grid iiie 261 274 297 329 Grid Green s Function esses 331 Grid mapping inae 340 Ground Plane eee 1 281 297 Gt35 CU nitet e E e EE 37 GUI Circles uri Ranas 179 CU at as 37 3U2 Citclesc ne de 179 H H Parameters ete eee tees 179 HARBEC 5 43 53 176 HARBEC Options see 44 53 54 HARBEC Popup Menu eee 51 HARBEC Convergence Issues 453 HARBEC Measurements i DD HARBEC Optimization eee 54 Harmonic Balance ss 43 53 54 Harmonic Balance Walkthrough 5 HB dfRelRec HB dxAbs2a UAI EURO HE 44 HB dxRel uere rote Pie HB NonBinaryFFT es HB Oversainpll ic ensina Highest accurate frequency s 264 Homogeneous eee 321 322 325 Hybrid Linear Nonlinear Model 101 Hyperbolic ica i
228. either side of the reference channel are listed in the Measurement Wizard However there is no restriction on the Adjacent Channel Number other than it must be non negative and greater than or equal to 1 See the Channel Power measurement to determine which types of signals are included ot ignoted in this measurement This measurement is simply a Channel Power measurement at the Adjacent Channel Frequency Values Real value in Watts Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type DBM ACPU2 2nd upper adjacent channel power in dBm MAG ACPU2 magnitude of the 2nd upper adjacent channel power in Watts Examples 207 Simulation Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield DBM ACPU2 DBM ACPU DBM ACPU2 MAG ACPU2 MAG ACPU2 MAG ACPU2 Not available on Smith Chart Adjacent Channel Frequency ACF U or L n This measurement is the frequency of the specified adjacent channel All adjacent channel frequencies ate relative to the main Channel Frequency Consequently channels exist above and below the main reference channel frequency The user can specify which side of the main or reference channel that the adjacent channel is located on and also the channel number The channel number is relative to the main or reference channel Therefore channel 1 would be the
229. ements Each of these choices are looked at in detail below The values are approximate and may vary by 2 Raising Max Critical Freq Fixing Symmetry x1 puc to x1 16 x1 metio eM to x1 16 Turning Off ERI 6 Thinning Out Increasing Wall amp Cover Spacing Choosing Correct Cover AE Viewer x1 2 e x10 Data Corecting Slot x1 64 x1 256 Type Structure Using Preferred Box Cell Count Cells should be small enough so that the result is accurate at least 10 cells per wavelength at the maximum ctitical frequency see below Additionally the cells should be small enough that there is at least one and preferably more cell across every line and gap Decreasing the cell size makes all stages of the solution take longer so decreasing cell size can be an expensive way to get more accuracy Conversely increasing cell size is a great 273 Simulation 274 way to do an initial run of your problem to make sure that the result is close before you start a simulation that will take hours See the EMPOWER Basics section for more information on cells and the problem geometty This parameter is set in the EMPOWER dialog box when starting a simulation Changing this parameter has three and only three effects 1 The maximum amount of thinning out is affected EMPOWER will thin out until an area is 1 20th of a wavelength at this frequency in the default thinning mode 2 Thelength of line analyzed for deembedding is 1 2 wavele
230. en stored as S parameter data files for use later in other circuit files The S parameter data file written by GENESYS has one line of data for each simulation frequency If there are two ot more available simulations or designs in the circuit file GENESYS displays a dialog box to allow you to select the simulation or design to use Some of the data files provided with GENESYS also include noise data used for noise figure analysis This data includes the optimum noise figure NFopt the complex source impedance to present to the device to achieve the optimum noise figure Gopt and the effective noise resistance Rn Device Data The best noise figure in a circuit is achieved when the device is presented with an optimum source impedance The optimum input network to achieve this objective does not in general result in an excellent return loss match Balanced amplifiers and isolators are sometimes used to achieve both the optimum noise figure and a good match Losses in the input network feedback networks around the transistor emitter feedback and multiple stages all effect the noise figure of the circuit All of these effects are accutately simulated in GENESYS using the noise correlation matrix technique 5 6 Noise parameters can be added to the two port data files after the S Y G H or Z parameters See the section Creating New Data Files fot information about entering S Y G H or Z parameters Each line of a noise parameter has the
231. ending path node 2 Enter the name Forward Note You can also click Add Primary Paths to automatically add all paths Click OK Right click on the Outputs tab in the workspace window Select Add Rectangular Graph Enter the name Level diagram Click Measurement wizatd to add a new measutement Select Simulation System1 Sch1 Path Forward and press Next OF gy UOY 4e Es Choose measurement CGAIN Cascaded Gain and press Finish Press OK You will see a level diagram similar to the one shown below This diagram shows the total cascaded gain through the system at each node Walkthrough SPECTRASYS Level Diagram Workspace test DIR s ni x 0 14 2 3 4 z 5 a S g 8F a Plot area 7 8 9 10 1 5 7 4 2 lik A AA Node e DB CGAIN Note The walkthrough at this point is saved in Examples SPECTRASYS Walkthrough 3 Level Diagram WSP System Simulation Parameters Tuning Parameters Like the rest of the GENESYS environment SPECTRASYS features real time tuning In addition to the tuning of element values all parameters in the system simulation dialog box can be tuned 1 Double click System1 in the workspace window to open the system simulation 2 Click the Edit button at the end of the row where the CW source is located 23 Simulation System Simulation Parameters General Paths Calculate Composite Spectrum O
232. enna Theory and Technology ATT 94 Moscow Russia 23 25 August 1994 p 26 30 V Yu Kustov B V Sestroretzkiy Yu O Shlepnev TAMIC package for 3D electromagnetic analysis amp design of MICs Proc of the 5th Intern Symp on Recent Advances in Microwave Technology ISRAMT 95 Kiev Ukraine September 11 16 1995 p 228 233 Yu O Shlepnev B V Sestroretzkiy V Yu Kustov A new method of electromagnetic modeling of atbitrary transmission lines Proc of the 3rd Int Conference Antennas Radiocommunication Systems and Means ICARSM 97 Voronezh 1997 p 178 186 Yu O Shlepnev B V Sestroretzkiy V Yu Kustov A new approach to modeling atbitrary transmission lines Journal of Communications Technology and Electronics v 42 1997 N 1 p 13 16 originally published in Radiotekhnika i Elektronika v 42 1997 N 1 p 13 16 Yu O Shlepnev A new generalized de embedding method for numerical electromagnetic analysis Proceedings of the 14th Annual Review of Progress in Applied Computational Electromagnetics Monterey CA March 16 20 1998 v IL p 664 671 Yu O Shlepnev Extension of the method of lines for planar 3D structures Proceedings of the 15th Annual Review of Progress in Applied Computational Electromagnetics Monterey CA 1999 p 116 121 E G Farr C H Chan R Mittra IEEE Trans v MTT 34 1986 N 2 p 307 G Gronau I Wolff A simple broad band device de embedding method using
233. ense since they are totally dependent on the which direction from which we look into the node Path 1 2 Path 3 2 Transmitted Energy Transmitted energy is only the energy flowing in the forward direction For example lets suppose that we have a fixed attenuator of 3 dB in series with a bandpass filter that has 50 dB of rejection at 1 GHz which is outside the passband of the filter Now lets suppose that we are going to look at the power level of this out of band 1 GHz signal along the path from the attenuator input to the output of the bandpass filter Intuitively we would expect to see 3 dB of attenuation of the 1 GHz signal across the 3 dB pad and then and additional 50 dB of rejection across the filter Howevet when 119 Simulation 120 we closely examine the impedances and powet levels at each node we see things in a slightly different light 1 The input impedance of the 3 dB pad will not be exactly 50 ohms since its load impedance is the input impedance of the bandpass filter at the input frequency of 1 GHz which can be very low or very high Consequently if the applied power level is 0 dBm then the actual power level that will be transmitted through the attenuator node 1 power will be lower than the applied power 2 Since the input impedance of the bandpass filter at the out of band frequency of 1 GHz can be vety high or low there will be very little power at the input of this filter for this particular frequency tha
234. ent so the viaholes should be small in comparison with a wavelength Also you cannot have both a port and metal along the same grid line so you should be extremely cateful when placing a viahole directly underneath an internal port You should check the listing file select Show Listing File from the EMPOWER simulation right click menu carcfully to see that both the port and the viahole are represented on the grid The physical length of a viahole in a substrate should be kept shorter than about 1 10 to 1 20 wavelength within the analysis range Longer lengths can suffer calculation inaccuracies in EMPOWER For example suppose a microstrip circuit with a 10 mil substrate and a dielectric constant of 2 4 is to be used What is the highest accurate frequency for this setup Note If the substrate layer is broken down into two substrate layers by adding an additional layer each 1 2 the height of the original then the viaholes will be accurate at twice the original frequency This procedure can be repeated as necessary y 2 8542x1077 5 i 12566x 10 3 1 1 c 1 085x10 Y f Eglt 42 489 4 10 mis 254x10 5 m 21 331x10 2 m c 1935x10 e 50 GHz fus A 381x107 m EMPOWER Basics EM Ports All circuits must contain at least one EMPort to allow data to be taken from the EMPOWER simulation The number of ports is equal to the number of ports in the EMPOWER network to be analyzed They ate p
235. ent Bandwidth is used As a result the total noise power will increase proportionally with the bandwidth Number of Noise Points There are several parameters used by SPECTRASYS to determine the number of points needed to represent the noise All noise measurements are integrated measurements whose accuracy is totally dependent on representing the noise with enough points So how does one determine how many noise points are needed Ata first glance the easy solution to this problem is to allow the user to specify the total number noise points and then make the assumption that all noise points are uniformly distributed This solution doesn t work very well for high frequency simulations that may have natrow bandwidths at a particular frequency like an intermediate frequency IF Obviously in order to represent the noise cotrectly in the narrow bandwidth enough noise points need to be added to eliminate integration errors On the other hand adding too many noise points will slow down the simulation The solution to the noise point problem is to insert noise points using three techniques 1 Specify the total number of points to be uniformly distributed across the entire noise bandwidth SPECTRASYS System 2 SPECTRASYS automatically knows which frequencies in the noise spectrum need more points It will automatically insert them into the noise spectrum so that the noise spectrum around signal sources will be accurately represented even t
236. ent sources during the search for a solution Normally set to 100 it can be set smaller to improve the speed of convergence for some circuits Minimum Amplitude Step The smallest amount the simulator will step increase the amplitude of the independent sources before the simulator tries another approach or terminates Frequency Resolution The minimum difference in frequencies before the simulator will merge frequency terms If the difference between two calculated frequencies usually mixed frequency terms is less than the frequency resolution they will be considered a single frequency term for simulation Maximum Number of Jacobian Reuse The largest number of times that a Jacobian matrix will be used before another Jacobian is calculated Notice that since HARBEC uses numeric techniques to calculate the Jacobian it can be reused many more times than with other harmonic balance implementations Full Jacobian Controls whether a full Jacobian or Fast Newton seatch step is taken during convergence Select automatic never or always Use Previous Solution As Starting Point Usually checked this option will start the convergence ptocess using the previous set of node voltages If the parameters changed ot swept are relatively small starting with the previous solution can dramatically speed convergence If the parameters changed ate large is sometimes better to start from scratch Certain circuits will always converge faster from scra
237. ent to using an impedance of WSP Simulations EM1 EMPOWER R1 WSP Simulations EM1 EMPOWER R2 See the examples manual an example of the use of generalized S Parametets 287 EMPOWER Decomposition In EMPOWER it is possible to break down large circuits into smaller segments which are connected by transmission line sections Decomposition can be tedious to implement but its rewatd is that simulations can be performed accurately in much less time and with fewer frequency points The principal benefits of decomposition are Ability to tune single or coupled transmission line sections inside a circuit which was simulated by EMPOWER For example you can change the size of a meander line or adjust the tap point on an interdigital filter without rerunning the EMPOWER simulation Most circuits require far fewer frequency points for accurate analysis This is due to the fact that quarter wave resonant lines are broken down into much smaller lines that do not resonate and interpolation is possible For example a 7th order interdigital filter can often be simulated with just 5 frequency points in the EMPOWER run while 100 points are displayed in the output sweep Ability to simulate problems too large to otherwise run The main disadvantages of decomposition are Tedious to setup circuit The simulation requires multiple EMPOWER runs combined with a schematic Box modes and other phenomena related to the entire problem are not modelled
238. ents ate complex functions of frequency The frequency range and intervals ate as specified in the Linear Simulation dialog box The voltage gain Ei is the ratio of the output voltage Vj to the input voltage Vj E Vi Vi Note that due to reflections the gain Ei may not be unity Values Complex mattix versus frequency Simulations Linear 189 Simulation Default Format Table DBANG Graph dB Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type gain from port 1 to port 2 DBANG E21 db and angle in range of 180 to 180 for gain from port 2 to 1 Other Operators MAG ANG ANG360 RE IM MAGANG360 Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield EI2 pbi DBANGIEU2 E Shows db angle for all Ej Not available on Smith Chart Noise Measure NMEAS The Noise Measure measurement is a real function of frequency and is available for 2 port networks only The noise measure is defined in terms of the noise figure NF and maximum available gain GMAX as NMEAS NF 1 1 1 GMAX The noise measute represents the noise figure for an infinite number of networks in cascade Values Real value versus frequency Simulations Linear Default Format Table MAG Graph MAG Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type DB NMEAS noise measure in dB MAG NMEAS mag
239. equations reference MIN expression Finds the minimum value of a post processed expression MAX expression Finds the maximum value of a post processed expression PLOTPOINTS expression Plots 2D input data points on a Smith Chart without connecting the dots Useful for seeing what data points have defined measurement values in a load pull file REAL expression returns the real part of a complex number Alternate form RE expression RND returns a pseudo random number between zero and one SIN expression sine of the argument SINH expression hyperbolic sine SQR expression square root TAN expression tangent Range Argument must not be 90 3 90 etc TANH expression hyperbolic tangent Range Same as TAN expression VALUEAT expression real imag smoothParm Returns the value of the thin plate spline generated from 2D data in expression at a given coordinate real imag The smoothParm parameter is optional see function CONTOUR VECTOR expression returns a vector array of size expression See Arrays later in the equations reference 147 Simulation Constants Strings Name Value PI p 3 14159265 _EPSO 8 854e 12 _ETAO 376 7343 _MUO 1 256637e 6 _VAIR c 2 997925e8 LN2 In 2 0 6931471805599 _EXP1 e 2 718281828459 _RTOD Radians to degrees multiplier 180 pi _DTOR Degtees to radians multiplier pi 180 String variables can be used in the Equation Window A
240. equency The frequency range and intervals are as specified in the Linear Simulation dialog box The s parameters assume a 50 ohm reference impedance unless otherwise specified The s parameters for an n port network are of the form Sj forijequall 2 n Details on the S parameters and their application are found in Section x x of this Manual Values Complex mattix versus frequency Simulations Linear EMPOWER Default Format Table dB angle Graph dB Smith Chart dB angle Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type ANGJS11 Angle in range 180 to 180 degrees GD S22 Group Delay Other Operators DB J MAGI RECT ANG360 RE IM MAGANGT MAGANG360 DBANG Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield 22 dB Magnitude of S22 dB Magnitude plus angle of 22 QL S21 Loaded Q of S21 Loaded Q of S21 MAG S21 Linear Magnitude of S21 Linear Magnitude of S21 S Shows dB Magnitude plus angle of all S Parameters RECTIS Shows real imaginary parts of all S Parameters GD S21 Group delay of S21 Group delay of S21 Note For port numbers greater that 9 a comma is used to separate port numbers For example on a 12 port device some of the S Parameters would be specified as follows S1 11 512 2 812 11 8122 185 Simulation H Parameters This H parameter or hybrid parameter measurements ate complex functions of frequency The freque
241. er Intercept OIP3 This measurement is the third order intercept point referenced to the output along the specified path as shown by OIP3 n Virtual Tone Power n Delta n 2 dBm where n stage number Virtual Tone Power n TCP 0 CGAINIM3 n Delta n Virtual Tone Powet n TIM3P n Delta is the difference in dB between the Total Third Order Intermod Power in the main channel and the interfering signal present in the Tone Channel The intercept point is equivalent to 1 2 Delta added to the interfering tone power level Cascaded intermod equations ate not used in SPECTRASYS In order to correctly calculate OIP3 due to out of band interferers a Virtual Tone is created whose virtual power is that of an un attenuated in band tone This power level is simply the Tone Channel Powet at the input plus the Cascaded Third Order Intermod Gain at the current stage This Virtual Tone Power is different than the Tone Channel Powet measurement because the Virtual Tone Power is not attenuated by out of band rejection whereas the Tone Channel Power is For in band interferers the Virtual Tone Power and the Tone Channel Power measurement will be identical In order to make this measurement a minimum of three signals tones must actually be present at the input port 1 main channel signal 2 first interfering signal tone and 3 233 Simulation second interfering signal tone Furthermore the spacing of the tw
242. er and DCP is the Desired Channel Power Cascade Gain is therefore a function of all forward traveling power in the channel which is subject to VSWR effects Verify that Gain and Cascaded Gain are as expected Another issue usually is that the Channel Measurement Bandwidth is much wider than the channel signals This is ok but extra noise points may need to be added to improve the accuracy of the Channel Noise Power measurement SPECTRASYS interpolates between all noise and signal data points If there is a lot of amplitude ripple in the circuit sufficient noise points must be added for each signal to properly account for these variations If the noise spectrum looks vety stick figure ish then extra noise points may need to be added 133 Simulation 134 If cascaded noise figure is being examined through a hybrid combining network the cascaded noise figure will appear to artificially peak at the internal nodes to the hybrid network This occurs because cascaded gain used is only for the current path and not all parallel paths used in the hybrid network Adding extra noise points can be done on the Calculate tab of the System Analysis dialog box SPECTRASYS Cascaded Noise Figure NF CNF Negative Why don t I get the same answer as my spreadsheets SPECTRASYS accounts for VSWR between stages sneak paths reverse isolation frequency response channel bandwidth gain compression broadband noise and image noise Spreadsheets do
243. er at 1990 MHz then all measurements along the path will integrate their spectrums from 1987 5 to 1992 5 MHz i e 1990 2 5 MHz See System Simulation Dialog box General Tab Channel Path Frequency Since each spectrum can contain a large number of spectral components and frequencies SPECTRASYS must be able to determine the area of the spectrum over which to integrate to determine power levels A Channel Frequency and a Measurement Bandwidth define this integration area SPECTRASYS can automatically identify the desired Channel Frequency in an unambiguous case where only one frequency is on the from node An error will appear if more than one frequency is available In this case the user must specify the intended frequency for the designated path A unique Channel Frequency exists for cach node along the specified path Consequently each node along the path will have the same Channel Frequency until a SPECTRASYS System frequency translation element such as a mixer is encountered SPECTRASYS automatically deals with frequency translation through a mixer The individual mixer parameters of Desired Output Sum or Difference and LO Injection High of Low are used to determine the desired frequency at the output of the mixer A mixer is the only device that causes a frequency translation of the center frequency For the following schematic the channel frequency CF is shown in the table Notice that CF
244. ere is that if there are loops in the system schematic then it is very important to make sure that the element parameters are entered correctly so that signals don t grow in amplitude as they traverse around a loop The simulation will only be as good as those parameters in the model If the user is suspicious that the simulation is taking extra time then isolation parameters of the components that make up that loop can be increased to large values to see if that is the cause The user can then start decreasing the isolation of the interested components until the desired response is achieved Maximum Number of Spectrums to Generate As a last resort you can limit the number of spectrums that will be generated The number of spectrums generated at any time is shown in the simulation status window while SPECTRASYS is running A typical number to force a limit to is 100000 See the Options Tab for more information Ignore Spectrum As mentioned previously SPECTRASYS will continue to process new spectrums until no additional spectrums have been calculated However in the case where a loop exists spectrums will continue to be created around the loop until the Ignore Spectrum Below threshold is reached at which time spectrums ate not calculated below this threshold The higher this threshold the fewer the number of calculated spectrums In order to minimize the simulation time the user should set this threshold to calculate the least number of spectru
245. erfering tone Furthermore this will also be the spacing between the two tones This spacing guarantees that the two interfering tones will create intermods in the channel manual If many interfering tones ate used in an analysis then the user has the freedom to choose which interfering signal will be used for intercept calculations All intercept calculations will be based on the signals located at this offset This offset is used to determine the Tone Channel Frequency that is used to determine the Tone Channel Power 93 Simulation 94 Input Port automatic only This is the port number where the two interfering tones will be created Gain Test Power Level automatic only This is the powet level of a signal that will be created within the channel to determine the gain of the main channel This particular power level is not that critical However this level should be low enough so that there is no question that the nonlinear devices such as the amplifiers and mixers are operating in the linear range This in channel gain is needed to determine the correct input third order intercept point 2 Tone Power Level automatic only This is the actual power level of both interfering tones Remember that the power level of these tones can drive the non linear devices into compression System Simulation Parameters Composite Spectrum Tab This page controls calculation of Composite Spectrum Components and Spectrum analyzer
246. ermore all signals are either marked desired or undesired A good example of this is a mixer where the user will selected either the sum or difference output to be the desired signal and everything else will be undesited None Undesired Signal If there is no D displayed then the signal is an undesired signal Frequency Equation From the frequency equation the user can identify which source frequencies created the spectrum This equation is written like a typical mathematical equation The long form of the equation will contain the actual name of the source whereas the short form uses a short hand notation to indicate the source The short hand notation is S for source plus the index number of the source For example S1 would mean the first source listed in the Sources Table of the System Analysis dialog box S2 the second and so on regardless of the actual name of the soutce Frequency Equation Examples Short Form S1 2xS2 Sourcel first source in the source table 2nd Harmonic of Soutce2 second soutce in the source table 125 Simulation 126 S1 52 83 Soutcel first source Source2 second source Source3 third source S2 3x 2x53 Source2 second source 3rd Harmonic of a 2nd Harmonic of Source3 third source Sometimes the frequency of the equation may be negative In this case the user should simply use the absolute value of this frequency Path The path of the spectral component can b
247. errors are inevitable This could cause a problem if you are using equality checks If this 1s the case change IF value 5 THEN GOTO LABEL to IF ABS value 5 0 00001 THEN GOTO LABEL or something similar If you are using relational operators such as greater than gt or less than lt this point does not need to be considered This statement is used to define functions Functions take zero ot more parametets as input and return exactly one value as output All variables used within a function are local that is variables cannot be shared across functions or with the main block See User Functions for detailed information on this statement The format of a FUNCTION statement is FUNCTION name patm1 parm2 equations RETURN expression An example function to calculate the inductance that resonates with a capacitor at a given frequency FUNCTION RESL C F L is in nH C is in pF F is in MHz FHz 1e6 F CFatads 1e 12 C Omega 2 PI FHz LHenries 1 Omega Omega CFarads Return LHenries 1e9 This statement returns a value from a function and exits the function Note that this statement does not mark the end the function declaration and a function with IF THEN 143 Simulation BASE statements can have mote than one RETURN statement The format of the return statement is RETURN expression This statement defines the beginning index of arrays The default base is 1 meaning that the first data point in an arr
248. ers Note Since the bottom of the box will be used as a ground plane the bottom metal layer defined above may not necessary be necessary However since it is often necessaty for manufacturing reasons it is normally defined here EMPOWER Layers The EMPOWER layers for this example are shown below The EMPOWER layers ate automatically selected from the available general layers see the previous section They are chosen from the available metal and substrate layers and can be enabled or disabled for EMPOWER simulation 243 Simulation 244 LAYOUT Properties x General Associations General Layer EMPOWER Layers Fonts TOP METAL 3 Ai SUBSTRATE 4 Y Physical 14 lm Physical Physical w Tand 15 Tand Sigma 1 0 055 ld Jes 0 0009 1 BOT METAL 5 E Physical 14 LAYOUT Properties x General Associations General Layer EMPOWER Layers Fonts RAM EAS Slow ed m i z Down Since Air layers above and below a substrate are so common a special option has been given here to add them For more information on the individual layer options see the EMPOWER Basics section Notice that BOT METAL and Air Below are not enabled This places the box bottom at the lower substrate boundaty so that it acts as a ground plane Note In almost all cases where a completely solid ground plane is used you should use the top or bottom cover
249. erstanding the operation of EMPOWER These files contain the topology of the circuit external port line data generalized S Parameter normalizing impedances output information S Parameter data batch commands Y Parameter data viewer data and backup data Where are these files Starting with Version 7 0 GENESYS uses OLE Structured Storage for its workspace files These files are sometimes called file systems in a file Structured Storage files contain internal directories and files and copying one workspace file copies all internal files contained in it The figure below shows the structure of a typical workspace file Notice that within each simulation all filenames begin with EMPOWER E 1 CABSCouplerFinalRecomp wsp E Notes Yield Designs Outputs ObDataFiles E GENESYS ID EB Substrates Simulations E Data EJEMPOWER Y EJEMPOWER rl EJEMPOWER r2 EJEMPOWER r3 EJEMPOWER r SJ5EMPOWER SS EJEMPOWER LST SJ5EMPOWER RGF EJEMPOWER TPL CIEM2 CIEM3 CaLinearl Optimizations E Global Equations Note Previous versions of GENESYS used actual disk files for all internal EMPOWER files and separate subdirectories were recommended for each circuit This is no longer necessary for typical usage If you need to access these internal files in a workspace you have two options e Right click on the EMPOWER simulation on the tree and select Write Internal Data Files This automatically creates a directory with the sa
250. es Sources A NN SIS AAA die A A Ad 132 Troubleshooting td 133 How come my noise figure decreases through a Cascade sss 133 Why don t I get the same answer as my spreadsheets see 134 Systenioim lation Tips zo decine rette e a ima e et e e eei 135 Parameter Sweep ansa a A ODIO HO ORI Peta mA orc He 139 Parameter Sweep Propertie ias 139 NUCA A A AA A gt te od dea ud 141 veve Vatiable Values a aa 144 ODetdtOfS ste stt tii Sample Expressions Builtin P nctions i o e ae aid CONSTANTS ete id da A RERO daa MES Aftays Vectors and Mattices mesitas hit 148 Post PROCESSING iis aea e IRIURE ERI HERES Equation Wizard 1s oeaaunsosaetumuniu eum Graphing an Equation Equations in the Equations Section iet entere tette tette eu thiet de to febris ines Logical Operators se ot eret te a als User PUCHA Calling Your FORTRAN C C DLLs Equations Overview di Table Of Contents vi Linear vs Nonlineat Device Models i eene tnter ne 157 Linear Data OVER Using a Data File in GENESYS Link To Data File as aee et eter iaa Link to Data File Setup sais eere ee dotan aaa Provided Device Data t a dat edam tete mit cetetia tenian tetas Creating New Linear Data Files 5e eh inen ai File Record Keeping tice Aca end Ae Ama i Exporting Data Tiles ete Rep tasa Noise Data in Data Files Nonltmeatr Device Lib tary e ed nete ettet hs quee eese A ea
251. es that the amplitude of all input signals is the same The frequency combinations of the cartier triple beats are as follows F1 F2 F3 F1 F2 F3 F1 F2 F3 F1 F2 F3 3rd Harmonics The amplitude of the third harmonics are 9 542 dB below the 3rd order 2 tone products Higher Orders Some models in SPECTRASYS crate higher than 2nd amp 3rd order products The intermod levels and frequencies are calculated based on a complicated mathematical process This process description is beyond the scope of this text Please see other resources Measurements SPECTRASYS creates intermods for all input sources driving nonlinear elements such as amplifiers and mixers Cascaded intermod equations are NOT used by SPECTRASYS There are two serious drawbacks using the cascaded equations See the section Cascaded Intermod Equations for additional information Also see the Calculate Intermods Along Path section Linear elements will not create intermods However these elements will conduct them from prior stages where they were created The Total Third Order Intermod Power TIM3P can be separated into two distinct groups of intermods The first group is Generated intermods and the second is Conducted intermods from a prior stage SPECTRASYS is able to separate intermods into these two groups This allows the user to quickly determine the weak intermod link in a cascade of stages This total is the non coherent sum of the generated and
252. esired model and click OK d Choose a schematic symbol and click OK on the Choose Symbol to Place dialog box If you have used the Eaglewate DEVICE CLASS extension this symbol will be chosen automatically e Place the part on the schematic GENESYS supplies Verilog A soutce code for most of the built in nonlinear models This allows you to create models identical to the GENESYS built in nonlinear models and then customize these as you see fit Note You cannot change the built in models Instead you must create a new model and must use this new model in your schematic The source code is in the Examples VVerilogA directory normally installed to C Program Files GENESYS 2003 10N Examples NVerilogA To use these files you should copy them to a new directory as described in step 1 of Creating New Verilog A Models above The example modules have va added to the end of the name to keep them from conflicting with the built in models All modules in GENESYS must have unique names so it is recommended that you change the module name anytime you create a new Verilog A file If you only copy the file but don t rename the module you will get errors due to duplicate GENESYS models or Verilog A modules After you have copied the Verilog A source file you should follow the steps in Creating New Verilog A Models above Note As of the first release of GENESYS 2003 10 not all of the Verilog A source was teady for distribu
253. ess a wizard button to guide you through x the process of creating a measurement o Equation Wizard XEM Help 12 The graph should look as follows if we place a marker at V 2 368 volts the graphs will be labeled with approptiate values of base cutrent IDC WU DC Curves Workspace HB Walkthru Pie x 1e 3 750e 6 MA G lic 500e 6 250e 6 e MAG Iic BIASING THE TRANSISTOR Walkthrough DC Linear HARBEC For this example we chose to use a collector voltage of 2 5 volts and an Ic of 10mA Copy the original schematic DC curves and paste it into another schematic named DC Bias From the curves above the base current is about 0 010 ma for these conditions Modify the schematic to look as follows Set the initial resistance to 300 ohms and make them both tunable by checking the Tune box in the part propetties fot each resistor Wl DC Bias Workspace HB Walkthru Iof x R2 R 300 C c c c c m IDC 500e 6 A nz The supply voltage V should now be fixed to 5V This can be done by removing the in front of the variable specified in the equation block and changing the voltage from 1 to 5 Create an optimization using the New button and find Add Optimization Set the values as follows Your collector node number may be different than this example If it is different then change it accordingly i e if your collector node number is 2 then the measurement should
254. ettical blocks in the case of two plane symmetry and it is treated in the way similat to described in Weeks 1979 This reduces required CPU memory from 4 to 16 times setial allocation of partial matrices and speeds up calculations from 4 to 16 times One plane two plane and 180 rotational symmetries are included in the program Thereafter the classic Gauss inversion algorithm is used with a few changes The result of this stage of solution is a matrix Y or Z matrix relating the grid currents and voltages in the input source regions and thus we need to get only a small part of the inverted matrix cotresponding to these variables A partial inversion procedure performs it and gives an additional acceleration The method of simultaneous diagonalization MoSD Shlepnev 1990 1998 is used to extract a multimode or generalized S matrix The MoSD is based on the electromagnetic analysis of two line segments corresponding to an MIC structure port to be de embedded The segments have different lengths and the same surface current source regions as in the initial structure The result of the EM analysis is two Y mattices relating integral grid cutrents and voltages in the source regions These matrices transformed from the space of the grid functions to a space of the line eigenmodes are set equal to Y matrices desctibing independent modes propagated in continuous part of the line segments It gives the basic non linear system of equations relat
255. example linear simulation would normally not include EMPOWER Operation ground pours power supply rails and lumped element pads However these are included in the EMPOWER run allowing inspection of their effects The complete file from this example is LayoutOnly WSP This example demonstrates the following topics e Creating a layout without a schematic e Choosing grid spacings e Choosing the box size A microstrip stub notch filter with a transmission zero at 9 5 GHz is to be simulated The filter has the following specifications e 15 mil RT Duroid substrate er 2 2 tan d 0 0009 e Copper metalization e 50W terminations e The stub line should be 70 W and 90 at 9 5 GHz The series lines and the stub dimensions were calculated using T LINE and were rounded to the nearest 5 mil increment The final line dimensions are shown below E 2 Input Line E E Output Line 2 iB p 200 mils al d 200 mils 4 2 miz E un 2 Been 25 mils Note Before beginning this example you should be sure your Workspace Window is visible Select Workspace Window from the View menu if necessary To begin select New from the GENESYS File menu Since we do not need a schematic fot this circuit we will delete the schematic In the wotkspace window Right click on Sch1 Schematic and Select Delete This Design Next we will create a layout Right 241 Simulation click on
256. expression This allows you to get the value of an expression at a particular data point index This function is most useful in combination with the COUNT function for looping over values Most users should not use this function preferring the GETVALUEAT function instead Note that this function causes immediate calculation of the value and the value it returns is not swept it is the actual value of a particular data point real or imaginary Advanced note If the independent data is multi dimensional then index can contain an array specifying the index for each dimension GETVALUEAT expression indep calculates and returns a value of a post processed expression at a given independent value For example this allows you to get the value of an expression at a particular frequency such as Q GETVALUEAT QL S21 1e9 which gets the loaded Q of S21 at 1 GHz If no data has been calculated at 1 GHz the data will be interpolated or extrapolated as needed While this function is somewhat slower than GETVALUE it is much easier to use because you do not have to know the index of the point you want Note that this function causes immediate calculation of the value and the value it returns is not swept it is the actual value of a particular data point real or imaginary Advanced note This function only works on 2 dimensional data X vs Y Note If the independent data is frequency GETVALUEAT requires values in Hz not MHz The equation
257. f Ports B Filename Specifies the file containing the Device Data to load Browse Opens a File Open Dialog box so that you can locate the desired data file Number of ports Specifies the number of ports the data file has Provided Device Data GENESYS includes over 25 000 data files for many different device types Device data was ptovided directly by the manufacturers in electronic format Caution Eaglewate could not test every file that was provided Through random sampling we edited errors found in some files It is the user s responsibility to test each file for accuracy Creating New Linear Data Files 158 You may easily add other devices to the library by using a text editor such as NOTEPAD to type the data into a file with the name of yout choice Be sure to save the file in standard ASCII format The first line in the file after any initial comments is a format specifier in the form H units type format R impedance where Device Data units is either Hz kHz MHz or GHz type is the type of the data file either S Y G H or Z format is DB for dB angle data MA for linear magnitude angle data or RI for real imaginary data impedance is the reference impedance in ohms commonly 50 or 75 One of the most common format specifiets is MHZ S MAR 50 This indicates that the data is in S parameter form normalized to 50 ohms The data is given in linear polar format magnitude amp angle The freq
258. f several planes Many circuits will exhibit some form of symmetry if they are centered in the page area To center the example filter 1 Choose Select All from the Edit menu 2 Choose Center Selected On Page from the Layout menu Before running EMPOWER the filter s ports must be designated Select the EMPort button on the LAYOUT toolbar and click on the center left end of the series line The EM Port Properties dialog appears Set the drawing size to 25 This controls how large the ports will be drawn on the LAYOUT screen Note that the default port number is 1 Select the OK button Next select the EMPort button on the toolbar again Click on the center right end of the series line The EM Port Properties dialog appears Again type 25 into the Draw Size box Note that the default port number is 2 Select the OK button The screen should now look like 247 Simulation E Layout Workspace WorkSpace 1 For simulation EMPOWER will take S Parameters from these ports To run EMPOWER you must create a simulation Right click on Simulations Data in the WorkspaceWindow and choose Add Planar 3D EM Analysis from the menu Accept EM1 as the analysis name This displays the EMPOWER Options dialog This dialog is shown below For a description of the dialog options see the section on External Ports For now just set the prompts as shown below 248 EMPOWER Operation EMPOWER Options
259. f the maximum available magnitude of the maximum available gain gain Not available on Smith Chart Available Gain amp Power Gain Circles GA GP An available gain input network circle is a locus of source impedances for a given gain below the optimum gain This locus is plotted on a Smith chart and is only available for 2 port networks The center of the circle is the point of maximum gain Circles are displayed for gains of 0 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 dB less than the optimal gain Similarly the power gain output network circle is a locus of load impedances for a given gain below the optimum gain If the stability factor K is less than unity then the 0 dB circle is at GMAX and the inside of this circle is shaded as an unstable region The available power gain G and power gain Gy are defined as 194 Measurements Linear Ga available from network power available from source Gp power deliver to load power input to network Note See the section on S Parameters for a detailed discussion of Gain Circles Values Complex values versus frequency Simulations Linear Default Format Table center MAG ANGJ radius Linear Graph None Smith Chart Circle Commonly Used Operators None Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield GA available gain circles center MAG ANGI radius Linear GP power gain circles center MAG ANGI radius Linear Av
260. first adjacent channel channel 2 would be the second adjacent channel and so on U Upper Side L Lower Side n Channel Number any integer gt 0 For example ACFU1 if the first adjacent channel above that specified by the Channel Frequency If CF was 100 MHz and the channel bandwidth was 1 MHz then the main channel would be 99 5 to 100 5 MHz Consequently then ACFU1 would then be the channel 100 5 to 101 5 MHz and ACFL1 would be 98 5 to 99 5 MHz NOTE Only the first 2 adjacent channels on either side of the reference channel is listed in the Measurement Wizard However there is no restriction on the Adjacent Channel Numbet Values Real value in MHz Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators None Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield ACFL1 ACFL1 Not available on Smith Chart Added Noise AN This measurement is the noise contribution of each individual stage in the main channel along the specified path as shown by AN n CNF n CNF n 1 dB where AN 0 0 dB n stage number 208 Measurements SPECTRASYS This measurement is simply the difference in the Cascaded Noise Figure measurement between the current node and the previous node This measurement is very useful and will help the user identify the contribution to the noise figure by each stage along the path
261. following five entries Frequency NF dB Mag Gamma Opt Ang Gamma Opt Rn Zo Frequency Frequency in units NF dB Minimum noise figure in dB Mag Gamma Opt Magnitude of the optimum source reflection coefficient for minimum noise figure Ang Gamma Opt Angle of the optimum source reflection coefficient for minimum noise figure Rn Zo Normalized effective noise resistance Here is an example of noise data in a file along with the device S parameters BFP620 Si NPN RF Transistor in SOT343 Vce 2 V Ic 8 mA Common Emitter S Parameters 01 February 2000 GHz S MA R 50 If S11 S21 S12 S22 GHz Mag Ang Mag Ang Mag Ang Mag Ang 0 010 0 8479 1 3 21 960 179 3 0 0024 27 9 0 9851 0 4 0 020 0 8424 1 9 21 606 178 2 0 0021 34 2 0 9676 1 5 0 050 0 8509 5 7 21 650 175 6 0 0047 66 0 0 9693 3 8 0 100 0 8391 10 7 21 434 171 7 0 0092 74 1 0 9662 7 7 0 150 0 8420 16 8 21 349 167 3 0 0138 74 1 0 9584 11 6 0 200 0 8312 21 8 21 109 163 1 0 0183 76 1 0 9477 15 4 161 Simulation 162 0 250 0 300 0 500 0 700 0 900 1 100 1 300 1 500 1 700 1 900 2 000 3 000 4 000 5 000 6 000 lf GHz 0 900 1 800 2 400 3 000 4 000 5 000 6 000 See reference 38 for more information on the relationship between noise figure and 0 8150 0 8049 0 7349 0 6653 0 5930 0 5403 101 2 12 427 0 4982 113 9 11 019 125 4 9 834 135 7 8 861 145 4 8 013 150 0 7 670 0 4710 0 4495 0 4312 0 4229 0 4130 0 4749 0 5311 0 5
262. fot all stages from the input to the first mixer would be 1700 MHz All noise and interference must be rejected at this frequency to maintain the sensitivity and performance of the receivet Values Real value in MHz Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators None Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table 221 Simulation optimization or yield IMGF IMGF IMGF Not available on Smith Chart Image Channel Noise Power IMGNP This measurement is the integrated noise power of the image channel from the path input to the first mixer After the first mixer the Mixer Image Channel Power measurement will show the same noise power and the main channel noise power This measurement is very useful in determining the amount of image noise rejection that the selected path provides Any energy at the image frequency can seriously degrade the performance of a receiver Even unfiltered noise at the image frequency will be converted into the IF band and degrade the sensitivity by as much as 3 dB The image frequency measurements are provided to help the designer understand the impact of the image frequency on the performance of the receiver Since SPECTRASYS knows the Channel Frequency of the specified path it also has the ability to figure out what the image frequency is up to the 1st mixer The Mixer Image Frequency measurement will show wh
263. from scratch right click on the electromagnetic simulation in the workspace window and select Delete all internal files Once EMPOWER calculation is completed GENESYS displays the calculated data The graphs below show GENESYS after EMPOWER simulation Double click the graph items in the workspace window to open them and select Tile Vertical from the Window menu to organize them y GENESYS V7 0 iol x Ele Edt View Workspace Actions Tools Synthesis Window Help osa Brejocje e ema a am a Designs ig F2000 Schema Layout Layout E 3 Simulations Data Sij EMT Layoutl Sij Linearl 1400 tc E1 amp Outputs EB Circuit Simulation EH Combined Simul is Equations E143 Substrates 2 Default Optimizations E 30 4 30 iel Yield 2000 2600 2000 2600 Notes Freq MHz Freq MHz e DB S21 DE S11 e DB S21 DBIS11 Lumped Elements The first example in this section required several data points to find the exact notch frequency This second example only used 4 data points and produces data very close to the SUPERSTAR simulation This is because the capacitors which load the coupled lines causing resonances at the center frequency were removed during the EMPOWER simulation This effectively removes the resonances from the simulation range producing a flat response from the
264. g a Bipolar Transistor place a bipolar symbol 2 Double click on the part 3 From the Schematic Element Properties Dialog box click the model button 4 From the Choose Model dialog box choose the file and model with the spice link Click OK and Click OK GENESYS is compatible with Berkeley SPICE3 Where possible GENESYS has also been made compatibile with PSpice The following devices can be used in a SPICE link B Arbitraty Soutce Note SPICE 2 uses B for MESFET s If you have a file using this convention you must change the B prefix to Z and change the model name from MESFET to NMF or PMF C Capacitor D Nonlinear Diode E F G H Controlled Sources I Current Source J Nonlinear JFET Only JFET JFET2 is not yet available K Mutual Inductance Only works in DC and HARBEC not linear simulation L Inductor M Nonlinear MOSFET As of GENESYS Version 7 5 release only level 1 MOS1 is available Q Nonlinear BJT R Resistor V Voltage Source X Subcircuit Z Nonlinear MESFET Transistors Model types NMF and PMF are available You must add a level parameter to the model to indicate which type of MESFET model will be used 1 Curtice Quadratic 2 Statz 3 TOM 4 Original SPICE 3F5 MESFET 5 TOM2 6 Curtice Cubic For parameter details see the corresponding element in the Element Catalog Link to Spice File For example a SPICE model for an XYZ143 device using a TOM N Channel model in it might look
265. ge Channel Powet measurement will show the same power and the main channel power Any energy at the image frequency can seriously degrade the performance of a receiver Even unfiltered noise at the image frequency will be converted into the IF band and degrade the sensitivity by as much as 3 dB The image frequency measurements ate provided to help the designer understand the impact of the image frequency on the performance of the receiver Measurements SPECTRASYS Since SPECTRASYS knows the Channel Frequency of the specified path it also has the ability to figure out what the image frequency is up to the 1st mixer The Mixer Image Frequency measurement will show what that frequency is This image frequency is used to determine the area of the spectrum that will be integrated by the this measurement to calculate the image power The Channel Measurement Bandwidth located in the System Simulation Dialog Box is used as the bandwidth for the this measurement For example if we designed a 2 GHz receiver that had an IF frequency of 150 MHz using low LO side injection then the LO frequency would be 1850 MHz and image frequency fot all stages from the input to the first mixer would be 1700 MHz If the receivet bandwidth was 5 MHz then the image channel would be from 1697 5 to 1702 5 MHz All noise and interference must be rejected in this channel to maintain the sensitivity and performance of the receiver This measurement is simply a Channel P
266. ge Units Default units For graphs tables new schematic elements and substrates Pam us Description FREG MHz Frequency RES ohm Resistance mho Conductance nH Inductance Capacitance Length Time ANG a Angle YOL v Voltage CUR A Current POWER dBm Power TEMP c Temperature y Note Netlists use the default GENESYS units and the units specified in the substrate Changing these parameters will only affect new objects existing schematics will not be modified OK Cancel Help 2 Next lets open the Microwave Filter module from the GENESYS tree to start the design process by selecting the New Item button and picking Synthesis Add Microwave Filter In the Create a new Microwave Filter dialog box change the Initialize using to Factory Default Values then select OK 345 Simulation Name MFiten Initialize using Cancel C Last Saved Values 3 Now the user will be prompted for the printed wiring board layer settings in the Select Layout Setting File dialog box Select Standatd ly and then OK Select Layout Settings File xi Your new layout will be based on lt Last Used Settings gt Directory Help c program files genesys 8 10 Template Note Y ou can create new layout settings by using the Layout Save Layout Settings menu item 4 It will ask you to specify a substrate For this example just cho
267. gy 119 Triplate Two port file U Undersampled eere itt 53 Unilateral 25 eee ii 179 Unilatetal Cases tetto tet Unilateral gain circles Unnormalized Y parameter data 158 Unstable region eeerere tnn nts Up to date ies cire Use Krylov Subspace Method Use Previous Solution As Starting Point 44 53 Use tHNNN Ossip p 275 User Functions ds 1 154 User Model Example 167 USING natal 150 Using Equation Results ssss 184 369 Simulation 370 Using Non Default Simulation Data 183 V MN ATIBRAS o ene n eH ERIS 148 Value Mode button ise 311 Vatiable Value iba dao 144 Variables 145 148 290 VECTOR innere mass 145 Medi ass 148 Vendor supplied models 1 Vialiole mencionadas 261 264 316 Viaholes 257 277 319 View Menu EEG LU View Variables ri isa 144 Viewet Videla Voltage naaa ici VSWR i MSWRE aire Write Internal Data Files 337 Y parameter data Y parametets Ai a t Tee Fmeg Z Zi Parameters tot v Nie die oM cet anes ens eet 179 Z directed 257 277 279 316 317 319 Z Ditected Ports sss 264 297 179
268. h chart Result on table optimization or yield DBM TNP DBM INP MAG INP MAG TNP Not available on Smith Chart 238 EMPOWER Operation An EMPOWER simulation requires a board layout description The easiest and recommended method is to use the LAYOUT program to create a graphical representation of the desired layout pattern The board can then be simulated by creating an EMPOWER Simulation This chapter describes how to use the LAYOUT program to construct a board layout and obtain an EMPOWER simulation GENESYS is then used to display and compare the linear simulation with the EMPOWER data EMPOWER incorporates many features still not present in competitive late generation EM simulators Principle features include Benchmarked accuracy Easy to use graphical circuit layout editor Complete integration with the GENESYS circuit simulation synthesis and layout tools Multilayer simulations with EMPOWER ML Automatic incorporation of lumped elements Automatic detection and solution with symmetry Generalized S parameter support Multi mode support for ports and lines Tuning of EM objects in GENESYS using decomposition Deembedded or non deembedded ports Viaholes including generated fields Any number of dielectric layers Dielectric and metal loss Includes box modes and package effects Slot mode for slot and coplanar circuits Thick metal simulation with EMPOWER ML 32 bit code for Windows 95 98 NT 239
269. he cascaded gain Real Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield DB CGAIN DB CGAIN DB CGAIN MAG CGAIN MAG CGAIN MAG CGAIN Not available on Smith Chart Cascaded Gain Third Order Intermod Analysis CGAINIM3 This measurement is the cascaded gain of the main channel during the IM3 analysis The Cascaded Third Order Intermod Gain is the difference between the Desired Third Order Intermod Channel Power at the nth stage and the Desired Third Order Intermod Channel Power at the input as shown by CGAINIM3 n DCPIM3 n DCPIM3 0 dB where n stage number NOTE This measurement is used by the IIP3 OIP3 and SFDR measurements The Calculate Intermods Along Path checkbox must be checked and properly configured in order to make this measurement See the Calculate Intermods Along Path section fot information on how to configure these tests See the Desired Channel Power Third Order Intermod Analysis measurement to determine which types of signals are included or ignored in this measurement The only difference between this measurement and the Cascaded Gain CGAIN measurement is that this measurement applies to the IM3 analysis pass only Consequently this will be the same measurement as CGAIN in the Calculate Intermods Along Path Manual Mode since a dedicated IM3 analysis is not created and the normal analysis is also the IM3 analysis pass Remember in
270. herency numbers ate used to group spectrums together to determine what the resulting total spectrum is after a coherent addition Coherent additions are especially important at the input to non linear devices since the total spectrum from coherent signals will yield a different power than individual spectrums This total power is needed to correctly determine the operating point of the non linear devices The coherency number of a new spectrum will use an existing coherency number if the two spectrums ate coherent Several tules are followed to determine if a newly created spectrum is coherent with an existing spectrum All of these rules must be followed before any two signals can be considered coherent NOTE If the Coherent Addition option is unchecked then all intermods and harmonics will always be non coherent and well as any mixed products out of a mixer regardless of the following comments 1 Each source is only coherent with itself There ate no exceptions to this rule If two signals ate created even on the same port by definition they are non coherent with each other and will always be To create a coherent signal that drives mote than one sub circuit a single source must be created then split to the appropriate sub citcuits 2 Signals must be of the same type Signals generally have the following categories Source Intermod Harmonic and Noise Coherent signals only apply to the same category of signals For example a sour
271. hrough narrow band filters It will do this based on the frequencies of all the known soutces in the simulation 3 Additional noise points can be inserted around the channel as specified by the user The user can specify a noise channel bandwidth and the number of points that will be uniformly distributed in this bandwidth Once again this is extremely useful when trying to examine the noise spectrum through narrowband devices like filtets etc Smart Noise Point Removal Since the simulation time is proportional to the number of noise points then simulation time can be improved by removing unnecessary noise points For evety desired spectrum signal source desired mixer multiplier divider etc product noise points ate added at the frequencies specified on the Calculate Tab of the System Simulation Dialog Box Once the noise has been processed by a particular element all noise points ate examined to determine their amplitude and phase If consecutive noise points have the same complex values then some of these consecutive noise points are removed Noise sources ate not discussed in this section Please refer to the Sources Section for more information about noise sources Note Noise will not be calculated unless the Calculate Noise checkbox in the System Simulation dialog box has been checked Paths Measurements are Defined by Paths Since spectrums are propagated to every node in the schematic the user must have so
272. i eei I eer e ae 211 Cascaded Noise Figure NE erect a 212 vii Table Of Contents viii Channel or Path Frequency CE see ette i rnt REA HERE 213 Offsec Channel Frequency OC iria 214 Tone Channel Frequency CL CE 4 4 eet ep tate ente io de e dri s 214 Channel Noise Power CINP ia e tte a AREE RR RV 215 Channel Power GB 2e eet eae dt ia 215 Desit d Channel Powe r DCP avi ada ate dao eod eda deitas 216 Desired Channel Power Third Order Intermod Analysis DCPIM2 217 Offset Channel Power OEP 1 2 rte AA det o i eret e tion Lo ia 217 Tone Channel Power ICD ione aen it id e 218 Gain CAN AAA A A Ai 219 Gain Third Order Intermod Analysis GAINIMO eese 219 Gain All Signals GAINA TD id otto oerte dett ded ee tl te de detis 220 Image Frequency MGE neri i n ite o 221 Image Channel Noise Power IMGNDP eccccsessessssesessssssestessesseesssssssscesssesssessssssssessseseessees 222 Image Noise Rejection Ratio IMGNB ncniccniniononinincnincnncnonianoncncancncnconononcanonononcaroncononarincanons 223 Minimum Detectable Signal MDS seen 223 Image Channel Power IMP pintan t e ed eene e ec oe ed eme 224 Image Rejection Ratio IM GR ertet rre teet re a d a D e eiie ern 225 Percent Noise AA teret t UE EORR RODEO RE ERUIT 226 Percent Third Order Intermod PRIMS ete eee pa o mota 227 Spurious Free Dynamic Range SED Rui 228 Stage Dynamic Ra
273. ic to describe the circuit so models would have to exist for the pattern that you plan to simulate Do any of the models in the circuit exceed or come close to exceeding the published parameter ranges for SUPERSTAR If so you may want to verify the SUPERSTAR simulation with EMPOWER or use EMPOWER exclusively Most of the models in SUPERSTAR were derived from measured data which was only taken for particular parameter variations The allowed parameter ranges are published for each model in SUPERSTAR Linear or Harmonic Balance This question is the easiest to answer for active circuits you will usually use both For passive circuits filters couplers power dividers etc you will only use linear Passive citcuits are linear harmonic balance will not give you extra information that you could not get from linear simulation Active circuits are inherently nonlinear Harmonic balance will help you analyze DC operating points and nonlinear performance For both active and passive circuits linear simulation is the workhorse of RF design Matching noise and stability studies are all completed quickly using linear simulation Harmonic balance is used to complete the analysis of most circuits Examine mixer convetsion gain amplifier compression and detector efficiency using harmonic balance Linear or SPICE Simulation Often this question does not have a quick answer For example many engineers associate SPICE with time domain simula
274. ieces contain only open ends and small sections of lines which do not resonate As a result this filter only needed 5 frequency points for a good analysis e With any of these circuits The grey areas can easily get so large that the problem requires hundreds of megabytes to analyze In the meander line if the lengths of the coupled lines grey areas gets very long the EMPOWER simulation could take a long time When the circuit is decomposed simply changing one length value in GENESYS gives a virtually instant analysis no matter how long the coupled sections are Spiral Inductor Example As a first decomposition example we will analyze a spiral inductor The first step is to come up with a plan for decomposition as shown here We strongly recommend that you write a similar plan on paper when you setup a problem for multi mode analysis 290 EMPOWER Decomposition 85121 5 2 78 35 SE d 99 gt 9 6 55 43 1g Bo 2 td 1 o M3 po NENNEN 14 5 4 Part Part2 The first step is to create workspace with a layout for each unique piece In this example there are two unique pieces The lower left corner is the first and each of the other three corners which are identical There are two basic methods for creating these pieces e Create the pieces individually drawing only the part that will be simula
275. ied by upper and lower frequency limits and spectral density The noise spectral density is the power in dBm in a 1 Hz bandwidth For a noise only source the user can un check the Include Signal checkbox Source Parameter Tuning Every source parameter can be tuned by placing a question mark in front of the parameter Summaty All sources in SPECTRASYS have bandwidth and spectral density Sources have a center frequency bandwidth power level phase shift and number of points All sources are defined in the frequency domain e Sources are Modeled in the Frequency Domain 131 Simulation Synthesis 132 e Currently Time Varying Sources are not Supported e CW Sources are Defined to have 1 Hz Bandwidth e Modulated Sources can have any Bandwidth e A Modulated Source is Represented by a Uniform Spectral Density Synthesis Circuits can directly synthesized from SPECTRASYS Right clicking on the behavioral model will bring a context sensitive menu This menu will list the synthesis modules available for the given element The selected synthesis module will be invoked and the parameters of the behavioral model will be passed to this synthesis module See the specific synthesis section for more information about each synthesis tool TZ GENESYS V8 1 Ele Edit View Workspace Actions Tools Schematic Synthesis Window Help osa Dejocjejer saau gmE ro 4 Lumped Line Schl Workspace Amp Attn BPF Basic ES Edit Find P
276. ill be used for this model when it is on a layout Symbol Allows the user to select the schematic symbol associated with the modcl 172 User Models Using A Model In SCHEMAX You can replace any element with a user defined model in SCHEMAX To do this 1 Double click on an existing symbol that you have already drawn to change its model 2 Press the Model button 3 Choose the model to use from the combo box An example is shown below Category eprogiam filestgenesys version 7 0 examples SELF_RESONANT wsp New Model S aM STR NEY a 4 Press OK 5 Enter the parameters required for the model and press OK To place a user defined model and special symbol on a schematic follow the instructions for the More button in the previous section Single Part Models Selecting Add Model Single Part from the Designs Models right click menu displays the dialog box shown below This box defines the underlying part that will be used as the model This dialog is the same as the Change Model dialog box in SCHEMAX The complete process to enter a single part model is 1 Right click the Designs Models icon in the workspace manager and select Add Model Single Part 2 Name the part The system asks if you want to store the file in the model directory When stored in this directory it is easy to reuse the part in other designs 3 Choose a base model The single part model can be based on any part Typically this
277. imer function The timer function is used to generate analog events It is used to detect specific points in time The general form is timer start time period time tol Advanced Modeling Kit where statt time is a requited argument but period and time tol are optional The timet function schedules an event to occur at an absolute time start_time The analog simulator then inserts a time point within timetol of an event At that time point the event evaluates to True If time tol is not specified the default time point is at ot just beyond the time of the event If the period is specified as greater than zero the timer function schedules subsequent events at multiples of period Examples A pseudo random bit stream generator is an example how the timer function can be used module bitStreamGen out output out electrical out parameter period 1 0 integer x analog begin timer 0 period x random 0 5 V out lt transition x 0 0 period 100 0 end endmodule Operators Analog operators operate on an expression and return a value Furthermore they can operate on more than just the current value of their arguments as they maintain their internal state and so their output is a function of both the input and the internal state Because they maintain their internal state analog operators are subject to several important restrictions These are e Analog operators can not be used inside con
278. imple way is to enter a nonlinear model is through direct schematic entry You place a nonlinear device such as an NPN transistor from the schematic tool bar Then double click the device and type in the device parameters The advantage of this technique is that it is simple The disadvantage is that it is not as easy to reuse the device in another design Another way to enter a nonlinear model is to create a single part model This is similar to using a model statement in other simulators See the Designs Single Part Model section in this User s Guide for details A third way to enter nonlinear models is to choose one from the supplied library of parts To do this just enter the base nonlinear model that you would like for example a PNP then change the model to the desired part using the Model button on the element parameter dialog The final way to enter a nonlinear part is to link the model to a SPICE netlist GENESYS can read SPICE 3 compatible netlists extracting models and subcircuits Most vendors supply nonlinear models including package parasitics in the form of SPICE netlists One advantage of SPICE links is that complex models can be included vety easily in the simulation The chance of error in entering numbers is reduced The disadvantage of the link is that parameters are difficult to view and cannot be tuned or optimized See the Designs Link to Spice File section in this User s Guide for details HARBEC DC amp Har
279. in SPECTRASYS to warn the user when a given power level falls outside the specified range This range applies to each element on a case by case basis For example the total LO power for the given mixer will be determined by integrating the LO spectrum and then comparing this power level to the LO Drive Level for the given mixer If this power level is outside the Tolerance Range window then a warning will be issued for this mixer either indicating that the mixer is being starved or over driven Mixer LO Strongest Signal Only When selected the frequency of LO signal is used to determine the output frequency of all mixed signals regardless of the number of other signals that may be present on the LO 99 Simulation 100 All Signals Within X dBC of Strongest When selected all frequencies of LO signals falling within the specified range of the peak LO signal will be used to create new mixed output spectrum Reciprocal mixing blocking can be simulated with this option by creating a 2nd LO signal that represents the LO phase noise at a specified frequency offset The LO signal range must be set to include this signal which will be below the peak LO signal When the simulation is ran the reciprocal mixed spectrum will appear at the mixer output Note All parameters on this page will support equations and can also be made tunable by placing a question mark in front of the parameter value Amplifiers Amplifiers This sect
280. in the lateral dimensions e Fields generated from z directed currents are not taken into account therefore it is not recommended that you include vias in the layout Setting Up the EMPOWER Box To get good results for the far field radiation patterns the following rules must be observed e The structure should be centered in the box e The walls of the box should be far away from the structure e Only one layer of metal must be used e Exactly one substrate or an Air Below layer must be under the metal layer not both There ate 3 different antenna types for which far field radiation patterns can be generated e Antenna in free space 308 EMPOWER Viewer and Antenna Patterns e Antenna above a ground plane e Microstrip antenna above a substrate and ground plane To simulate an antenna in free space no substrate should be used and the only layet below the metal layer should be Air Below The height of the Air Below layer in this case is irrelevant Both the Top Cover and Bottom Cover should be set to Electrical type with surface impedance set to 377 ohms 377 ohms is the intrinsic impedance of free space To simulate an antenna above a ground plane with no substrate the Air Below layer should be set to the height the antenna is to be above the ground plane The Bottom Cover should be set to Lossless type and the Top Cover should be set to Electrical type with surface impedance set to 377 ohms To simulate a microstrip
281. ine is 12 mil wide and is terminated by a metal square 24 by 24 mil with a 13 mil diameter circular via hole in the center The substrate height is 15 mil and the relative permitivity is 9 8 The box size is 120 by 120 mil Load this example in GENESYS and run the EMPOWER viewer The first figure below shows the time averaged plot View Menu Switches Value Mode or Value Mode button for additive XY current density distribution The view point is the oblique view with a few minor adjustments The plot shows how the dominant microstrip line mode currents spread across the square metal pad You can see the typical peaks in the current density function in the vicinity of the metal internal corners where the surface current changes flowing directions Togeling to the X and Y components of the current XY X Y Z button you can investigate how the surface currents change direction in different parts of the structure Switching to the Z current visualization mode will show a plot like the second figure below Note that the scale for the Z directed currents is in Amperes and not current density Each current represents a volume current density integrated across the grid cell They are shown as lines connecting the corresponding geometrical point in the grid plane and the point cotresponding to the actual current values If a via hole surface shape is known using the current in Amperes it is possible to estimate a current density on the via hole surface It is obvi
282. inear behavioral models such as amplifiers and mixers For all stages where this parameter is not specified a large default value of 100 dBm is used Values Real value in Watts Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type DBM SOIP3 stage output third order intercept in dBm MAG SOIP3 numeric value of the stage output third order intercept Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield DBM SOIP3 DBM SOIP3 DBMI SOIP3 MAG SOIP3 MAG SOIP3 MAGJSOIP3 Not available on Smith Chart Stage Output Third Order Intercept SOIP3 This measurement is the output third order intercept specified in the element parameters for the particular stage This parameter is currently only available for the SPECTRASYS non linear behavioral models such as amplifiers and mixers For all stages where this parameter is not specified a large default value of 100 dBm is used Values Real value in Watts Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type DBM SOIP3 _ stage output third order intercept in dBm MAG SOIP3 _ numeric value of the stage output third order intercept Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield DBM SOIP3 DBM S
283. ing eigenwave propagation constants and characteristic impedances a matrix of transformation from the grid functions space to the mode s space transformation matrix and an auxiliary matrix that helps to match propagated modes perfectly compensation matrix Solution of the system is based on simultaneous diagonalization of Y matrix blocks Each port of the MIC structure or discontinuity can be de embedded using the pre calculated line parameters and the transformation and compensation matrices The main advantages of this approach ate the possibility of multimode deembedding without direct spectral analysis of the line cross section and ideal matching of line eigenmodes in the analysis of the line segment that increases the accuracy of discontinuity analysis Note that despite the theoretical ability to excite and to match any propagating line eigenwave using the sutface current sources in the metal plane it does not always wotk in the discrete models Using a limited number of variables in the source regions it is sometimes impossible to separate different modes completely Moreover the success of the MoSD application depends on the high order modes that could substantially influence the result This is the main drawback of the described MoSD application to planar structures 335 EMPOWER File Descriptions In performing its tasks EMPOWER creates many different types of files An understanding these different files is very helpful in und
284. ion of the Maxwell s equations only in the plane of metalization x y plane Grid spectral representation of the EM fields in the homogeneous layets Building Grid Green s Function GGF matrix in spectral domain using impedance fotm of the solution in a layer Representation of each GGF matrix element as a sum of four elements of an auxiliary array obtained using DFFT technique Equidistant grid transformation to a non equidistant grid using thinning out and linear re expansion procedures Automatic detection of symmetry for symmetrical and nearly symmetrical problems reflection and 180 rotational Solution of the main system of linear algebraic equations using partial inversion Resolution to Y or Z matrix relating integral grid currents and voltages in the input and lumped element regions To map a boundary value problem for a partial differential equation on the grid basically means to substitute the problem with solution defined in a space of continuous functions by a problem with a solution defined in a discrete space The model solution must be as close to the continuous one as possible To solve the problem we approximated the partial derivatives in the signal plane by finite differences applied to grid analogues of the field components The corresponding grid is shown here 329 Simulation 330 da Ix V e There ate L 1 equidistant cells along the x axis and M 1 cells along the y axis The grid equivalents of
285. ion will describe the fundamental operation of how SPECTRASYS simulates RF amplifiers General RF and VGA Variable Gain Amplifier Parameters Gain Small signal low frequency gain The actual amplifier gain will change according to the gain compression and frequency rolloff of the amplifier Noise Figure Amount of noise added to the circuit by the amplifier The noise figure is assumed to be flat across frequency A time domain simulation is performed to determine the noise figure If the amplifier is in compression Output P1dB Output 1 dB compression point Output Saturation Power Output satutated output powet Output IP3 Output third order intercept Output IP2 Output second order intercept Reverse Isolation Attenuation from the output to the input The revetse isolation is assumed to be flat actoss frequency Reference Impedance Input and output impedance of the amplifier Corner Frequency The frequency at which the input signals will begin to be attenuated by the Rolloff Slope dB Decade parameter Rolloff Slope dB Decade The slope of the frequency rolloff specified in dB attenuation per decade in frequency The following diagram is a high level view of the operation of the amplifiet put SPECTRASYS System Parameter Noise Figure Noise Bandwidth Effets amp Hanmonice No Folloft for Noise Amp Pas out All Input dde Power A ir
286. is 100 MHz at all nodes before the mixer and 10 MHz after the mixer i c IF frequency schi Workspace Getting Started 9 A ES MIXERP 1 RFAMP 1 CL 8 dB G 20 dB SUM 0 NF 5 dB LO 7 dBm OP1DB 10 dBm ATTN_1 IRZ0dB ATTN 3 OPSAT 13 dBm L 2dB NF 0 dB 2dB OIP3 20 dBm RF Input 1 BPF BUTTER 1 FLO 8 MHz FHI 12 MHz N 5 IL 0 dB LO Port 3 APASS 3 dB CF MHz DBMICP DBMICNP DEICHR DBICGANN DBICNF 93 913 0 175 442 93 442 173 278 83 278 175 278 83 278 175 278 83 278 149 301 77 301 The Channel Frequency is a critical parameter for SPECTRASYS since most of the measurements are based on this parameter If this frequency is incorrectly specified then all measurements using this frequency will be incorrect The easiest way to verify the Channel Frequency that SPECTRASYS is using is to look at the Channel Frequency measurement in a Table or a Rectangular Graph Offset Channel The offset channel is a special measurement that allows specification of a user defined channel and bandwidth relative to the main channel The user can specify the Freq Offset from Channel and Measurement Bandwidth parameters on the Options page of the System Simulation dialog box 105 Simulation 106 System Simulation Parameters General Paths Calculate Composite Spectrum Options Ignore Spectrum T 3 m Mixer LO
287. kets then we recommend placing the spice file either on a network drive which has the same letter for all co workers or better into your GENESYS model directory or a subdirectory there 2 Right Click on Designs in the Workspace Tree and select Add Link to SPICE File 3 Ifyou want this link to be available automatically everytime you statt GENSYS you should answer Yes and then save your file into the model directory 4 Click the button on the SPICE Link dialog box and choose your spice library from the browse box Press OK 5 Choose the desired model or subcircuit from the combo box 6 Notmally the only other necessary change in this box is checking or unchecking Reverse Nodes 1 amp 2 This box tells GENESYS that the spice subcircuit uses the spice node numbeting convention Input 2 Output 1 Normally you will check this box if the data represents a transistor or amplifier 7 Click OK 8 Generally you should allow GENESYS to rename your model to be the same name as the spice model to avoid confusion 175 Simulation 176 Note GENESYS will not allow 2 models with the same name to be loaded If you create a SPICE model with the same name as an existing part GENESYS will give an error at startup If this happens simply load your workspace and rename the spice link To use a link to a SPICE file 1 Ona schematic place a part with the symbol you want for the link For example if you are placin
288. l Sij Linear 1400 tc E S Outputs EB Circuit Simulation EH Combined Simul is Equations B Substrates F 27 E Default 3 Optimizations 30 30 Y Yield 2000 2600 2000 2600 Notes Freq MHz Freq MHz e DB 521 m DE S11 e DB S21 DE S11 27 EMPOWER Basics A major part of any electromagnetic simulation is to break the problem down into manageable size pieces that allow an approximation of Maxwell s equations to be solved Electromagnetic simulators traditionally fall into three major categories 2 D 3 D and 2 1 2 D 2 D SIMULATORS 2 D simulators can only analyze problems that are infinitely continuous in one direction Ideal transmission lines and some waveguide problems are practical problems which fall into this category A 2 D simulator will analyze a slice of the line s and determine propagation impedance and coupling values 2 D simulators ate the fastest but most limited type of simulator available 3 D SIMULATORS 3 D simulators can analyze virtually any type of problem and are ideal for use with non planat geometries such as a coaxial T junction radar target reflections or other truly three dimensional problems 3 D simulators have the advantage that they can analyze almost any problem but they have the disadvantage that they are extremely slow 2 1 2 D SIMULATORS 2 1 2 D Simulators are si
289. l IL2 TL1 TL14 W 84 958 mil 113 wW 84 958 mil i d ml i L 133 435 mil Lead W 83 909 mil L 133 435 mil Lead L 75 809 mil IL1 Notice how M FILTER automatically inserts the discontinuities to model their effect 8 The next we must optimize this filter by pressing the Optimize button at the top of the MFilter dialog box This is very important in order to obtain the expected filter performance in this example After the optimization the schematic should now look as shown below Note You should stop the optimizer by hitting the Esc key once the error value is not improving much 348 EMPOWER Advanced M FILTER Example IE C 2 326 pF C P 1 C 2 326 pF CAP1 TL W 83 909 mil Y L 200 578 mil IL2 y 1 3 3 TL1 W 84 958 mil 1L3 W 84 958 mil L 133 435 mil Lead W 89 909 mil L2133 435 mil Lead L 101 484 mil 1 1 9 Now we need to set the board dimensions and the EMPOWER grid spacing For this walkthrough we set the Grid Spacing X 10 and the Grid Spacing Y 10 and the Box Width X to 640 and the Box Width Y to 800 The other properties should be set as follows We have chosen the grid spacing to be 10 because the widths and lengths of the synthesized filter are very close to multiples of 10 mils LAYOUT Properties x General Associations General Layer EMPOWER Layers Fonts Des FEE Units Box Settings The UNITS box at left show unit
290. l definition using the process described latet in this section There ate 2 ways to create a new model 1 Without an existing schematic 2 From an existing schematic of the model Creating A Model Without An Existing Schematic With the Workspace Window 1 Right click on the Workspace Window Designs node as shown in the figure below 2 Click Add User Model Schematic 3 Name the new model Continue with step 5 in the Model Example below 165 Simulation 166 pe T A Simulations Dat Add Layout Notes jace Window Schl Sche Add Schematic gj Outputs Add Text Netlist 3 2 Equations Add User Model Schematic A Substrates Add Link to SPICE Model A Optimizations Add Model Single Part E Yield With the Design Managet 1 2 3 4 Open the Design Manager by choosing Designs Models on the Workspace menu Click the New button Select Add User Model Schematic Name the new model Continue with step 5 in the Model Example below For more information on how to use the Workspace Manager dialogs see the Reference manual Creating A Model From An Existing Schematic To create a model from an existing schematic 1 Follow the instructions in Creating A Model Without An Existing Schematic above to create a blank model schematic Note You do not have to define model parameters when the Model Propetties dialog appeats By c
291. lable on Smith Chart Total Third Order Intermod Power TIM3P This measurement is the integrated total intermod power conducted from the prior stage plus the intermod power generated by the current stage during the IM3 analysis pass All Intermod power is integrated across the main channel for the specified path This measurement will include intermod power from all paths and all sources at the prior node as well as the current node if those intermods fall within the channel In equation form the conducted third order intermod powet is TIM3P n integration of the total intermod spectrum at stage n across the main channel 236 Measurements SPECTRASYS Using this measurement in conjunction with the Conducted Third Order Intermod Power and the Generated Third Order Intermod Power the user can quickly identify the weak intermod link in the cascaded chain and will guide the user in maximizing the Spurious Free Dynamic Range Note The Calculate Intermods Along Path checkbox must be checked and properly configured in order to make this measurement See the Calculate Intermods Along Path section for information on how to configure these tests When calculating intermods along a path in the Manual mode a dedicated IM3 analysis is not created and the normal analysis is also the IM3 analysis pass Remember intermod bandwidth is a function of the governing intermod equation For example if the intermod equation is 2F1 F2 then
292. laced in the layout using the EMPort button and can be Normal deembedded external ports gray external ports with No Deembedding white or internal ports white External Ports and Lumped Elements and Internal Ports ate discussed in their respective sections EMPOWER Options To open double click or create a Planar 3D Electromagnetic Simuation EMPOWER Options EE x General Viewer Far Field Advanced Layout to simulate y Port impedance 50 Generalized Setup Layout Port Modes Use ports from schematic Necessary for HARBEC co simulation m Electromagnetic simulation frequencies p Co simulation sweep Start freq MHz 1000 v Use EM simulation frequencies Stop freq MHz 5000 Start freq MHz o0 Number of points E Stop freq MHz E000 EH itasse Fes zl Number of points 5 Max critical freq 3000 v Tum off physical losses faster Recalculate Now Automatic Recalculation Automatically save workspace after calc DK Cancel Apply Help General Tab Layout to Simulate Allows you to select which layout in the current workspace to simulate Since workspaces can have multiple layouts and multiple EMPOWER simulations you can simulate many different layouts within the same workspace Port Impedance When EMPOWER S Parameter data is plotted on a graph it will be normalized to this impedance Different impedances can be used for each port by separating impe
293. laration Indirect branch assignment An indirect branch assignment is useful when it is difficult to solve an equation It has this format V a V p 0 Which can be read as find V n such that V p is equal to zero This example says that node n should be driven with a voltage source and the voltage should be such that the given equation is satisfied V p is probed and not driven Indirect branch assignments are allowed only within the analog block Branch contribution statement A branch contribution statement typically consists of a left hand side and a right hand side separated by a branch contribution operator The right hand side can be any expression which evaluates to or can be promoted to a real value The left hand side specifies the source branch signal to assign the RHS It consists of a signal access function applied to a branch The form is V nf n2 lt expression Branch contribution statements will implicitly define source branch relations The branch is goes from the first net of the access function to the second net If the second net is not specified in the call the global reference node ground is used as the reference net Ports provide a way to connect modules to other modules and devices A port has a direction input output or inout which must be declared The ports are listed after the module declaration The port type and pott direction must then be declared in the body of the module Exam
294. le if the third order intermod equation is Fim3 F1 2 F2 then the equation for the resulting bandwidth would be BWim3 BW1 2 BW2 If BW1 30 kHz and BW 1 MHz then the resulting bandwidth would be 2 03 MHz The user needs to make sute that the Channel Measurement Bandwidth is set wide enough to integrate all of this enetgy Calculate Intermods and Harmonics A checkbox named Calculate Intermods and Harmonics located on the Calculate page of the System Simulation dialog box can be used to disable enable all calculation of all intermods and harmonics Simulation speed will be increased for large number of catriets and nonlinear stages if intermods and harmonics are being calculated The user can disable this option to increase the simulation speed if intermod and harmonic calculations are unimportant 1 Jose Carlos Pedro Nuno Borges Carvalho Intermodulation Distortion in Microwave and Wireless Circuits Artech House 2003 Cascaded Intermod Equations Cascaded intermod equations are NOT used by SPECTRASYS There are serious drawbacks using the cascaded equations 1 They assume interfering input signals are never filtered and maintain the same gain as the desired signal through all cascaded stages This may be fine for in band intermod measurements but will be completely inaccurate fot out of band intermod measurements Generally out of band interferers in a teceiver are filtered in the IF stages Continuing 111 Sim
295. les Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield P1 DBM P1 RMS power delivered to port DBM P1 Not available on Smith Chart Probe Current Iprobe This cutrent measurement is the peak current through the specified current probe The probe is identified by a probe designator name Values Real value in specified units Simulations Nonlinear dc analysis Default Format Table MAG Graph MAG Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Desctiption Result Type MAG I1 linear magnitude of voltage at probe 1 Real Other Operators DB ANGI ANG360 RE IM Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield ICP1 MAG ICP1 current through current MAG ICP1 probe 1 Not available on Smith Chart 201 Simulation Node Voltage Vnode This voltage measurement is the peak voltage at the specified node The node is the node numbet or the name of the node as specified by the voltage test point designator name Values Real value in specified units Simulations Nonlinear dc analysis Default Format Table MAG Graph MAG Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type MAG V1 linear magnitude of voltage at node 1 Real Other Operators DB DBM ANGI ANG360 J RE IM Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield VTP2 M
296. lete simulation graph schematic and layout information from GENESYS Contains a complete GENESYS workspace Written by GENESYS Type Binary Can be safely edited No Average size 2 to 25Kbytes but may be larger Use Internal data file for EMPOWER This file contains the calculated Y parameters before deembedding If merge ME is specified the previous data stored in this file is combined with the newly calculated data and the SS S Parameter file is rewritten All files with a name or an extension starting with tilde ate backup files and can be safely deleted Examples of these files are OMBINE TPL and COMBINE RG 343 EMPOWER Advanced M FILTER Example EMPOWER Advanced Example Filter Synthesis This advanced example shows how to combine M FILTER circuit simulation and electromagnetic simulation We will design a bandpass filter with a lower cutoff frequency of 2100 MHz and an upper cutoff frequency of 2200 MHz We will use the M FILTER module to design the filter then we will perform a linear and EM simulation of the filter 1 First all units in this example use mils In order to get the results in this example the default units should be changed to mils This can be done by selecting Tools and then Options from the main menu then selecting the Units tab Make sure the Length parameter says mils as shown below GENESYS Global Options xi General Startup Graph Schematic Directories Langua
297. licking OK you can continue to create the model However the parameters if any must be defined and a LAYOUT association chosen before the model can be used in a design 2 Copy the existing schematic by selecting the entire schematic and choosing Copy from the Edit menu Paste the copied schematic into the model window by selecting the window and choosing Paste from the Edit menu Copy any equations from the Global Equations window by selecting them and choosing Copy from the Edit menu Right click the model in the Workspace Window See the figure below User Models Workspace V 3 Designs Models mre Selt_ Resonant Capacitor User Model Schematic gg Simulations Data Rename Outputs Delete This Design 3 2 Equations Substrates Properties i Optimizations Schematic Properties Yield Edit Model Equations i Notes 6 Choose Edit Model Equations 7 Paste the equations into the model by selecting the Model Equations window and choosing Paste from the Edit menu The model has now been created If you chose to save the workspace into the MODEL directory the model will load automatically each time GENESYS is started This is the recommended method to share models with others User Model Example A Self Resonant Capacitor This example describes how to create a model for a self resonant capacitor Note This example assumes that you are familiar with drawing schematics and
298. like model XYZ143 NMF LEVEL 3 VTO 2 5 CGS 1e 12 If there are any compatibility errors in the SPICE file the errors will appear in the GENESYS error window when a DC or HARBEC simulation is run which uses the link Link to Spice File To open Create a new Link to Spice Model Link to Spice File x Eilename Motorola RFBJT BFR93 LIB OK Model Subckt Name BFR93 Subcircuit with 3 Nodes 100 200 300 y Cancel Spice Part fx Subcircuit zi Number of Nodes E Iv Reverse Nodes 1 amp 2 Normally checked for transistors and amplifiers Filename The name of the library file containing the spice model If you will be sharing files with other GENESYS usets you must use a uniform location for these files Good locations include in the GENESYS Model directory or a standard directory every user has on their C drive Browse Clicking this button brings up a browse dialog box allowing you to search for your file Even if you already have the correct file this button is useful as the browse dialog will show you the contents of the file Model Subckt Name This combo box is automatically filled in with available models and subcircuits parsed from the spice file Select the model you want to use Spice Part This box is automatically filled in when the model subckt is selected In SPICE a model must be referred to using the correct type of part Occasionally you may need to ovetride this selection Number of Node
299. like problems The units for the electric current density magnitudes ate Amperes per millimeter A mm The units for the magnetic current densities are Volts per millimeters V mm We choose millimeters to scale graphs to more teadable values The current density functions are created only for the currents in EMPOWER Viewer and Antenna Patterns the signal or metal layer Viaholes and z directed ports are always represented as z directed currents in Amperes To summarize viewer behavior If Generate Viewer Data is selected the default incident wave is the first eigenwave of the first input Define the input number and mode number in the EMPOWER properties dialog An incident wave is a time harmonic function with unit magnitude and zero initial phase The external ports are terminated by corresponding mode characteristic impedances while the internal ports are terminated by 1 Ohm if another termination is not defined by the option NI lt n gt The instantaneous power of the incident wave is 1 Watt and time average power is 1 2 Watt Surface current density functions are used for the signal or metal layer and integral currents are used for viaholes and z directed inputs 319 EMPOWER Box Modes A fully enclosed rectangular box acts as a cavity resonator At frequencies near each resonance mode significant coupling exists between the desired signal metalization and the cavity Because this coupling is reciprocal coupling occ
300. lity contact Eaglewate and we will be happy to provide you with an application note with instructions This chapter gives complete reference for user equations For basic operation of equations see the GENESYS Environment Equations section of the User s Guide 155 Device Data S parameters for RF and microwave devices ate commonly available and easy to measure with a network analyzer They are the most accurate way to model the small signal performance of circuits Howevet they are only valid at a particular operating point bias level Nonlinear device models are also commonly available from manufacturers but they are harder to extract from measurements The advantage of nonlinear models is that they model circuit performance at all bias levels and frequencies Moreover the model characterizes the complete linear and nonlinear performance of the devices including effects such as compression and distortion Within GENESYS are a wide range of element models Also the model and equation features provide for user creation of models However it is often necessaty or desirable to characterize a device used in GENESYS by measured or externally computed data This function is provided for by the use of the ONE TWO THR FOU and NPO elements which read S Y G H ot Z parameter data Note The information provided in this section applies to linear devices When using lineat simulator circuits are assumed time invariant element v
301. lity should be checked not only at the amplifier operating frequencies but also over the entire frequency range for which S Parameter data is available Matching One definition of network gain is the transducer power gain Gt Transducer power gain is the power delivered to the load divided by the power available from the source Gt P delivered to load P available from soutce 35 Simulation 36 Other gain definitions include the power gain Gp and the available power gain Ga Gp P delivered to load P input to network Ga P available from network P available from source The S parameter data for the network is measured with a source and load equal to the reference impedance If the network is not terminated in the reference impedance Gt can be computed from the reflection coefficients of the terminations on the network and the S parameters of the network At this point we have multiple sets of reflection coefficients those of the terminations and S11 and S22 of the network To avoid confusion the termination reflection coefficients are given a different symbol G The transducer power gain with the network inserted in a system with arbitrary source and load reflection coefficients is 4 Gt S2 1 RJA R J2 1 SuR3 1 SzRi S21812R1Rs where Rs reflection coefficient of the source Rx reflection coefficient of the load If and are both zero then Gt Sa or Gt dB 20log S21 S21 AB
302. ls excluding intermods and harmonics created by this device will have their maximum output power limited to the saturation power Compression cannot be accurately modelled for this group of signals Howevet a warning will be given when the device is in compression The following diagram is a high level view of the hybrid linear nonlinear model Device Input gt Apply Sum All Cale Create Linear Input Nonlinear Intermods and Noise Device Power Gain Harmonics Parameters Output CN a 1 1 2 Reverse Reverse Isolation Isolation for Intermods for Reverse and Harmonics Traveling Signals The device operation is as follows 1 Determine Total Input Power The entire input spectrum of the device is integrated to determine the total input power Determine Gain to Refer Nonlinear Parameters to Input The actual gain of the device will depend on how close the device is to compression and saturation A polynomial curve fit is done between the small signal linear gain curve and the 103 Simulation 104 output P1dB and saturation points to determine the actual gain curve used for the nonlinearities only 3 Create Intermods and Harmonics Intermods and harmonics will be created for all input signals to the device See the Calculate Intermod and Harmonics section for additional information 4 Linear Parameters All input signals intermods and harmonics will be attenuat
303. m of S11 or S22 is the length of a vector from the center of the chart with O length being a perfect match to the reference impedance and 1 being total reflection at the circumference of the chart The underlying grids of the Smith chart are circles of a given resistance and arcs of impedance The reflection coefficient radius of the standard Smith chart is unity Compressed Smith charts with a radius greater than 1 and expanded charts with a radius less than 1 are available High impedances ate located on the tight portion of the chart low impedances on the left portion inductive reactance in the upper half and capacitive reactance in the lower half Real impedances are on a line from the left to right and purely reactive impedances are on the circumference The angle of the reflection coefficient is measured with respect to the real axis with zero degrees to the right of the center 90 straight up and 90 straight down The impedance of a load as viewed through an increasing length of lossless transmission line ot through a fixed length with increasing frequency rotates in a clockwise direction with constant radius when the line impedance equals the reference impedance If the line and reference impedances are not equal the center of rotation is not about the center of the chart One complete rotation occurs when the electrical length of the line increases by 180 Transmission line loss causes the reflection coefficient to spiral inw
304. magnetic equivalents Before filling the reduced GGF matrix we can additionally decrease the GGF matrix order and required storage space by means of thinning out with linear re expansion procedures and by incorporating a geometrical symmetry into the problem 333 Simulation 334 LETT ELE CO CO GLEJ CO meee ee steer mmm Thinning out is a simple climination of the grid currents in metalized regions that can be represented by a smaller number of currents without loosing accuracy As an illustrative example the left half above shows a three resonator filter mapped on the grid The grid cells with possible non zero conductivity currents metalization regions are depicted by the thick lines The thinning out procedure decreased the number of the currents in the problem and leaves the currents that ate shown by the thick lines in the right half above This looks like a pseudo non equidistant grid over the regular grid that is finer near edges corners and via holes and coarser inside the solid metal regions The enlarged secondary grid cells after the thinning out consist of non divergent current borders along each side that can be substituted by two variables on the grid using linear re expansion Combination of these two procedures makes it possible to overcome restrictions of the MoL
305. may be viewed as traveling power waves a1 incident power wave at the network input b 2 reflected power wave at the network input a2 incident power wave at the network output b2 2 reflected power wave at the network output These new variables and the network S parameters ate related by the expressions bi b2 ai821 22822 11 bi ai a27 0 S12 b1 a2 a1 0 Sai b2 a1 a2 0 S22 b2 a2 a1 0 aiSi1 a2S12 Terminating the network with a load equal to the reference impedance forces a2 0 Under these conditions Su bi ai S21 b2 a1 S11 is then the network input reflection coefficient and S21 is the gain or loss of the network Terminating the network at the input with a load equal to the reference impedance and driving the network from the output port forces a1 0 Under these conditions S22 b2 a2 15 b1 a2 S22 is then the network output reflection coefficient and S12 is the reverse gain or loss of the network Linear S parameters are unitless Since they are based on voltage waves they are converted to decibel format by multiplying the log of the linear ratio by 20 It is not always obvious whether an author is refering to linear or decibel parameters To avoid this confusion the book Oscillator Design and Computer Simulation and Versions 5 4 and earlier of SUPERSTAR use C for linear S parameters and S for the decibel form This is somewhat unconventional Version 6 0 and later of GE
306. me way of indicating signal direction in order to make useful measurements A path is used for just such purpose Basically a path is a node number sequence and is defined by specifying 1 Name or use the default i e Path1 2 from node 3 thru nodes optional 4 and to node Given the from node and the to node SPECTRASYS will pick the shortest path between the two node even though several paths may exist If the user would like to look at an alternate path then thru nodes can be specified In the example below if the following two paths existed a 1 3 9 6 8 2 and b 1 5 10 4 7 2 then specifying the path as 1 2 SPECTRASYS would select path a However if the uset wanted to specify path b then by simply finding a unique node s then this can could be specified i e 1 10 2 There is no restriction on the number of nodes used to 117 Simulation 118 specify a path In some cases several thru nodes may need to be specified to uniquely identify a path Bschi Workspace Getting Started 7 Of PHASE_1 RFAMP 2 A 0 ATTN_2 G 12 dB Z0 50 ohm L 2 dB NF 3 dB eH p Input 1 Output 2 ini SPLIT2 1 SPLIT2 2 10 i 3 0103 IL 3 0103 dB I 2 gt ipe i80 30 dB PH3 0 PHASE_2 ATTN_1 RFAMP_1 A 0 L 2 dB 6 12 dB 20 50 otim NF 3 dB In order for SPECTRASYS to be able to locate the path a signal source must be present
307. me name as the simulation and places copies of the files there 337 Simulation 338 e Inthe same workspace you can access internal files using a special file prefix WSP followed by folder names and the filename For example to access the EMPOWER SS use the name WSP Simulations EMIXEMPOWER SS The second method has the advantage of automatically updating whenever the EMPOWER simulation is re run The first method requires you to re write the data files whenevet you need an updated version There ate two basic types of data files text sometimes called ASCIT and binary Text files are human readable files They ate universal and can be edited with many different programs such as NOTEPAD or DOS EDIT Among the text files used by EMPOWER are batch topology listing and S Parameter files Note Word processors can also edit text files however they will store binaty formatting information in the file unless explicitly told not to Save as Text so we do not recommend their use for editing text files In contrast binary files are not human readable They contain information encoded into the numbers which make up the file which are ultimately turned into ones and zeros thus the name binary Unlike text files binary files are not universal and should only be edited by a program designed for the particular type of binary file you ate using Editing a binary file in a regular word processor or text e
308. measurement is the integrated total intermod power in the main channel conducted from the prior stage during the IM3 analysis pass Only Intermod signals are used for this measurement All other types of signal ate ignored This measurement will include all intermods that are traveling in the forward path direction In equation for the conducted third order intermod power is CIM3P n TIM3P n 1 GAINIM3 n where CIM3P 0 0 dB and n stage number Using this measurement in conjunction with the Generated Third Order Intermod Power GIM3P and the Total Third Order Intermod Power TIM3P the user can quickly 234 Measurements SPECTRASYS identify the weak intermod link in the cascaded chain and will guide the user in maximizing the Spurious Free Dynamic Range SFDR Note The Calculate Intermods Along Path checkbox must be checked and properly configured in order to make this measurement See the Calculate Intermods Along Path section for information on how to configure these tests See the Total Third Order Intermod Power and GainIM3 measurements to determine which types of signals are included or ignored in this measurement When calculating intermods along a path in the Manual mode a dedicated IM3 analysis is not created and the normal analysis is also the IM3 analysis pass Remember intermod bandwidth is a function of the governing intermod equation For example if the intermod equation is 2F1 F2 then th
309. mittance which must be seen at pott to achieve a simultaneous match at both input and output Values Complex value versus frequency Simulations Linear Default Format Table RECT Graph RE Smith Chart GM Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type RECT YM1 real imaginary parts Real RE YM1 real part Real MAGANG ZM2 Linear magnitude and angle in range of 180 to 180 Real Other Operators MAGI ANG ANG360 IM MAGANG260 Examples 193 Simulation Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield YM em real imaginary parts of admittance for all ports ZM1 RE ZM1 Maximum Available Gain GMAX The Maximum Available Gain measurement is a real function of frequency and is available for 2 port networks only For conditions where the stability factor K is greater than zero i e the system is unconditionally stable then GMAX S21 S12 K sqrt K2 1 If K lt 1 then GMAX is set to the maximum stable gain therefore GMAX S21 S12 Values Real value versus frequency Simulations Linear Default Format Table dB Graph dB Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type DB GMAX maximum available gain in dB magnitude of the maximum available gain Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield GMAX DB GMAX DB GMAX MAG GMAX magnitude o
310. mma separated list of assignments The right hand side of the assignment is a constant expression including previously defined parameters For parameter atrays the initializer is a list of constant expressions containing only constant numbers and previously defined parameters within and bracket delimiters Parametets represent constants their values can not be modified at runtime Parameters can be modified from the declaration assignment at compilation time The putpose is to allow customization of module instances parameter however can be modified with the defparam statement or the module instance statement It is not legal to use hierarchical name referencing from within the analog block to access external analog vatiable or parameter values An example is parameter real TestFlag 0 from 0 inf exclude 10 100 exclude 200 400 The general format is parameter teal integer list of assignments where the list of assignments is a comma separated list of parameter identifier constant va ue range where value range is of the form from value_range_specifier exclude value_range_specifier exclude constant_expression where the va ue_range_specifier is of the form start paren expression expression2 end_paren whete start_paren is LIC and end paren is and expression is constant expression inf where expression2 is constant expression inf and where a constant param arrayinit is param
311. monic Balance Typical Harmonic Balance Measurements Compression To calculate compression of a circuit a decrease in circuit transmission gain use a parameter sweep to increase the power from a low level through compression Assuming that the power input is on port 1 and the output is on port 2 the figure below shows how to plot the output power and the gain Note that the default simulation is set to the power sweep The first trace is P2 900 meaning the power at port 2 at 900 MHz The second trace is the gain Note that this is an inline equation It starts with an equals sign and the data is referred to by operator the dBm operator is required in the equation it is not needed as a direct plot as in trace 1 Graph Properties x Default Simulation D ata or Equations Input Power Sweep Sch1 i Len lt Right Y Axis gt X Axis I Auto Scale IM Auto Scale M Auto Scale Log Scale Min 72 Min Min 40 Max 25 Max E Max p Divisions jo Divisions fro Divisions fro Other Properties Cancel Solving Convergence Issues The simulator searches for a solution until the user specified accuracy is reached or until a specified number of searching steps Sometimes you might run into convergence issues Below ate a few steps that you can use to improve convergence results Each of the parameters below is changed on the Harmonic Balance HARBEC Options dialog box 1 Incr
312. mposed pieces cover the circuit completely as is the case in the spiral inductor then the losses will be accurate If the pieces do not completely cover the circuit if sections of line ate left out of the EMPOWER analysis and ate added with MMITLP sections then the losses will not include these sections This is true regardless of the reference plane shifts used since these shifts do not affect the loss You must be very careful when setting up and numbeting ports for decompositional analysis The following rules must be followed e Never connect anything other than MMTLP lines or other identical modal inputs to inputs which ate modally related Connecting lumped elements to modal inputs is incorrect and will give bad results e Ports which will be modally related must have sequential numbers They must also all have the same reference shift e Ports for mode space inputs must be marked type Normal not No deembed ot Internal Correspondingly their numbers must be lower than any No deembed or Internal potts e The order of ports used must correspond between the pieces and the MMTLP lines used The lowest port number in a modally related set of inputs should connect to Mode 1 in the MMTLP line and the highest port number in the set should connect to Mode N on the MMTLP line Also port ordering should be exactly the same on both pieces connected through the MMTLP The figure below shows an incorrect numbering of the
313. ms could be attributed to M G Slobodianskii 1939 An almost complete reference on the MoL development and applications in the petiod from the beginning up to sixties are given in Liskovets paper 1965 The network analogue method of B L Lennartson 1972 is probably the first technical application of the MoL to the static numerical analysis of planar multiconductor lines It was not quite straightforward when it was published and the actual exploration of the method for microwave integrated circuit structures began in the early eighties in works of German scientists H Diestel R Pregla U Schulz S B Worm and others Pregla Pascher 1989 The EMPOWER algorithms can be also classified as MoL because of its semi discrete natute Originally the network impedance analogue method Kron 1944 Sestroretzkiy 1977 and a grid spectral representation inside homogeneous layers were used to analyze the layered three dimensional structures Sestrorezkiy Kustov Shlepnev 1988 that cotrespond to a combination of the 3D finite difference approach and the spectral domain technique Latet only the discretisation in the metal plane was left but the method still retains some advantages of the network impedance analogue method That is why we sometimes refer to the EMPOWER numerical techniques as the impedance interpreted method of lines 328 EMPOWER Theory Here ate the main solution stages of the impedance interpreted MoL Partial discretisat
314. ms which will accurately represent the output For example if the user is not interested in seeing anything below 100 dBm and simulation speed is an issue then setting the threshold to 100 dBm will improve the simulation speed Linear Elements 135 Simulation 136 The more nodes in the system schematic the more spectrums that will be created and propagated This spectrum creation and propagation takes time If several linear elements are used in the system schematic and simulation speed is an issue then linear element circuits can be moved to new schematics and then linked into the system schematic using a Network block This Network block will then point to this newly created schematics Intermods One of the largest time consuming operations in SPECTRASYS is the calculation of a large number of intermods due to a large number of input signals into a non linear device such as a mixer or amplifier Various options can be selected to improve the simulation speed Fasted intermod and harmonic simulation occurs when From Sources Only Odd Orders Only and Fast Intermod Shape are enabled Limiting the maximum order to the order of interest will eliminate time wasted in calculating irrelevant intermods and harmonics You can also disable the calculation of intermods and harmonics until the initial architecture and basic budget parameters are set These settings can be changed on the Calculate tab of the System Simulation dial
315. mulators designed for mainly planar microstrip stripline etc circuits While they have less flexibility than true 3 D simulators they are much faster and are ideally suited for microsttip stripline and other similar geometries EMPOWER is an advanced 2 1 2 D simulator It can solve planar problems as well as problems with via holes and other z ditected currents putting it in a class above true 2 1 2 D simulators which do not allow z directed currents In fact most people would consider EMPOWER to be a 3 D simulator because it can handle z directed currents All circuits in EMPOWER exist in a rectangular box as shown below The Media substrate layers each have specific dielectric and permittivity constants and loss tangents There must be at least two media layers One above the metalization layer and one below For standard microstrip there is a substrate below and air above For suspended microstrip there are three media layers two air and one substrate For buried microsttip there are also three media layers two substrate and one ait 257 Simulation 258 ho Se Be q PA SIDEWALLS LAYER Ro hi BOTTOM The dialogs below show two typical EMPOWER Layer Tab setups one for microstrip and one for stripline triplate The EMPOWER Layer Tab must be carefully checked when a new problem is created as it is probably the most likely source of errors when setting up an EMPOWER run Create New
316. n Since the RefShift lines also help to correct for the discontinuity at the box wall their lengths are normally not zero even if the reference shift specified for the port is zero The impedance of the RefShift lines is equal to the port line impedance so only the phase is shifted by the addition of these lines The magnitude of the reflection coefficients is not affected The parameters for deembedding are calculated prior to the analysis of the circuit EMPOWER does this automatically by analyzing two different length lines at each frequency for each port used solving for the reactance and the base RefShift value Note Deembedding requires an additional line analysis mode at the start of the run so tuns using deembedding can take substantially longer This is especially true if the lines at the ports are wide since a wide line is simulated across the entire length of the box However line analysis is always symmetrical and may be symmetrical in two planes if the port lines are placed exactly in the middle of the box EMPOWER also caches the line analysis results so if the box and port lines are not changed between runs previous data will be used The data for these lines are stored internally in the Workspace WSP file using internal files namedEMPOWER R1 EMPOWER R2 etc EMPOWER also has the intelligence to detect when two or more ports have the same configuration width position etc and will only run the line analysis once
317. n be present at a port Description Description of the signal source Enable Enables disables the source in the system simulation Add Add a new source Edit Edit the current soutce Delete Delete the current source Factory Defaults Will restore the factory default values and options for the system analysis System Simulation Parameters Paths Tab Many measurements require the definition of a path For an overview of Paths see the Paths section later in the Simulation manual Two functions exist on the System Simulation dialog box shown below to aid the user in specifying the path The first is an Add Primary Paths button All possible port to port paths will be added to the System Simulation for all ports that have a source defined If no sources have been defined then no paths will be added If the number of paths becomes very large then the user will be prompted before adding the paths The second is an Add Path button which will prompt the user for the 1 Path Name 2 From Node and 3 To Node 89 Simulation System Simulation Parameters General Paths Calculate Composite Spectrum Options E Add All Paths From All Sources Add Path soe e a PLL Out 12 1250 Delete Phase Det In Add All Paths From All Sources Automatically adds all possible paths between inputs ports with signal sources and input output
318. n Wizard ptimize Now 25 owes ode The final response of the optimized filter is as shown below The last step is to ptess F5 on your keyboatd to update the new traces If you wish you can add a bandwidth matker to display the final result 357 Simulation BE Mrilter1 Response Workspace EmWalkthru A ES 1 2075 MHz 2 899 dB DELTA L 2 897 dB 3 2330 MHz 3 396 dB DELTA R 3 394 dB slag Lus dew tirslag A 2A tn a rr T o pra N 9 T a 2050 2150 2250 2350 Freq MHz e DB S21 DB S11 MFilter1 EMI DB S21 MFittert EM1 DE S11 And the final capacitor values are File Edit Yiew Workspace Actions Josa seeloc Normal CAP1 CAP2 MFILTER1 Note that the original linear response is much higher in frequency than the electromagnetic simulation 358 EMPOWER References J A Stratton Electromagnetic theory McGraw Hill Co New York 1941 G Kron Equivalent circuit of the field equations of Maxwell Part L Proc of IRE 1944 May p 289 299 C G Montgomery R H Dick E M Purcell Principles of microwave Circuits McGraw Hill Co New Yotk 1948 O Heaviside E ectromagnetic theory AMS Chelsea Publishing Co New York 1950 A A Samarskii A N Tikhonov About representation of waveguide electromagnetic fields by series of TE and TM eigenwaves in Russian
319. n the LO pin of the mixer If the bandwidth of the LO signal is greater that 25 Hz the mixer will kick into a convolution mode and all highest power LO spectrum will be convolved will all input signals to create mixed output spectrum The convolution process is much more time consuming and the simulation time will increase Currently the LO power does not affect the conversion loss or gain of the mixer Instead the power of the LO is determined and compated with the Warning Range specified on the Options Tab of the System Simulation Dialog Box The user will then be warned if the mixer is being starved or is ovet driven by the LO SPECTRASYS System Signal Spectrum Arriving at the RF Port All spectrums arriving at the RF input port will be propagated to the IF and LO ports through their respective isolations Next the actual conversion gain loss of the mixer is determined by examining the total power appeating at this pott This total power is used to determine whether the internal amplifier connected to the RF port is being compressed or saturated For more information on the amplifier model see the Amplifier section Any gain compression will be applied to that conversion gain loss specified in the model along with any VSWR effects Before any sum and difference frequencies are created the entire non linear spectrum due to all of the signals atriving at the RF input intermods and hatmonics are created Both the sum and difference
320. n the line separated by spaces Gmin Changes the value of conductances added to each nonlinear node in the circuit The simulator by default attaches a 1 pico siemens conductance 1 teraohm resistor to each node in the circuit to assist with convergence For example to change the value to 1 micro siemens enter gmin 1e 6 HB_Oversampl Sets a factor for additional time points to be calculated during nonlinear device simulation which can improve convergence but will take additional time The factor should be set greater than 1 Typical values are 2 4 HB NonBinaryFFT Allows the use of an FFT which is not a power of 2 For multitone problems this can greatly reduce the size of the FFT required For example a 5 tone circuit with 4 harmonics per frequency normally requires 1 024 768 points but only requires 100 000 points if this option is checked This speedup often makes convergence take longer for smaller circuits so it is not set by default HB dfRelRec The amount of improvement in the etror function needed before a new Jacobian is calculated Default value is 0 001 HB dxRel The relative step size used in calculating numerical derivatives Default value is 0 001 HB dxAbs The absolute step sized used in calculating numerical derivatives when the nominal parameter value is zero Default value is 1e 10 49 Simulation 50 HARBEC Options x General Advanced Oscillator Note You must have an oscillator po
321. n the lower left of the figure Notice that port 2 is neatly black This indicates that very little energy is being delivered to that port at 9 2 GHz as we d expect Creating a Layout From an Existing Schematic 252 The file used in this example is Filters Tuned Bandpass wsp This example demonstrates the following topics e Creating a layout from an existing schematic e Tuning with EMPOWER data e Using lumped elements with EMPOWER This citcuit is a tunable bandpass filter Operational theory is given in the example above In GENESYS select Open Example from the File menu Then select Tuned Bandpass wsp from the Filters directory Double Click F2000 under Designs in the Workspace Window to display the schematic for this filter shown below EMPOWER Operation C2000 pF C 2000 pF F2000 1174 p 6 6 This is the schematic of a 2nd order microstrip combline bandpass filter with 50 W terminations and transformer coupling on the input and output The lumped capacitors are gang tuned to adjust the resonant frequency of the two center lines Tuning in this mannet affects only the center frequency and keeps the passband bandwidth constant Double Click Layoutl under Designs in the Workspace Window to display the layout for this schematic The layout for this example is shown below A 0402 Chi
322. nces G I Marchuk V V Shaidutov Difference methods and their extrapolations Spz Verlag 1983 originally published in Russian 1979 A G Vikhorev Yu O Shlepnev Analysis of multiple conductor microstrip lines by the method of straight lines Journal of Communications Technology and Electronics 1991 N 12 p 127 129 originally published in Radiotekhnika i Elektronika v 36 1991 N 4 p 820 823 M Hammermesh Group theory and its application to physical problems Pergamon Press Oxford 1962 LJ Good The inverse of a centrosymmettic matrix Technomettics Journal of Statictics for Physical Chemical and Engineering Science v 12 1970 p 925 928 P R Mclsaac Symmetry induced modal characteristics of uniform waveguides Part LSummary of results Part IlTheory IEEE Trans v MT T 23 1975 N 5 p 421 433 W T Weeks Exploiting symmetry in electrical packaging analysis IBM Journal of Research and Development v 23 1979 N 6 p 669 674 A B Mironov N I Platonov Yu O Shlepnev Electrodynamics of waveguiding structures of axisymmetrical microwave integrated circuits Journal of Communications Technology and Electronics 1990 N 7 p 71 76 originally published in Radiotekhnika i Elektronika v 35 1990 N 2 p 281 286 E V Zakharov S I Safronov D P Tarasov Abelian Groups of finite order in numerical solution of potential theory boundary value problems in Russian GVM amp MF
323. ncludes the real Verilog A source In the example shown above that file could define Thermal before including the bjt module Advanced Modeling Kit Data Types and Parameters An integer declaration declares one or more vatiables of type integer holding values ranging from 231 to 231 1 Arrays of integers can be declared using a range which defines the upper and lower indices of the array where the indices are constant expressions and shall evaluate to a positive or negative integer or zero Example integer flag MyCount 1 0 63 A real declaration declares one or more variables of type real using IEEE STD 754 1985 the IEEE standard for double precision floating point numbers Arrays of reals can be declared using a range which defines the upper and lower indices of the array where the indices ate constant exptessions and shall evaluate to a positive or negative integer or zero Example real X 1 10 Tox Xj Cgs The net_discipline is used to declare analog nets and for declaring the domains of digital nets and regs A net is characterized by the discipline that it follows A net is declared as a type of discipline and so a discipline can be considered as a user defined type for declaring a net A discipline is a set of one or more nature definitions forming the definition of an analog signal whereas a Nature defines the characteristics of the quantities for the simulator A discipline is characterized by the domain and the
324. ncy range and intervals are as specified in the Linear Simulation dialog box The H parameters are only defined for a two port network and are of the form Hj for i j equal 1 2 The equations relating the input voltage V1 and current 11 to the output voltage V2 and current I are Vi Hu h Hio Va I Ha I1 H2 Va Values Complex mattix versus frequency Simulations Linear Default Format Table RECT Graph RE Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Description Result Type Operator IRECTIHHM real imaginary parts RE H22 real part MAGANG H21 Linear magnitude and angle in range of 180 to 180 Other Operators MAG ANG ANG360 IM MAGANG360 Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield H22 RE H22 real part of H22 RECT H Shows real imaginary parts of all H Parameters MAG H21 Linear Magnitude of H21 Linear Magnitude of H21 H Shows real imaginary parts of all H Parameters Not available on Smith Chart Y Parameters 186 This Y parameter or admittance patameter measurements are complex functions of frequency The frequency range and intervals are as specified in the Linear Simulation dialog box The Y parameters for an n port network are of the form YP fori j equal 1 2 n For a two port network the equations relating the input voltage V1 and current 11 to the output voltage V2 and current 12
325. nd submits well to code optimization to minimize numeric complexity The root of EMPOWER is work which began in 1987 at the Novosibirsk Electrical Engineering Institute This lead to the commercial development of TAMIC in 1991 in Moscow TAMIC saw commercial use in the Soviet Union and elsewhere In late 1996 Eagleware acquired TAMIC and the principle contributor joined Eagleware to begin significant improvements The code was integrated into the GENESYS environment at release Version 6 5 in 1998 This section desctibes a general mathematical formulation of the boundary value problem to be solved It defines all restrictions in the problem domain You can use this section to decide whether your particular problem fits the formulation or not For analysis a passive MIC structure is confined inside a three dimensional rectangular volume bounded by electric or magnetic walls The volume is filled by a layered medium that may consist of an arbitrary number of isotropic homogeneous dielectric or magnetic layers as shown below The electric E and magnetic H field vectors are related by Maxwell s system of equations EMPOWER Theory rot H iog E Jz rot E iou H divE 0 divH 0 x y z eQ p A 1 Here Jz is the volume density vector of z directed currents inside a media layer ep and mup are permittivity and permeability of the media layer ep is a complex value for a lossy media The z directed currents are constant values
326. new measurement 12 Select Simulation System1 Sch1 Composite Spectrum and press Next 13 Select Pport power at a port node select item P2 and press Finish 14 Click OK to close the Graph Properties dialog box You will see a simple graph with the output spectrum Note This graph will be easier to read if you make it larger than the default size 15 To make this graph easier to see and understand we can switch to spectrum analyzer mode Double click on System1 in the workspace window 16 Enter 200 MHz for Ignore Spectrum Frequency Above 17 Click on the Composite Spectrum Tab Check Enable Analyzer Mode Press OK Yout graph should now look more like a spectrum analyzer displaying the data including random noise 20 J Output DBM P2 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 9 DBM P2 Walkthrough SPECTRASYS Spectrum Workspace 2 Add Simulation 100 200 300 400 500 Frequency MHz Note The two total spectrums shown are the spectrums going both directions Signal noise from input thermal noise only from output at node two To see only the spectrum going one direction you can plot the spectrum along a path Note that you can see all of the pieces that combine to make this composite signal and can use markers and fly over help to determine exactly where the signals
327. nge S DR eser va e ER NT Aida 229 Stage Noise Figure SNF Stage Output 1 dB Compression Point SOPIDB seen 230 Stage Output Second Order Intercept SOIP2 seen 231 Stage Output Third Order Intercept SOIP3 oo eee essesssseesessceeeeesnsetessetseesnsansetsnsateetanees 231 Stage Output Saturation Power SOPSAT wees eeesssteseeeesesnseeesesnseteatsnsetensetsersnsateetaneas 232 Input Third Order Intercept UP e a 232 Output Thid Order Intercept OIP3 cca ek iis A eee es 233 Conducted Third Order Intermod Power CIM3P sess 234 Generated Third Order Intermod Power GIM3P sse 235 Total Third Order Intermod Power TIM32PD esee 236 Total Node Power END i ei tane a tem eis 237 OVGtVIEW ioco aei ems atinte e ee HE o ee I an paa Rea Poe e ma reete 239 beatutes c eost SS est Re ERR RR 239 bcn p REESE 240 Creating asLayout soc coti E tE as 240 Creating a Layout Without a Schematic seen 241 Box Dimensions oo tet o AA C GR RARE DANI CETUR RETIRER 242 Table Of Contents General Lay dece ee REND ERO VENTANAS ERSTE E REM a PIS 242 EMPONWBR PLayets iconic pee erepto oe ei e T AP MERERI deem AR 243 Drawing the Layla 245 Centernne the La Ut roo 247 Placing EMPOWER POTS inet ertt er m PP E OE P IR IY ERE 247 Simulating the Layouts RU RTT Os 248 Viewing Results ese AR eis be as a IIA Aa Using the Viewer Creating a Layout From an Existing Schematic
328. ngth at this frequency in automatic mode 3 Many parameters in the listing file are based on this frequency The most important thing to know about maximum critical frequency is to keep it the same between tuns of the same problem even if you are changing the frequency range which you are analyzing If it is changed then the thinning out is changed and the entire problem geometry is slightly different As an example if you are analyzing a filter with a passband from 5 1 to 5 5 GHz with a reentrance mode additional passband around 15 GHz you should probably set the maximum critical frequency to 5 5 GHz This is because the exact characteristic of the reentrance mode probably is not important critical you just want to know approximately where the filter re enters On the other hand you want to know precisely where the passband is so you set the maximum critical frequency above it The effect of maximum critical frequency is generally secondary Most of the other choices in the table above have a bigger effect on accuracy Making a problem exactly symmetrical is an easy way to make a problem require less memoty and time without sacrificing any accuracy There are four types of symmetry recognized by EMPOWER YZ mirror symmetry XZ mirror symmetry two mirror symmetry and 180 rotational symmetry These types are illustrated below EMPOWER Tips YZ Mirror XZ Mirror Two Mirror Rotational When EMPOWER is running
329. nitude of the noise measure Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield NMEAS MAG NF DB NMEAS magnitude of the minimum noise magnitude of the minimum noise measute measure Not available on Smith Chart 190 Measurements Linear Noise Figure NF Minimum Noise Figure NFMIN The Noise Figure measurements are real functions of frequency and are available for 2 port networks only The noise figure is defined as the ratio of input signal to noise power ratio SNRix to the output signal to noise ratio SNRour NF SNRw SNRour The noise figure is related to the minimum noise figure NEMIN by the expression NF NFMIN Rn Gs Ys Yopr where Ys Gs j Bs Source Admittance Rn Normalized Noise Resistance The minimum noise figure represents the noise figure with ideal match of source impedance i e Ys Yopr Values Real value versus frequency Simulations Lineat Default Format Table dB Graph dB Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type noise figure in dB magnitude of the noise figure Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield NF DB NF DB NF MAG NFMIN magnitude of the minimum noise figure magnitude of the minimum noise figure Not available on Smith Chart Constant Noise Circles NCI A noise circle is a locus of lo
330. noise db10 k T 30 SNi P Pinoise NF SN1 SN2 Loss P2 P izl Fig 6 Example of the equations for nonlinear noise characteristics calculation Oscillator Design Overview 60 Oscillator design begins with three basic elements Amplification a frequency determining citcuit or device and feedback to overcome network losses and provide power to the load We statt by selecting an amplifying device and topology that will provide gain at the desired frequency band of frequencies for tunable oscillators Next some form of a frequency selective network is added e g crystal L C circuit cavity or dielectric resonator And finally a feedback path that provides power flow from the amplifiers output back to the frequency selective network There are generally many topologies available to provide positive feedback however the the path should be chosen such that opening the path would result in termination of oscillation A path that provides positive power flow from input to output S21 gt 1 in a broken feedback loop is an excellent starting point GENESYS 2003 03 Osct Workspace Harbec Osc Example Be Edt yew Workspace Actions Took Schematic Synthess Window H p ZEE OGRE 00 890 PRAA MZ C gt 41 4 39 Lumped Linear Nonlinear Tine Coax Microstip Slabime Stipline Coplenar Wave Sy ca ctr PI gt Y Rs c R 25000 10 o mo is L 530 518 nH
331. not Cascaded noise figure equations assume no image noise and perfect matching between stages Cascaded intermod equations assume no frequency rolloff for the interfering tones This can be a bad assumption especially for a receiver blocking test In otder to correlate SPECTRASYS data with a spreadsheet or other math packages or programs the schematic must be reduced to the spreadsheet case That is 1 Remove VSWR and frequency effects a Behavioral filter have return loss which is a function of the ripple Set the ripple to something really small like 0 001 dB b Set all ports and stages to the same impedance c Replace S Parameters elements or other frequency dependent elements with attenuatots or amplifiers of the equivalent gain 2 Remove sneak path effects a Set isolations very high 100 dB b Set reverse isolation very high 100 dB 3 Remove gain compression effects a Gain compression is based on total node power not channel power All unwanted signals including noise will contribute to the total node power b Increase the P1dB PSAT 1P3 and IP2 points of all non linear stages 4 Remove image noise effects a Set the image rejection high 100 dB in all mixers be sure to reject the image frequency band not the desired channel band After making these changes you will get excellent correlation Spectrasys Gain Cascaded Gain Cascaded Noise Figure Intermods GAIN CGAIN CNF NF IM3 SPECTRASYS System
332. ns 261 297 Composite Spectrum 122 Comprtession ssseeee 44 53 157 Contatti Mia 148 Conducted Third Order Intermod Power 234 Console Window essere 270 Constant noise citcles sss 179 Constants mccoccononconononnos 148 179 COMU OR eg 205 Convergence 41 43 44 53 54 325 C planatiseeei eee notiert 277 Coppet 257 COS 145 COS etam eater estis 145 COUN Diecast ierit 145 148 150 Coupled Microsttip scenes 315 Creating New Data Files idas 158 Creating 158 Creation Equation 124 Current Dite tree eee DB10 DBMAG DC Analysis Overview eoccocincononnonconioniononionicnions 41 DC Analysis Properties 41 DC biasing DEPARA DEPIM ios 217 Decomposition 284 289 290 295 Deembedded ports arta 298 Deembedding e 281 283 343 De Embedding Algorithm 335 Default Operator 179 181 Default Simulation Data we 183 DEFAULT MOD file 174 Delete This Simulation Data 51 Detivativesisscan pedet ees 44 Desired Channel Powet 216 217 Diagonalization see 325 326 Dielectric Dielectric Constant sss 264 Dielectric loading sss 322 Dim 150 242 257 we 261 a 118 wee 283 Dimensions Dimensions Tab Directional Energy Dis
333. ntation and the results are often far more accurate You should use generalized S Parameters if the following three conditions hold 1 You are using normal deembedded ports Ports marked No Deembed or Internal are not appropriate for reporting generalized S Parametets so they ate normalized to 50 ohms if generalized parameters are requested 2 You have calculated the impedance of the lines at the ports using T LINE fot instance and they are 50 or 75 ohms 3 You have run EMPOWER but it calculated the port impedances to be a little different for example 47 instead of 50 ohms This error is generally a result of the grid size A finer grid would result in less error in the impedance In this case you know that your pott lines should be 50 ohms but EMPOWER reported 47 ohms If you then request Generalized S Parameters GENESYS will also use 47 ohms for the terminating impedance and a large part of the analysis error due to the grid will be cancelled The results will be close to the results obtained if you measured the circuit in a 50 ohm network analyzet To get generalized S Parameters from GENESYS Check the Generalized box in the EMPOWER properties dialog box When EMPOWER is run it outputs a file in the structured storage when run from GENESYS fot each port with impedance data with extensions R1 R2 R3 etc so for a 2 port network in file EMPOWER analysis EMT using Generalized impedance is equival
334. ntercept calculations are based on the actual power of closest interfering tone and the total intermod powet within the channel instead of the cascaded intermod equations All intercept and intermod levels will be based on the actual tone levels Cascaded intermod equations make dangerous assumptions that interfering tones are never attenuated Consequently cascaded intermod equations give erroneous results when modeling an entire receiver since IF filters typically attenuate the interfering tones SPECTRASYS doesn t suffer from this weakness and all intermod spectrums and measurements will be based on actual spectrum powers Manual When checked the Calculate Intermod Along Path mode is entered and the user must specify the interfering tones as well as a desited signal in the main channel so the correct in channel gain can be determined When unchecked the automatic IIP3 mode is entered and SPECTRASYS will create the two interfering tones and calculate the results Some of the following additional parameters are needed to complete the automatic IIP3 simulation Signal used for IIP3 OIP3 automatic and manual Specifies the offset frequency from the path channel frequency where the interfering tone is located that will be used to calculate the Input and Output Third Otder Intercepts IIP3 and OIP3 automatic In the automatic mode this frequency offset specifies the spacing between the desired signal which is in the channel and the first int
335. nts below You can see quite good agreement between the two To test the validity of the decompositional analysis the entire spiral was analyzed and the results are given in the second figure below This full analysis took houts on a 266MHz Pentium II and if the lengths of the lines in the spiral are changed it must be rerun DB S21 DB S11 EMPOWER Decomposition GENESYS 7 0 Graph Workspace Combine E lt Designs i Partl Layout Part2 Layout oof Graph n x Equations 5000 Freq MHz LLMRINT LZMRINT L3 MRIN1 W MRIN1 2 S MRINI 2 LIND3 4 r5 Er El E SS 0 0 1e 06 3000 7000 10000 0 40224 8 97009 3 40433 1 33748 14 4258 0 746666 3 64981 10 1519 0 40224 8 97009 3 40433 1 33748 0 0 0 0 DBIS21 DB S21 DB S11 ST 2000 7 10000 Losses A cutrent limitation of decomposition is that losses are not taken into account in multi mode transmission line sections or in reference plane shifts For the spiral inductor this means that the losses as calculated ate accurate for the nominal dimensions but any modification to the lengths using the multimode lines will not affect the calculated loss 295 Simulation In general if the deco
336. o box Add 11 and 22 to the measurement list and press OK You will see a Smith chart with input and output match Create a HARBEC simulation of the Amplifier schematic Set simulation options as shown 11 Simulation HARBEC Options xi avanca osetr Mame Freq MHz Order O gt Molise Tone Hz Maximum Moise Harmonics 16 Create an output graph named Spectrum to display power at port 1 Under Measurement in the graph properties type P1 power at node 1 The Simulations Data should be set to HB1 Amplifier 12 Walkthrough DC Linear HARBEC Will Input Spectrum Workspace HB Walkthru Al x Input Spectrum DBM P1 e 0 900 1800 2700 3600 4500 Freq MHz e DBM P1 Note When creating the output graph above be sure to choose HB1 Amplifier as the default Simulation Data or Equations 17 Create an output graph Under Measurement in the graph properties type time v2 and time v1 A x Default Simulation D ata or Equations nei Amplifier m n n o m n m n TARTE HE Left Y Axis Right Y Axis X Axis IV Auto Scale VV Auto Scale IV Auto Scale Log Scale e 10 ie 1 10 im 10 t Min Min Min Measurement Wizard Fs Io S Max 0 Max 10 Max 10 S Equation Wizard Divisions 10 Divisions 10 Divisons O Advanced Properties Enter the name of a parameter to graph or
337. o interfering tones needs to be such that intermods will actually fall into the main ot primary channel If these conditions are not met then no intermod power will be measured in the main channel This measutement is only available during the IM3 analysis pass Note The Calculate Intermods Along Path checkbox must be checked and properly configured in order to make this measurement See the Calculate Intermods Along Path section for information on how to configure these tests Remember intermod bandwidth is a function of the governing intermod equation For example if the intermod equation is 2F1 F2 then the intermod bandwidth would be 2BW1 BW2 Note Bandwidths never subtract and will always add The channel bandwidth must be set wide enough to include the entire bandwidth of the intermod to achieve the expected results The Automatic Intermod Mode will set the bandwidth appropriately Values Real value in Watts Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Desctiption Result Type DBM OIP3 output third order intercept in dBm MAG OIP3 magnitude of the output third order intercept in Watts Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield DBM OIP3 DBM OIP3 DBM OIP3 MAG OIP3 MAG OIP3 MAG OIP3 Not available on Smith Chart Conducted Third Order Intermod Power CIM3P This
338. o name The preprocessor then substitutes the text of the macro for the string text macro name All compiler directives are considered predefined macro names and so redefining a compiler directive as a macro name is not allowed A text macto can be also be defined with arguments to provide much mote flexibility However the use of macros can complicate symbolic debugging so the user should be careful in their use Examples define EPSSI 1 03594e 10 define KboQ P K P Q define strobe flag xName X if debug gt flag strobe n s og xName 1 0 X The macros ate then accessed in the code as factorl sqrt EPSSI EPSOX tox strobe 1 Vth Vth These are conditional compiler directives for optionally including lines of Verilog A source file ifdef checks for if variable name is defined If it is defined the lines following ifdef are included up to the endif directive If the variable name is not defined but an else directive exists this source is compiled The ifdef else and endif directives can appear anywhere in the Verilog A source file Examples ifdef Thermal module bjt c b e dt else module bjt c b e endif Note GENESYS does not support predefining a macro as is often done from a command line build You must define any necessary switches within the Verilog A source A useful method is to create a Verilog A file that does nothing but define macros and then i
339. o see how this is mapped onto the grid As in the circuit theory schematic there are two potts and each pott has two terminals However in EMPOWER instead of the ground plane being modeled as a simple short citcuit the effect of currents traveling through the box is taken into account EMPort Options When you first create a port it is automatically configured to be an external port with the proper characteristics to be placed on the end of a transmission line For many applications you will want to modify these characteristics when you place the port These characteristics are shown in the EM Port Properties dialog box which comes up automatically when the pott is placed and which can be accessed later by either double clicking on the port or by selecting the pott and choosing Details from the Edit menu A typical EM Port Properties dialog box is shown below The following sections describe the entries in this dialog box 281 Simulation 282 EM Port Properties Draw Size This has no effect on the simulation It controls the size that the port number appears on screen and on printouts Ref Plane Shift This parameter is only available if Port Type is set to Normal see below On most complete circuits this value can be left at zero A positive Reference Plane shift causes the deembedding to add extra line length to the circuit A negative value is mote common and causes the reference planes to move inside the box
340. og box If a large number of intermods are to be calculated due to a large number of input signals the best thing to do is to first establish the architecture and make sure that system is performing as expected for a small number of input signals It is much faster to optimize the architecture with a small number of input signals rather than wasting time waiting for complete system analysis for issues that can be resolved with far fewer input signals There ate also different intermod and harmonic calculation modes that can increase the simulation speed See the Calculate Intermods and Harmonics section for additional information of these modes Analyzer Mode During the system simulation the analyzer will create an analyzer trace for every node in the system Consequently for systems with large number of nodes the integrated analyzer traces alone can be time consuming if the analyzer properties are not optimized The simulation speed can be reduced by a careful selection of Analyzer Mode settings If large frequency ranges ate integrated with a small resolution bandwidth then the amount of data collected will be much larger and the simulation speed will decrease Furthermore enabling the Randomize Noise feature may also slow down the simulation In order to increase the simulation speed with the Analyzer Mode enabled the user can disable the Randomize Noise feature increase the Resolution Bandwidth and or limit the frequency
341. olution bandwidth of this sweeping filter The default resolution bandwidth is the Measurement Channel Bandwidth if no value has been specified Filter Shape This parameter determines the shape of the resolution bandwidth filter that is used for integration This filter shape is analogous to the resolution bandwidth filter shape in a spectrum analyzer However a brickwall filter can be created theoretically and is implemented in the software as a user selection Furthermore a more realistic filter can also be selected which is created from a Gaussian 3 element lowpass prototype The user is able to select three widths for this particular filter which are based on an integer number of channel bandwidths No spectrum integration will occur outside the width of this filter This filter width is used to reduce the amount of data collected saved and processed by SPECTRASYS Brickwall Ideal This filter is an ideal rectangular filter whose skirts are infinitely steep Gaussian to 100 dBc 30 Chan BW Data will be ignored that is farther than 30 channels away from 95 Simulation 96 the center frequency With this 3 element lowpass prototype the attenuation 30 channels from the center will be about 100 dBc Gaussian to 117 dBc 60 Chan BW Data will be ignoted that is farther than 60 channels away from the center frequency With this 3 element lowpass prototype the attenuation 30 channels from the center will be about
342. om of the level diagram These are the schematic symbols of the path of the level diagram The user can change any of the schematic element parameters by double clicking on the desired symbol directly on the level diagram The element parameters for that device will appeat and the user can edit those parameters directly The effects of these changes are shown immediately on the graph For the simple schematic below the noise powet along the main path was of interest The nodes along the path are 1 5 4 and 2 The level diagram shows the noise power at each node and the schematic element between each node This schematic symbol alleviates the need to refer back to the main schematic and allows changes to element parameters 121 Simulation 122 JE Workspace Getting Started 6 RFAMP 1 COUPLER1_1 20 dB 1 dB 5 dB 10 dB 1000 MHz 30 dB 0 dB Maint X D i S Da 6 ATTN_1 Bl Noise 3 ATTN_2 5 dB ad 4 BE Main Path Workspace Getting Started 6 Main Path Channel Noise Power 504 70 BA aee EPUM VUE AAA 80 90 100 DBM CNP 1104 120 130 1 150 i e DBM CNP For multiple connections at a node energy can be traveling in multiple directions For details on understanding the meaning of the node measurements in this case please refer to the section on Directional Energy Level diagrams and tables contain only tran
343. on section Sample Expressions Expression Value 1 2 3 7 1 2 3 9 4 3 64 3 4 3 192 19 4 4 75 19 4 4 19 4 3 1419942 2 2 5 524 1 True 5 4 0 False 2 4 143 amp 4 4 17 2 1 True 2 4 143 4 4 17 2 0 False SIN 180 lt 5 1 True Built in Functions Caution Standard trigonometric functions must have an argument in degrees and inverse standard functions return values in degrees Hyperbolic trigonometric functions use pure numbers not degrees ABS expression absolute value of expression For complex values returns magnitude Alternate form MAG expression ANG expression phase of a complex number returns between 180 and 180 degrees ANG360 expression phase of a complex number returns between 0 and 360 degrees ARCCOS expression inverse cosine cos Range Argument must be between 1 and t1 ARCCOSH expression inverse hyperbolic cosine 145 Simulation 146 ARCSIN expression inverse sine sint Range Argument must be between 1 and 1 ARCSINH expression inverse hyperbolic sine ARCTAN expression inverse tangent tant Alternate form ATN expression ARCTANH expression inverse hyperbolic tangent BESSELJO expression Calculates Bessel function JO of expression COMPLEX teal imag returns a complex number teal j imag CONTOUR exptession minContour maxContour stepSize smoothParm minX maxX minY maxY primaryGridSize secondaryGridSi
344. onics to be analyzed The larger the number of harmonics the mote accurately waveforms will be represented However the length 45 Simulation 46 of time to find a solution increases as roughly the cube of the number of frequencies Order must always be set large enough to model the majority of the energy in each branch current Typical numbers for mildly nonlinear circuits are 4 5 For circuits deep in compression square waves present the order may need to be 8 16 to achieve the desired accuracy Maximum Mixing Order Specifies the maximum combined order of signals to be simulated In the example shown all 4th order products will be calculates For example the 1900 2 1905 1 1800 1 95MHz the mixer third order intermodulation term is a 4th order term 2 1 1 and will be calculated This term only affects the mixing terms and will not override the order of individual sources specified in the frequency table Temperature The temperature in degrees Celsius at which to perform nonlinear analysis Maximum Analysis Frequency Frequency above which no nonlinear analysis is performed If not checked all frequency points in the analysis input frequencies their specified number of harmonics and intermods will be used Calculation Automatic Recalculation Checking this box will cause the harmonic balance simulation to be run any time there is a change in the design If the box is not checked the simulation must be run manuall
345. open coupled lines Since a flat response is well suited for linear interpolation few data points are required in the EMPOWER simulation In the EMPOWER options dialog the Co Simulation Sweep box is used to set up a simulation with mote points after lumped elements are added When GENESYS uses the EMPOWER results it replaces the lumped capacitances resulting in the bandpass response shown in the previous section 255 Simulation Real Time Tuning As stated before GENESYS creates ports internal to a layout structure containing lumped elements before invoking EMPOWER During calculation EMPOWER creates s parameter data with port data for all ports whether internal or external This allows GENESYS to tune the lumped elements while still using the EMPOWER data To see an example of tuning 1 Click inside the C2000 prompt in the Tune Window 2 Type a new value for the capacitor or tune using Page Up Page Down keys or the spin buttons The GENESYS screen below is shown after tuning the capacitors from 0 55 pF to 1 2 pF The response shown on the left in this figure is the SUPERSTAR linear simulation response The EMPOWER data is combined with the lumped elements in the rightmost response 4 GENESYS V7 0 _ nl x File Edi View Workspace Actions Tools Synthesis Window Help Oca smeloe Slt onageusr E1 amp y Designs F2000 Schema Layout Layout EG Simulations Data Sij EM1 Layout
346. or procedural assignment expression procedural assigument statement whete for analog for statement the format is for genvar assignment genvar_expression genvar assignment analog statement Accessing net and branch signals Signals on nets and branches are be accessed only by the access functions of the associated discipline The name of the net ot the branch is specified as the argument to the access function Examples Vin V in CurrentThruBranch I myBranch The analog behavior of a component can be controlled using events which have the characteristics e Events have no time duration e Events can be triggered and detected in different parts of the behavioral model e Events do not block the execution of an analog block e Events can be detected using the operator e Events do not hold any data e There can be both digital and analog events 77 Simulation 78 There ate two types of analog events global events and monitored events Null arguments ate not allowed in analog events cross function The cross function is used for generating a monitored analog event It is used to detect threshold crossings in analog signals when the expression crosses zero in the direction specified cross can control the timestep to accurately resolve the crossing The format is ctoss expr dir fime tol expr to where expr is required and dir time_tol and expr_tol ate optional arguments Th
347. or Equations 3 Enter S21 for the first measurement and S11 for the second measurement This instructs GENESYS to display a window containing EMPOWER data S21 and S11 will be displayed at 8000 9500 and 11000 MHz For a complete description of rectangular graphs see the GENESYS User s Guide The GENESYS display below shows the EMPOWER run with 3 sample points BE Graphi Workspace layonly LOL x a D a N Y D 3500 Freq MHz DB S21 DB S11 In this response the notch frequency appears to occur exactly at 9 5 GHz Or does it Let s add some frequency points to the EMPOWER simulation To re simulate adding more points 1 Double click EM1 under Simulations Data in the Workspace Window 2 Change the Number of Points prompt in the Electromagnetic Simulation Frequencies to 11 Click the Recalculate Now button 4 Close the EMPOWER log click on the X in the upper right corner of the window This will add to the previous EMPOWER simulation so that we have 11 instead of 3 data points EMPOWER will intelligently recalculate only the additional points EMPOWER Operation The figure below shows the simulation with 11 EMPOWER data points The notch frequency now appeats to be at 9 2 GHz Let s add the full 31 points to the EMPOWER simulation to ensute that we get the actual notch frequency Repeat the previous steps to
348. or yield DBICNR DBICNN DBICNNI MAG CNR MAG CNR Not available on Smith Chart Cascaded Noise Figure CNF This measurement is the cascaded noise figure in the main channel along the specified path The Cascaded Noise Figure is equal to the Channel Noise Power measurement at the output of stage n minus the Channel Noise Power measurement at the path input and the Cascaded Gain measurement at stage n as shown by CNF n CNP n CNP 0 CGAIN n dB where n stage number Note See the Channel Noise Powet and Cascaded Gain measurements to determine which types of signals are included or ignored in this measurement Values Real value numeric Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type DB CNF cascaded noise figure in dB MAG CNF numeric value of the cascaded noise figure Examples 212 Measurements SPECTRASYS Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield DB CNF DB CNF DB CNF MAG CNF MAG CNF Not available on Smith Chart Channel or Path Frequency CF Since each spectrum can contain a large number of spectral components and frequencies SPECTRASYS must be able to determine the area of the spectrum to integrate for various measurements This integration atea is defined by a Channel Frequency and a Channel M
349. ore being applied to the mixer LO ports The mixer outputs are combined back together to form the image reject mixer output Since both mixers have the same input source as well as LO source then all signals that have the same type frequency and bandwidth will have the same coherency number NOTE The coherency number is displayed in the spectrum identification information This will aid the user in understanding their circuit operation as well debugging any problems See the Spectrum Identification section for more information Coherent vs Noncoherent Addition Coherent addition is more conservative than noncoherent addition i e the coherent assumption indicated a less linear system than the noncoherent equations indicated Ina worst case scenario coherent addition should be used When designing low noise receiving systems it was found that well designed cascades usually behave as though the distortion products are adding up noncoherently For the most part these system have achieved the equivalent of noncoherent summation plus one ot two dB With wide band systems the cascaded SOI Second Order Intercept or TOI Third Order Intercept will stay at noncoherent levels over most of the frequency range of the system However over narrow frequency ranges the SOI and TOI will increase to coherent summation levels In a well designed system where the equivalent intercept points of all the devices ate equal the difference between
350. ort Modes button was clicked and the checkboxes in the Setup Modes dialog box were set to indicate that those inputs are modally related Caution Do not forget to setup the modes when you ate analyzing by decomposition The Mode Setup box turns ted if any inputs are modally related Improper mode setup is one of the most common errors in decomposition 292 EMPOWER Decomposition A similar set of steps was followed for Part2 The final step in decompositional analysis is to combine the pieces The Schematic COMBINE which does this is shown here The pieces used are NPO10 and NPO8 blocks under DEVICE in SCHEMAX for the data in PART1 and PART2 plus MMTLP8 models multi mode physical transmission lines found under T LINE for the interconnecting lines The data for the NPO10 is in WSP Simulations EMPart1 EMPOWER SS and the data for the NPO8 is in WSP Simulations EMPart2 EMPOWER SS Note Some users may find it easier to write a text Netlist to combine the pieces At Eagleware we find it easier to use SCHEMAX for this purpose but you may use whichever you feel most comfortable with tr hh A 3E EE uj z ES qu PEA CIN qi A A 1 Fa Whenever deembedded ports are used data files suitable for the
351. orts for one port elements box is checked in the EMPOWER options dialog See your reference manual for details In some situations you may want to place internal ports with X or Y directed currents These ports are much trickier to use manually since they are not referenced to ground For components in your layout EMPOWER will automatically place planar port and lumped elements so this section is for background or advanced applications This figure shows the configuration of these ports These ports can be more accurate for manually connecting lumped elements to EMPOWER data since the ports are a more accurately represent the physical connection of lumped elements 299 Simulation 300 The circuit shown in below contains an EMPOWER circuit which was drawn completely in LAYOUT The schematic for this network was blank It has 3 ports ports 1 and 2 are external and port 3 is internal with current direction Along X EMPOWER will create a 3 port data file for this circuit however you must be aware that port 3 will be a series connected port and cannot be used in the normal manner EAM A EE eS REET d ide SEES ERAN A IF e 9 m o z lt z m E x The data file created by EMPOWER can then be used in GENESYS as described in the previous section using WSP Simulations EM1 EMPOWER SS The circuit on the right uses the resulting data in a complete network First
352. ose all default values set Er 2 55 Height 31mil and press OK MM Substrate Properties x Name Substrate1 gt Copy From Description a ies Copy To Properties E Add Remove ame Bescipion Value ums Dielectric Constant i Loss Tangent Rho Resistivity 1 Metal Thickness 1 42 mil Sr metal Roughness 84e 3 mil Height Substrate Height 31 mil Set To Factory Defaults Cancel Help Z 5 We want to choose Bandpass as the type and Combline as the Subtype For this walkthrough we want to use the Chebyshev filter shape Your topology tab should look like what we have below NOTE Ignore locals errors created during this ptocess since the design has not been completed 346 EMPOWER Advanced M FILTER Example Topology Settings Options G Values Summary EET Undo T Type Bandpsss y Shape Chebyshev y Subtype C Stepped C Interdigital C End Coupled C Elliptic C Edge Coupled C Hairpin Combline User File Browse Issues Dutput Resistance 50 3dB Frequencies are 2099 94MHz to 2300 06MHz 6 The next step is to specify all the filter parameters in the Settings tab as we have below Topology Settings Options G Values Summary Optimize Undo 0 0432 3 2100 2300 30 Lamata nt ita linan Cane lac Estimate Order Dutput Resistance 50 3dB
353. ous from the picture that the current density is higher on the via hole side that is closer to the microsttip line segment empower Viewer V6 5 lol File View Xv amp Mag Sold Freq GHz 2 Q a oe e 4 o Top Front Side Oblique EMPOWER Viewer and Antenna Patterns empower Viewer V6 5 o x Eile View Z Mag Solid Freq GHz 2 elol e a 2 Top Front Side Oblique 0 023 0 011 0A Viewer Theory The EMPOWER viewer is a program designed to read to process and to visualize the current distribution data created by EMPOWER To obtain a current distribution inside a structure the excitation condition must be defined This mirrors a real measurement where there ate incident and reflected waves The viewer depicts the case with one incident wave at one input The excitation conditions are passed to EMPOWER in the command line when running EMPOWER text files When EMPOWER is launched from GENESYS the excitation conditions ate automatically defined from the EMPOWER Setup dialog box when the Generate Viewer Data check box is active If Generate Viewer Data is selected the default incident wave is the first eigenwave of the first input The input number can be changed in the Port number to excite box of the EMPOWER Setup dialog and the input mode number can be changed in the Port mode to excite box The conttol information about what input and what mode are actually ex
354. ow these parameters work it is useful to understand a little about how the simulator searches To find a solution the simulator uses a Newton Raphson search to find the solution It starts with an initial guess and calculates an error function The derivative of the error function is used to extrapolate the next point In harmonic balance partial derivatives exist for every node and every frequency The full matrix of partial derivatives is known as a Jacobian Jacobian Calculation The full Jacobian is usually the most accurate way to determine the next point However the matrix can be very large requiring a lot of time to calculate and invert To make the simulator faster HARBEC generally tries Fast Newton steps first A Fast Newton step calculates only a portion of the Jacobian and uses it to calculate the next point For many circuits the entire solution can be found quickly using only Fast Newton steps The default setting for HARBEC is to automatically switch between using Fast Newton and full Jacobian steps Artificial intelligence techniques are used to determine which technique to use and when Usually the automatic switching will find the solution quickly However for certain circuits it will be better to always use the Jacobian or never use the Jacobian On the HARBEC Options dialog box you can specify either Automatic Always or Nevet use of the Full Jacobian Experimenting with different values may improve convergence
355. owet measurement at the Image Frequency Values Real value in Watts Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type DBM IMGP mixer image channel power in dBm MAG IMGP _ magnitude of the mixer image channel power in Watts Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield DBM IMGP DBM IMGP MAG IMGP MAG IMGP Not available on Smith Chart Image Rejection Ratio IMGR This measurement is the ratio of the Channel Power to Image Channel Power along the specified path as shown by IMGR n DCP n IMGP n dB where n stage number For this particular measurement basically two channels exist both with the same Channel Measurement Bandwidth 1 main channel and 2 1st mixer image channel The only difference is between these two channels are their frequencies one is at the Channel Frequency and the other is at the Mixer Image Frequency 225 Simulation See the Desired Channel Power and Image Channel Power measurements to determine which types of signals are included or ignored in this measurement Values Real value numeric Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Desctiption Result Type DB IMGR mixer image rejection ratio in dB MAG IMGR numeri
356. p Capacitor footprint has been used for each of the lumped capacitors Whenever a lumped element is used for an EMPOWER run GENESYS creates an internal ports for the element These ports are placed 253 Simulation e If Use Planar Ports for two port elements is checked in the EMPOWER properties box one port is created for 2 terminal elements like resistors or capacitors which are aligned horizontally or vertically e nall other cases an internal port is used for each terminal of the element This port is placed at the center of the pad footprint and EMPOWER writes data for each port created whether internal or external e The 1 and 2 ports pictured in the figure above are examples of external ports Ports ate described in the External Ports and the Internal Ports sections e This is a powerful technique since real time tuning can be employed in GENESYS once the EMPOWER data for has been calculated Simulating the Layout 254 Double click EM1 in the Workspace Window This displays the EMPOWER Options dialog shown below EMPOWER Options Click the Recalculate Now button If anything has been modified since the last EMPOWER run this launches EMPOWER to simulate the layout EMPOWER Operation Note EMPOWER has been given a lot of intelligence to determine when it needs to calculate Clicking Recalculate Now will not do anything if EMPOWER believes it is up to date To force EMPOWER to recalculate
357. pace Self Resonance O Ea Resonant frequency in Radians Second W 0 2 PI F0 1 6 Equivalent series inductance in nH L 1e9 C 1e 12 w0 2 14 This completes the model creation Choose Save from the File menu to update the model file Next let s create a schematic using the new model 15 Choose New from the File menu 169 Simulation 16 Draw a schematic consisting of only an input a series capacitor and an output as shown below don t set any parameters yet 1 2 17 Double click the capacitor symbol to display its Properties dialog 18 Click the Model button to open the Change Model dialog 19 Set the category to SELF RESONANT wsp or lt AI gt to see every available model Then change the model to SELF RESONANT CAPACITOR as shown below and click OK Change Model c program files genesys version 7 0 examples SELF_RESONANT wsp 3 A O MM 20 Now the capacitor dialog changes to contain all the new model parameters as shown below Part Properties For SELF RESONANT CAPACITOR 21 Right click on the Simulations Data node in the Workspace Window as shown below 170 User Models 3e Equations Substrates Optimizations Yield Notes 22 Add a linear simulation and enter the parameters as shown below Linear Simulation Properties 23 Right click the Outputs node in the Workspace Window as shown below 24 Add a rectangular graph and plot 1
358. pacing X and Grid Spacing Y These control the cell size for the EMPOWER run as well as the grid snap feature in LAYOUT When using the EMPOWER Grid Style there will be LAYOUT snap points between each grid line which allow lines to be 263 Simulation 264 centered between two grid points if necessary They are often referred to as dx and dy and should be small with respect to a wavelength at the maximum frequency to be analyzed preferably less than wavelength 20 and always less than wavelength 10 Box Width and Box Height These are the box size for EMPOWER simulation They cotrespond directly to the SIZE statement in the TPL file The number of cells across the box equal to Width or Height divided by Grid Spacing X or Y is displayed for your convenience and can be changed to adjust the page width Note Any metal put down completely outside the box will be ignored by EMPOWER This can be used to your advantage to temporarily or permanently remove metal or components from the EMPOWER simulation Default Viahole Layers The Start Layer and End Layer combo boxes control the default layers for the viaholes These can be overridden individually for each viahole The grid in EMPOWER is a truly three dimensional grid rectangular lattice Z Directed currents and ports ate mapped from the intersection points to the top ot bottom covet There ate two caveats metal and ports in the z direction are modeled as one continuous curr
359. part on the schematic The basic steps in creating a new Verilog A Model are 1 Open the Tools Options Dialog go to the Startup Tab and click the Models button to open the Model Manager You must place your Verilog A source files in one of the directories listed here or you must add a new directory Create a text file containing the Verilog A source code in a text editor such as Windows Notepad and save it into the directory chosen in step 1 Be sure to use the extension va on the file See the Verilog A Tutorial for information about creating a Verilog A file Exit and restart GENESYS At startup GENESYS automatically compiles any out of date files by compating the time and date of the Verilog A va file to the time and date of the compiled model library cml file Note GENESYS only compiles Verilog A files on startup You must restart GENESYS if you make a change to the Verilog A soutce 4 If there are errors shown in your Verilog A code fix them and restart GENESYS When the model successfully compiles a Compiled subdirectory is created in the same directory as the Verilog A source file GENESYS creates a compiled model library cml file and a model mod file for each Verilog A file To use your new model a Click the Mote button on the tight side of the schematic toolbar Advanced Modeling Kit b Choose the Category with the filename of the mod file created by GENESYS c Choose the d
360. ple you can optimize bias resistor values to achieve a desired collector cutrent and voltage for a bipolar transistor See the walkthrough DC Analysis Verifying Transistor Parameters for an example It is located in one of the following sections To add a DC simulation 1 Click the New Item button in the Workspace Window 2 Select Add DC Analysis from the Analysis submenu 3 Complete the DC Analysis Properties dialog box For details see the Reference manual To open double click ot create a DC Simulation DC Analysis Properties Xx Simple Detect m Cancel v Automatic Recalculation 41 Simulation 42 The following table shows optional simulation parameters that can be set in the options field note more than one simulation can be added by placing a semicolon between each parameter Ex gmin 1e 6 reltol 1e 4 HARBEC DC amp Harmonic Balance Harmonic Balance Overview The HARBEC harmonic balance simulator simulates the steady state performance of nonlinear circuits Circuits can be stimulated with a variety of periodic signals voltage cutrent and power such as single CW tones pulsed waves or dual tones Complex waveforms can be constructed by combining various periodic signals HARBEC makes this through the custom voltage and current sources The two assumptions that harmonic balance uses are 1 the signals in the circuit can be accurately modeled using a finite number of
361. ple evaluation of the high and low current density region the time average values of the current density is more practical To obtain this plot switch to Magnitude mode by clicking on the Real button The viewer in this mode is shown below The results are as expected for a transmission line segment The current density is highest at the edges and lowest in the middle Note that the absolute values of the current density at the edges are greatly affected by the grid cell size used A smaller grid cell size increases the edge current density However integrated values of cutrent density are nearly invatiable as they should be Mexiner 1972 If the exact current density values are required we recommend choosing a grid cell size equal to the metalization thickness empower Viewer V6 5 BEES Eile View XY 85 Mag Solid Freq GH2 115 ele s Es s Lo te Fo site osie To investigate the various current components you may switch from the XY mode to the X mode XY X Y Z button You see only a small change in the graph because the current flows primarily along the line segment as expected Note however the component visualization modes X Y or Z are more accurate because the values displayed correspond directly to the values calculated by EMPOWER no interpolation is necessary for these modes The absolute value of the current density is currently displayed Switch to the Real mode using the menu View Menu Switche
362. ples module resistot p n inout p n 81 Simulation 82 electrical p n module modName outPort inPort output outPort input inPort electrical out in Ports can support vectors buses as well Analog Functions Analog functions provide a modular way for a user defined function to accept parameters and return a value The functions ate defined as analog or digital and must be defined within modules The analog function is of the form analog function real integer function_name input_declaration statement_block endfunction The zuput declaration describes the input parameters to the function as well as any variables used in the statement block input passed_parameters teal parameter_list The statement_block and analog function e Can use any statements available for conditional execution e Can not use access functions e Can not use contribution statements or event control statements e Must have at least one input declared the block item declaration declares the type of the inputs as well as local variables used e Can not use named blocks e Can only reference locally defined variables or passed variable arguments The analog function implicitly declares a variable of the same name as the function function name This variable must be assigned in the statement block its last assigned value is passed back Example analog function real B of T input B T T NOM XTB real B T T NOM
363. port networks only These parameters aid in determining the stability of the 2 pott network If S12 of a device is not zero a signal path will exist from the output to the input This feedback path creates an opportunity for oscillation The stability factor K is K 1 Su 2 D Q Si S2 where D S11825 S12821 From a practical standpoint when K gt 1 S11 lt 1 and S22 lt 1 the two port is unconditionally stable These ate often stated as sufficient to insure stability Theoretically K gt 1 by itself is insufficient to insure stability and an additional condition should be satisfied One such parameter is the stability measure B1 which should be greater than zero B1 1 Su 2 D 2 0 Note See the section on S Parameters for a detailed discussion of stability analysis Values Real value versus frequency Simulations Linear Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators None Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield K stability factor stability factor B1 stability measure stability measure Not available on Smith Chart Input Output Plane Stability Circles SB1 SB2 A output stability circle is a locus of load impedances for which the input reflection coefficient S11 is unity This locus is plotted on a Smith chart and is only available for 2 port networks This locus is a circle with radius Rout about
364. press a wizard button to guide you through the process of creating a measurement Note Be sure to select HB1 Ampifier as the default simulation data or Equations here 13 Simulation 14 lll Output Time Workspace HB Walkthru Output Time TIME V2 TIME V1 e TIME v2 Time ns TIME V1 CREATING AN OUTPUT VS INPUT POWER GRAPH 1 latin to Sweep EMMA Variable to Sweep mew y Automatic Recalculation Create an new variable to sweep in the equation block as follows InPwr 40 Substitute this variable name for the 40 dBm AC power on the input port Create a parameter sweep and naming it Input Power Sweep and specifying the parameters as shown below Parameter Sweep Properties xi Sweep Range Start Value 40 Stop Value o Factory Defaults M Type Of Sweep Linear Number of Points 10 10 aa C Log Points Decade C Linear Step Size 40 35 556 31 111 26 667 22 222 17 778 v C List of Values Clear List Walkthrough DC Linear HARBEC 3 Adda rectangular graph and specify the properties as shown Default Simulation Data or Equations In Pwr Sweep Amplifier E 00010 0 50 FARAH ls Left Y Axis Right Y Axis X Axis IV Auto Scale IV Auto Scale IV Auto scale Log Scale Units Min 200 Min zo Min fe Frequency MHz y Max
365. ptions Desin To Simulate SA Measurement Bandwidth Channel fi MHz You must enter the channel bandwidth here before simulation Sources ourcel 100 MHz 50 dBm 0 Deg 1 Pts aaa Deseription ASA e A Nominal Impedance 50 Ohms Recalculate Now V Automatic Recalculation Delete anna aa Litt tt Cancel Arpy Hee 3 Type a in front of the 50 for the source power The power of the source should look like 50 gt Mm gt spectrum Click OK to close the soutce dialog box Type 1 question mark followed by 1 in the channel measurement bandwidth Click OK to accept the changes to the system simulation Double click Output Spectrum in the wotkspace window to open the output 8 Tune the input power and bandwidth Try tuning the resolution bandwidth to 3 MHz and the input power to 0 dBm This will allow you to see a good picture of the resolution bandwidth It also clearly distinguishes the power coming from the input containing a signal and the power coming from the output containing only noise Note The walkthrough at this point is saved in Examples SPECTRASYS Walkthrough 4 Tuning Parameters WSP Add an Amplifier Let s add an amplifier to this circuit Modify the schematic to look like the following Don t fotget that you can hold Alt down while moving the output to break the connection to the resistor The RF
366. pull data simulation from the first dialog Oye IL urn ND From the second measurement wizard box select Contours or Plotpoints from the first column Select the data to plot from the second column Click OK to close the measurement wizard box and click OK to close the Smith Chart properties box You should then see contours like shown above 206 Measurements SPECTRASYS This measurement is the integrated power of the specified adjacent channel All adjacent channels are relative to the main channel identified by the Channel Frequency and Channel Measurement Bandwidth Consequently channels exist above and below the main reference channel frequency The user can specify which side of the main channel the adjacent channel is located on along with the channel number The channel number is relative to the main channel Therefore channel 1 would be the first adjacent channel channel 2 would be the second adjacent channel and so on U Upper Side L Lower Side n Channel Number any integer 7 0 For example ACPL2 is the power of the second adjacent channel below that specified by the channel frequency If CF was 100 MHz and the channel bandwidth was 1 MHz then the main channel would be 99 5 to 100 5 MHz Consequently then ACPL2 would then be the integrated channel power between 97 5 and 98 5 MHz and ACPL1 would be the integrated channel powet between 98 5 and 99 5 MHz Note Only the first 2 adjacent channels on
367. put Saturation Power 22 Stage Output Second Order Intercept 231 Stage Output Third Order Intercept 231 Idle ea rover Stripline Subdirectories ccce etae Reip 337 SubStrates sore O A 257 Substrate layer 257 264 Substrate thickness sss 275 Su btractiOnus iive ra aec ERR te 144 Superconductots sees 257 SUPETS tat T M 1 Surface Roughness sss 257 Suspended Microstrip 257 Syet ieceri REPRE 274 325 Symmetry processing 340 Synthesis 132 System Models 97 System Simulation ite tenes 88 System Simulation Parameters 23 89 90 94 97 System Simulation Parameters Options Tab97 System Simulation Tips sss 135 Temperature Term Termination A OO 35 179 yo RE 338 Text Model Definitions 174 Thick Metal eet tt eter s 279 Thicknesses E 257 Thinning Out see 275 325 Third Order Intermod Analysis 219 JThird order Intercept x5 eee 53 TOR ota 157 T TN Bici eee eee oe een 237 Toggle Background Colot 311 Tolerances esee 41 44 Tone Channel Frequency ss 214 Tone Channel Powet eee 218 Top Covet 257 323 Total Node Powet eee 237 Total Third Order Intermod Power Transmission Line Transmission lines Transmitted Ener
368. quency The measurements are associated with the network terminations The frequency range and intervals ate as specified in the Linear Simulation dialog box A port number 7 is used to identify the port ZPORTi is the reference impedance for pott 7 Values Complex value versus frequency Simulations Lineat Default Format Table RECT Graph RE Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Descipion Result Type RECT ZPORT1 real imaginary parts RE ZPORT2 real part MAGANG ZPORT Linear magnitude and angle in range of 180 to 180 Other Operators MAG ANG ANG360 IM MAGANG360 Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield ZPORT2 RE ZPORT2 RECT ZPORT2 RECT ZPORT Shows real imaginary parts for all ports MAG ZPORT 1 Linear Magnitude of ZPORT2 Linear Magnitude of ZPORT1 ZPORT eu Shows real imaginary parts of all ports Not available on Smith Chart 199 Measurements Nonlinear Port Power Pport This power measurement is the RMS power delivered at the port The port is identified by a port designator number Values Real value in specified units Simulations Nonlinear dc analysis Default Format Table DBM Graph DBM Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type DBM P1 RMS power at port 1 Real Other Operators DB MAGI ANGI ANG360 J REI IM Examp
369. r measurement It s always a good idea to add this frequency measurement to a table so the user knows that all parameters have been correctly specified Furthermore when a mixer is encountered the user will know exactly which frequency is being used for the offset channel power measurement The OCP measurement can be added to a level diagram or a table to show the power of the phase noise as it travels along the specified path Coherency Coherency Since all signals in SPECTRASYS are treated on individual basis so must coherency for each of the spectrums created during the simulation Coherent signals will add in voltage and phase whereas non coherent signals will add in power For example if two coherent voltages had the same amplitude and phase the resulting power would be 6 dB higher If they were exactly 180 degrees out of phase having the same amplitude the two signals would cancel each other If the two signals where non coherent then the power would only increase by 3 dB irrespective of the phase SPECTRASYS System Some of the coherency of SPECTRASYS can be controlled by the uset The user can determine whether intermods and harmonics add coherently and whether mixer output signals consider the LO signal when determining coherency See the Calculate Tab of the System Simulation Dialog Box for more information on this setting How it Works When a new spectrum is created a coherency number is assigned to each spectrum These co
370. range over which a spectrum analyzer trace will be created See the Analyzer Mode section for additional information Ports The standard input INP and standard output OU T ports are much more flexible than other ports used in GENESYS Soutces can be created and managed through the system simulation dialog box Sources can be applied to both input and output potts Functions like Step and Repeat Added Noise and Phase Noise ate not available except through the system simulation dialog box SPECTRASYS System Noise Noise points can be added in such a way to see filter shapes in spectrum plots Potential noise interpolation problems can be eliminated when enough noise points have been added at the correct places so that filtered noise spectrum represents the shape of the filter However the more noise points that are simulated generally the longer it takes the simulation to run See the Calculate tab for more information on inserting noise points and noise calculations Mixers The more Low Signals used to create new mixed spectrum when All Signals Within x dBC of strongest is selected the longer simulation time will result since more spectrums are being calculated 137 Parameter Sweeps Parameter Sweep 3D graphs in GENESYS requite parameter sweeps to generate a third dimension fot plotting Parameter Sweeps give you this third dimension by adjusting a tuned variable repeating another simulation for ea
371. rces in the regions where line conductors approach the walls of the volume It is assumed that the currents inside the input and the lumped element regions are constant in the direction of current flow and the corresponding electric field component along the region is constant across it Thus the integral of current across the region gives an integral current and integral of the electric field along the region gives an integral voltage for the region The desired solution of the electromagnetic problem is an immitance matrix relating the integral voltages and cutrents in the port and lumped element regions This is actually a kind of Green s function contraction on the port and lumped element regions After connection of the lumped elements the immitance matrix can be transformed into a generalized Y or S matrix using the simultaneous diagonalization method see the de embedding section Thus we have a problem formulation that is appropriate for a wide range of microwave and mm wave devices such as planat filters dividers combiners matching circuits phase shifters attenuators diplexers amplifiers as well as their components The method of partial discretization later called the method of lines MoL is as old as partial differential equations and the finite difference approach to their solution Traces of it can be found in the 18th century works of J L Lagrange Its first conscious usage for the numerical solution of elliptical proble
372. rcles 1 5 2 2 5 3 and 6 dB less than optimal noise figure GA Available gain circles None Circle GA Circles GP Power gain circles None Circle GP Circles GU1 Unilateral gain circles at port 1 None Circle GUI Circles GU2 Unilateral gain circles at port 2 None Circle GU2 Circles Can only be used on 2 port networks Gain circles are only available for 2 port networks Circles are shown at 0 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 dB less than optimal gain In GA and GP if K lt 1 then the OdB circle is at GMAX and the inside of this circle is shaded as an unstable region Note On a graph or in optimization measurements which use DBANG by default show the dB part measurements which use MAGANG show the magnitude and measurements which use RECT show the real part Note For port numbers greater that 9 a comma is used to separate port numbers For example on a 12 port device some of the S Parameters would be specified as follows 1 11 12 2 812 11 8122 180 Measurements Overview Nonlinear Measurements Tip All available measurements and their operators for a given circuit or sub circuit with their appropriate syntax are shown in the measurement wizatd To bring up the measurement wizard select measurement wizard from the graph properties dialog box Meas Desctiption Default Operator Shown on Smith Chart V node Peak Voltage at node node is the node number or MAG the name of the node as specifie
373. re that EM results are available at all frequencies so that the data will not need to be interpolated or extrapolated for harmonic balance analysis Max Critical Freq MHz Specifies the highest important frequency that will be analyzed on any run of this circuit MAXFRQ is specified in the units defined in the DIM block The default units ate MHz Parameters of the solution quality thinning out thresholds and lengths of lines for de embedding are based on the maximum critical frequency value In other words this value influences both accuracy of simulation and calculation time Decreasing the value accelerates simulation but may increase model error especially at frequencies above the value On the other hand an unnecessarily high value may slow down the solution without visible improvements in accuracy Note An important reason to specify MAXFRQ By default this value is set equal to the highest sweep frequency specified in EMFRQ Even a small change of its value may cause the grid to change forcing recalculation of de embedding parameters and unnecessarily increasing simulation time as a consequence This change will also change the answer slightly with disastrous results if you are merging data This will not happen if you use MAXFRQ It is also important to remember to update it if you change the frequency range substantially Co Simulation Sweep Specifies the frequencies at which to run simulate the lumped elements EMPOWER d
374. red actoss functions or with the main Equation Window An example function to calculate the inductance that resonates with a capacitot at a given frequency 154 Equation Reference FUNCTION RESL C F L is in nH C is in pF F is in MHz FHz 1e6 F CFarads 1e 12 C Omega 2 PI FHz LHenties 1 Omega Omega CFarads Return LHenries 1e9 An example which uses this function is L RESL 100 50 Find L to resonate 100pF at 50 MHz You could also type RESL 100 50 into a part value in SCHEMAX Functions should go at the end of the global equations in yout workspace If you have functions you want to save permanently save your workspace in the EAGLE MODEL directory Multiple functions can be placed in one file The functions will then be automatically loaded when GENESYS is started For advanced uses you can pass variables by reference which means that the function can directly modify the variables passed in To pass a variable by reference put the word BYREF in front of the name For example FUNCTION DOUBLE BYREF X BYREF Y X X 2 Y Y 2 RETURN 0 Calling this function doubles the variables passed in For example A 5 B 6 IGNORE DOUBLE A B After this call A 10 and B 12 Notice that all functions must return a value even if you will ignore it as in this case GENESYS has the capability to call programs you have written The techniques for doing this are beyond the scope of this manual If you are interested in this capabi
375. represent the intermod or harmonic Maximum Order This option is used to limit the order of the spectrums created in the simulation This limit applies to all non linear elements in SPECTRASYS such as amplifiers mixers multipliets dividers etc Each model has a limitation on the maximum order that it can generate Please refer to the element help to determine the order limit for each model Calculate Noise When checked SPECTRASYS will calculate noise The option must be enabled for SPECTRASYS measurements that use noise i e Cascaded Noise Figure Every component in the schematic will create noise A complex noise correlation matrix is used to determine the noise power for each element at every node System Temperature This is the global ambient temperature of the entire schematic under simulation This is the temperature needed to determine the thermal noise power level For convenience SPECTRASYS will automatically calculate the resulting thermal noise power and display it just below the edit field Thermal Noise Automatically calculated info display that shows the thermal noise power given the specified temperature Noise Points for Entire Bandwidth This is the number of points used to represent the entire band of noise Noise will automatically be created beginning at the frequency specified by Ignore Frequency Below and ending at the frequency specified by Ignore Frequency Above These noise points will be uniformly dis
376. requency is determined by adding the offset specified in the Signal used for IIP3 OIP3 system analysis parameter to the Channel Frequency fot the given path The Calculate Intermods Along Path option must be enabled to make this measurement As with other frequency measurements SPECTRASYS is able to deal with frequency translation through mixers frequency multipliers etc Values Real value in MHz Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators None Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield TCF TCF 214 Measurements SPECTRASYS Not available on Smith Chart Channel Noise Power CNP This measurement is the integrated noise power in the main channel along the specified path For example if the Channel Measurement Bandwidth was specified to 1 MHz and the Channel Frequency was 2000 MHz then the CNP is the integrated noise power from 1999 95 to 2000 05 MHz This measurement includes ONLY NOISE traveling in FORWARD path direction through the node that fall within the main channel Values Real value in Watts Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Desctiption Result Type DBM CNP channel noise power in dBm MAG CNP magnitude of the channel noise power in Watts Examples Measurement Result in
377. requency Below lower frequency limit to the highest frequency limit of Ignore Spectrum Frequency Above will be processed by the analyzer for every node in the system In some cases this may be vety time consuming In order to improve the simulation speed and just process the area of interest frequency limits can be enabled to restrict the computation range of the analyzer Start This is the beginning frequency of the analyzet Stop This is the ending frequency of the analyzer Step This is the frequency step size between analyzer data points The step size can be reduced until the SPECTRASYS System maximum number of simulation points of 20 000 is reached Number of Simulation Points The number of simulation points used for the graph is determined internally in SPECTRASYS This parameter cannot be changed by the user Since SPECTRASYS can deal with large frequencies ranges the amounts of data collected fot a single spectrum analyzer trace could be enormous Furthermore the analyzer function is not a post processing function and the number of simulation points cannot be changed without rerunning the simulation In order to better control the amount of data collected which is propottional to the simulation time SPECTRASYS internally determines the number of simulation points to use Simulation Speed Ups During the system simulation the analyzer will create an analyzer trace for direction of travel for evety node in the system
378. riable The assignment statement calculates the value of the expression and then gives the value to the specified variable Variables ate not case sensitive for example VAR and var ate the same Accuracy is IEEE double precision about twelve digits The format is Variablename Expression Examples X 2 R 4 3 2 4 9 8 Voltage 2 R Current Assignments can define a value to be a variable which allows that variable to be tuned optimized or included in the Monte Carlo analysis All variable names must start with an alpha character The rest of the name may contain letters numbers and the underscore _ character The tune statement format is VariableName Value Examples X 2 Large R 3 54e 16 The tune statement must be a single assignment not an expression Therefore the following statement is illegal X 2 2 WRONG This statement creates a reference to an expression expression must be a simple variable array element or post processed data This can make your equations faster and easier to write The format of the reference statement is REF Variable expression Example B 5 REF A B A now points to B 141 Simulation 142 C A A C now equals 10 A C B and indirectly A now equals 10 D VECTOR 20 REF A D C A points to D 10 A 3 14 D 10 now equals 3 14 A line is considered a comment if the first character in the line is an apostrophe Any patt of a line can be a comment and every
379. ring an EMPOWER run from GENESYS or by using the VOLTAGE keyword when desctibing a LAYER in a TPL file In general you should check Slot type structure whenever the metalization layer has mote lossless metal than open space This is often the case in a slot type structure such as coplanar waveguide The answer will always be identical but you will save orders of magnitude of memory and simulation time by ensuring that this checkbox is set to the right value Note This setting has no effect on z directed metal viaholes etc which is always calculated as currents There is a caveat when describing lossy problems with this option All non ideal metal must be analyzed so if the metal in your problem is lossy turning on Slot type structure will result in both the air and the metal being analyzed which will have a disastrous effect on memoty and time requirements Be sure that your metal layers are set to lossless if you check the slot type structure box The first part of an EMPOWER run involves taking Fourier Transforms of the grid These transforms will tun much faster if the number of cells along the each side of the box is of the form 223 gt 5 7411 13f where e and f are either zero or one and a b c and d are arbitrary integers In other words a circuit with a box 512 cells by 512 cells 28 by 28 will analyze much faster than a circuit with a box 509 cells by 509 cells 509 is prime Making 277 Simulation 278 one sid
380. rmation which can be used to double check your setup is inserted into the listing file Show detailed progress messages Turning this option off suppresses almost all output in the EMPOWER log The listing file is not affected Turning it off can dramatically speed up very small runs Command Line Some options are available which are not shown on this dialog box One common example is the Oy option which controls the size of the box for line analysis NC If this option is used EMPOWER will allow de embedded ports to be away from the wall This option is especially useful for finline and slotline configurations VM Allow virtual memory usage To solve a complex problem EMPOWER always limits usage of computer virtual memory hard disk space in a rational way It will not use it for some numetically intensive parts of the simulation The option VM tells EMPOWER to use virtual memory more fteely But even with this option the program stops calculations if substantial hard disk space is involved in some parts of the simulation Check the MEMORY lines in the listing file to have an idea how much memory your computer lacks or how to reduce the problem Sg Use an alternate method of thinning out Global thinning Can reduce memory requirements under some circumstances Oz Use a smaller line segment 7 times smaller for de embedding calculations Can speed up line analysis IT Output viewer data file in text format PLX
381. rt on the schematic to use these Features Initial Frequency Minimum Search Frequency le 3 MHz Maximum Search Frequency 1000 MHz Number Of Points 1000 C Use Oscillator Solver Use Oscillator Port Frequency And Amplitude As Specified Edit Oscillator Port Frequency not Found Amplitude 0 1 Display Spectrum And Waveform Graphs OK Cancel A Help Oscillator Tab Initial Frequency Find Initial Oscillator Port Frequency Calculates and fills in the frequency of oscillation for an oscillator port in the schematic using a linearization frequency dependent Y matrix of the nonlinear response of the circuit Minimum Search Frequency The smallest frequency to search for the frequency of oscillation Maximum Search Frequency The largest frequency to search for the frequency of oscillation Number of Points the number of frequencies in the above range linearly spaced to seatch for the frequency of oscillation Harmonic Balance Calculation Options Use Oscillator Solver Perform nonlinear calculation of oscillation frequency then use that frequency for HarBEC simulation HARBEC DC amp Harmonic Balance Use Oscillator Port Frequency and Amplitude as Specified Use frequency and amplitude calculated from above Initial Frequency linearized calculation for the HarBEC simulation Edit Oscillator Port Manually edit the frequency and amplitude of the oscillator pott
382. rtion of the current values Mag Displays the magnitude or time averaged values of the currents Ang Displays the phase delay of the current values F Solid Wire Button This button toggles the type of surface plot to display Wire Displays a witeframe vetsion of the cutrent patterns A wireframe is created by drawing the outlines of the EMPOWER grid cutrents without filling the resulting polygons Solid Displays a solid surface plot of the current patterns This is created by filling the wireframe polygons G Freq GHz This box shows the simulation frequency in GHz for which the current image data is being displayed This box is restricted to frequencies that EMPOWER has created data for The value can be increased by clicking the button see I below and decreased by clicking the button see H below H Decrease Frequency Button EMPOWER Viewer and Antenna Patterns Decteases the current frequency see G above If you are already at the lowest calculated frequency then this button has no effect I Increase Frequency Button Increases the current frequency see G above If you are already at the highest calculated frequency then this button has no effect J Clockwise Button Rotates the current image clockwise in the plane of the screen The center of the viewer image window is always the center of rotation This option can also be selected by pressing Page Down K Counter Clockwise Bu
383. s F BL us Grid Spacingx 10 JV Show Box Mils TA 2 C Custom E Grid Spacing Y 10 IV Show Grid Dots v Show EMPOWER Grid r Object Dimensions Box Width X eso I e4 Cells Line Width 25 Box Height Y gn eo Cells Pad Width 50 Origin 0 Jo Drill Diameter so m Drawing Options 3 Widths 34 Port Size eo 25 Rot Snap Angle so 30 50 A JT Muli Place Parts Drawing Style gt r Default Viahole Layers Solid Opaque Add New X Ray mode Top Layer m TOP METAL C Hollow Bottom Layer m Bottom Cover Cancel Apply Help 10 Now we need to slightly edit our layout The ultimate goal is for the resonators dimensions to be an exact multiple of the grid dimensions In this case the spacing between resonators is very important therefore we will not change them 349 Simulation 350 to much First we need to change some of the dimensions in the equations block Change the Lead_MFilter1 IL2_MFilter1 IL1_MFilter1 and S1_MFilter1 to the values as show below Also be sure to remove the question mark since we will not reoptimize the layout dimensions Note The equation order may appear differently in your example E WorkSpace 1 Global Equations Workspace WorkSpace 1 MFilter MFilterl Equations FERRERA RARA RA RARA RARA RARA RARA RANA RA
384. s This is automatically detected from the type of model but can be overridden if necessary Reverse Nodes 1 amp 2 Unfortunately Berkeley chose the convention that for transistors node 1 is the output and node 2 is the input If this model is a transistor or is a subcircuit with an amplifier that uses this convention you should check this box This box ensures that the GENESYS pictures and node numbering conventions ate modified accordingly when using this part The Designs Link to Spice File section in the User s guide has more detailed information 177 Measurements Overview Overview GENESYS supports a rich set of output parameters All parameters can be used for any purpose including graphing tabular display optimization yield and post processing Linear Measurements The following table shows the available Measurements Where 7 and j ate shown in the chart port numbers can be used to specify a port Some parameters such as Ad use only one pott e g Al or VSWR2 Or on a tabular output the ports can be omitted ie S or Y and measurements fot all ports will be given Tip All available measurements and their operators for a given circuit or sub circuit with their appropriate syntax are shown in the measurement wizatd To bring up the measurement wizard select measurement wizard from the graph properties dialog box Note The section in this manual on S Parameters contains detailed information
385. s see the Theory section and their units are Amperes and Volts accordingly The grid currents and voltages together with their coordinates on the grid are stored in the EMV file The same data can be written in the self documented text file with the extension PLX The viewer reads the EMV file and to displays data Note that the initial current voltage distribution is a model representation and is treated using complex number conventions The currents voltages are complex quantities and harmonic functions of time So their magnitudes are maximal values for the excited wave period The real component corresponds to instantaneous values of currents and their phases reflect the phase delays of currents at the initial time t 0 Using these initial data the current distribution is calculated versus time If f is the incident wave frequency the cutrent distribution Ig t at time t is given by expression g t Ig 0 exp 2 pi f t The same formula is valid fot the voltage distributions Advancing time displays snapshots of the current or voltage distribution thus animating the display As we mentioned above the viewer reads the grid currents or voltages with their cootdinates and prepares them for plotting The preparation stage includes a transformation of the grid variables to more general current density functions surface electric current density function for strip like problems or surface magnetic current density function for slot
386. s Absolute Value Display and select Real mode 313 Simulation 314 Animation should be turned on also Animation camera button A snapshot of the plot is shown below The Real mode displays both current density values and direction Current flows in the positive X direction if the displayed values ate above the metal layer the color coded axis direction The current flows in the opposite direction if the displayed values are below the metal plane empower Viewer V6 5 oJ Eile View X a Real soa Freq GHz 15 J elol e a2 2 Top Front Side Oblique To obtain even additional insight the phase of the signal along the line may be displayed Stay in X component mode turn off animation and switch to the Angle mode by clicking the Display Option button until it reads Ang You may view the wireframe mode by clicking the Wire Solid button until it reads Wire At the initial time t 0 and with a matching totation you will a display similar to the one below It displays delay of the cutrent densities along the structure in terms of a complex vector rotation angle 360 degrees of phase corresponds to a one wavelength delay period The difference of the cutrent phases at the input and output again confirms a 90 degrees line segment empower Viewer V6 5 Bee File View x a Ang wie Freq GHz 15 a la oe e a top Front side Oblique
387. s section on matching S12 was set to zero At higher frequencies where the device S12 is typically larger this assumption is less valid The assumption simplifies manual and graphical design but is unnecessaty in modern computet assisted design The assumption also allows factoring the above equation into terms that provide insight into the design process If 12 0 then Gtu S212 1 Ro R113 C1 SuR d SzRo where Gtu unilateral transducer power gain When both ports of the network are conjugately matched and S12 0 Gtu 82 81 31 229 The first and third terms indicate the gain increase achievable by matching the input and output respectively If S11 or S22 approach 1 substantial gain improvement is achieved by matching Matching not only increases the network gain but reduces reflections from the netwotk When netwotk gain flatness across a frequency band is mote desirable than minimum reflections the lossless matching networks are designed to provide a better match at frequencies where the two port gain is lower By careful design of amplifier matching networks it is possible to achieve a gain response flat within fractions of a decibel over a bandwidth of an octave or mote Gain Circles When the device is complex conjugately matched the transducer gain is Gmax and if the device is terminated with the same resistance used to measure the device S parametets the transducer gain is S21 The gain
388. s this by putting two metal layers close together duplicating the traces on each and connecting them with z directed currents If thick metal is used then Current Direction is ignored EMPOWER Basics Element Z Ports This setting specifies the default direction for automatically created element ports either to the level above or to the level below Generally you should choose the electrically shortest path for this direction Substrate Media Layers All substrate layers from the General Layer Tab are also shown in the EMPOWER Layer tab These layers are used for substrate and other continuous materials such as absorbers inside the top cover An unlimited number of substrate media layers can be used The following types are available e Physical Desc The layer is lossy These losses are described by Height in units specified in the Dimensions tab Er relative dielectric constant Ur relative permittivity constant normally 1 and Tand Loss Tangent e SCHEMAX substrates Choosing a SCHEMAX substrate causes the cover to get the height Er Ur and Tand parameters from that substrate definition We recommend using this setting whenever possible so that parameters do not need to be duplicated in SCHEMAX and LAYOUT Caution For true stripline triplate be sure to check the Use 1 2 Height checkbox if you are using a substrate from SCHEMAX This forces EMPOWER to use 1 2 of the SCHEMAX substrate height for each substrate a
389. sary and the resulting part value may be different at each frequency For example R 50 1 FREQ can be used to create a frequency dependent resistor Post Processed variables can be combined For example the statement Difference Linear1 Filter DB S21 Measuted Data DB S21 gives the difference between the measured and the calculated DB S21 For any operator ot built in function swept data will be linearly interpolated if needed and the resulting sweep will contain all frequency points from both the measured and the calculated data In the item above the difference vatiable will contain all data points from both the linear analysis and the measured data All operators and built in functions will work on post processed data For example the statement SineS SIN Linearl FILTER ANGJ S21 will take the sine of the phase of S21 at each data point If the simulation data is itself a matrix everything will still work fine For example the statement Difference Linear1 Filter RECT S Measured Data RECT S will take the difference of all s parameters The Difference variable will now behave like an array see the previous section with the addition that all operations will operate at all frequencies For example Difference 2 1 returns the difference of S21 at all frequencies FREQ is a post processed variable For each frequency point the value is that frequency All frequencies are in MHz Exception In a user model if the freq
390. schematic to be RFAMP_1 G 15 dB MIXERP 1 NF 5 dB CL 8 dB OP1DB 40 dBm SUM 1 ISO 1 OPSAT 43 dBm LO 7 dBm IL 1 dB OIP3 50 dBm IIP2221 dBm ISO 40 dB 3 dB Resistive Pad OIP2 60 dBm oy 3 F AWV meo R1 R2 Am R 8 5 ohm R 8 5 ohm L 2 dB R3 R 141 9 ohm 9 0 Note that we changed the units on the LO to GHz This is very easy to do inside 26 Walkthrough SPECTRASYS the schematic element dialog box The mixer is the Passive Mixer found on the System toolbat Looking at the output spectrum you will see the RF and LO sneaking through You will also see intermods which wete generated Add another graph called Input Spectrum Add measurement P1 from System1 Composite You will see that the LO has come back towatds the input and is being sent backwards along the RF chain You will also see that the second harmonic generated at the amplifier comes back towards the input Seeing these Sneak paths is one of the more powerful features of SPECTRASYS Note The mixer is orange because the mixer has a local error after a simulation is performed The local error can be viewed by right clicking on the mixer and selecting Show Local Etrors This error shows that the mixer is being overdriven Note You must have Show Contributors Signals checked to see the sneak paths below noise Note The walkthrough at this point is saved in Examples SPECTRASYS Walkthrough 6 Mixer WSP SPECTRASYS can easily handl
391. se circles 27 numbers per frequency Using Non Default Simulation Data In all dialog boxes which allow entry of measurements there is a Default Simulation Data or Equations combo box Any measurement can ovettide this default The format to ovetride the network is simulation design operator measurement where simulation is the name of the Simulation Data from the Workspace Window design is the name of the design to use and operator measurement are as described in previous sections n override is most useful for putting parameters from different networks on the same graph Additionally the workspace can be overridden by using the following format workspace simulation design operator measurement where workspace is the short name of the workspace as given in the Workspace Window This allows direct comparison of results from different workspaces Some examples of overtides are 183 Simulation Meas Meaning Linear1 Filter DB S21 Show the dB magnitude of S21 from the Linear1 simulation of the Filter design EM1 Layout1 S11 Show the dB magnitude of S11 from the EMPOWER analysis of Layoutl Filter QL S21 Shows the loaded Q of the Filter design using the current simulation Note that the simulation was not overtiden only the network DB Linear1 FILTER S21 ILLEGAL The operator must go around the measurement not the wrong override Equations X Shows the global equation variable X which must contain post
392. se with post processed calculations Note These are advanced functions which are not required my most users If you are not sure if you need to use them then you probably don t COUNT expression For post processed data this function will return the number of data points in the swept data For example if Linear is a linear simulation with 101 frequency points then COUNT Linearl Sch DB S21 is 101 This function is most useful if you want to loop post processed data points with IF THEN GOTO Statements GET string Gets a measurement from a string variable The statements A DB S21 and A GET DBJS21 ate identical This statement exists so that you can pass a string containing the name of a measurement into a function allowing the function to get the data GETINDEPVALUE exptession index dim returns the independent data point for dimension dim of a post processed expression Expression is the post processed data index is the point number and dim is the independent dimension number to use For normal frequency sweeps dim should be 1 For parameter sweeps with multiple independent sweeps you must use dim to specify whether you want to get frequency dim 1 or the parameter dim 2 or higher for nested parameter sweeps Equation Reference Note If the independent data is frequency GETINDEPVALUE returns the values in Hz not MHz GETVALUE expression index calculates and returns a value of a post processed
393. sed in the model descriptionlines The text equivalent for the model given in GENESYS Model Varactot wsp is MODEL VARACTOR Vt Co Gamma Lp Cp Q Cv Co 1 Vt 0 7 Gamma C4 Co 1 4 0 7 Gamma Rs 1 3 14168e8 C4 1 E 12 Q CAP 1 2 C Cv RES 2 3 R Rs CAP 13 C Cp IND 3 4 L Lp DEF2P 1 4 VARACTOR This model can be typed or copied into a text file You must then edit the Default mod file in the GENESYS BIN directory Add the line LIBRARY filename where filename is the complete path and filename of your model It can then be used as follows VARACTOR n1 n2 V x Co x G x Lp x Cp x Q x 174 Link to Spice File One of the easiest ways to get nonlinear device models into GENESYS for use with HARBEC is to use a link to a manufacturer supplied SPICE file SPICE files have the following advantages ovet other methods of using nonlinear device data e They are often supplied by manufacturers e Entering device data manually is tedious and error prone e SPICE files often contain very complete macromodel device characterizations They also have a few disadvantages e Model parameters cannot be tuned directly in GENESYS e SPICE data provided by manufacturers are often intended for low frequency use and may not adequately characterize high frequency behavior This is generally not a problem for devices intended for use at high frequencies To create a link to a SPICE file 1 Ifwotkspaces using the spice link will be shared with co wot
394. sed in this source file Their descriptions and functions are The exclamation mark is a special character used for commenting the file AII text located after this mark is ignored UNITS These are the frequency units used in the source file The acceptable units are HZ Hertz KHZ KiloHertz and MHZ MegaHertz FREQ This is the nominal frequency of the data in the source file All frequencies in the DATA section will be relative to this value If this value is set to 0 default then all of the frequencies in the DATA block will be single sideband When the actual source is created both sidebands will be created from the single sideband data 129 Simulation 130 POWER This is the nominal power in dBm of the source All power levels in the DATA section ate relative to this value PHASE This is the nominal phase in degrees of the source All phases in the DATA section are relative to this value RANDPHASE This is a special keyword that will randomize the phase of all data points in the source file irrespective of their values set in the DATA section BW This is the full power bandwidth of the source The units used for this bandwidth are specified by the UNITS keyword If this value is set to 0 default then all power for the source is considered to be in a 1 Hz bandwidth this is the definition of a CW signal When the Channel Measurement bandwidth in SPECTRASYS is set to this bandwidth then a Channel Powet me
395. skovets The method of lines Review in Russian Differenzial nie Uravneniya v 1 1965 N 12 p 1662 1668 B L Lennartson A network analogue method for computing the TEM characteristics o planar transmission lines IEEE Trans v MT T 20 1972 N 9 p 586 590 U Schulz On the edge condition with the method of lines in planar waveguides Arch Electron Uebertragungstech v 34 1980 p 176 178 U Schulz R Pregla A new technique for the analysis of the dispersion characteristics of planar waveguides and its application to microstrips with tuning septums Radio Science v 16 1981 Nov Dec p 1173 1178 S B Worm R Pregla Hybrid mode analysis of arbitrarily shaped planar microwave structures by the method of lines IEEE Trans v MTT 32 1984 N 2 p 191 196 R Pregla W Pascher The method of lines in Numerical techniques for microwave and millimeter wave passive structures Edited by T Itoh John Willey amp Sons 1989 S B Worm Full wave analysis of discontinuities in planar waveguides by the method of lines using a source approach IEEE Trans v MTT 38 1990 N 10 p 1510 1514 L F Richardson The differed approach to the limit 1 Single lattice Philos Trans of Royal Society London set A 226 1927 p 299 349 A Premoli A new fast and accurate algorithm for the computation of microstrip capacitances IEEE Trans v MTT 23 1975 N 8 p 642 647 EMPOWER Refere
396. smitted energy information In other words this is the transmitted energy traveling from node to node along the specified path See the Transmitted Energy section for additional information Composite Spectrum Composite spectrum is unique feature in SPECTRASYS A composite spectrum allows the user the ability to view full node spectrums and identify the spectral component otigins and their path of travel to the designated node There ate three general spectral categories in SPECTRASYS They ate 1 Signal 2 Intermods and Harmonics and 3 Noise Furthermore each source and their derived components harmonics intermods spurs etc will be propagating in all directions when then arrive at a node The makeup of composite spectrum consists of a trace for each SPECTRASYS System Element representing the total power traveling from that element into the node Signal component Qe dex ce Intermod and harmonic component 4 Noise component Because of the way that SPECTRASYS keeps track of these spectral components independently and each component is represented by a trace on the graph it is not uncommon to have hundreds and even thousands of spectral components traces at a single node The user can determine which of the spectral pieces they would like to see On the Composite Spectrum tab of the System Simulation dialog box the user can check ot uncheck which pieces of the spectrum they would like to see The total from each elemen
397. specifies the impedance of the material in ohms per square If the entry in this box is a filename it specifies the name of a one port data file which contains impedance data versus frequency This data file will be interpolated extrapolated as necessary See the Reference manual for a description of one port data files e SCHEMAX substrates Choosing a SCHEMAX substrate causes the layer to get the rho thickness and roughness parameters from that substrate definition We recommend using this setting whenever possible so that parameters do not need to be duplicated in SCHEMAX and LAYOUT Caution Thickness is only used for calculation of losses It is not otherwise used and all strips are calculated as if they are infinitely thin Metal layers have three additional settings available Slot Type Check this box to simulate the non lossless metal areas as opposed to the metal areas in EMPOWER Use this for ground planes and other layers which are primarily metal Do not use this for lossy layers See your EMPOWER manual for details Current Direction Specifies which direction the current flows in this layer The default is along X and Y X Only and Y Only can be used to save times on long stretches of uniform lines Z Up Z Down XYZ Up and XYZ Down allow the creation of thick metal going up down to the next level or cover Thick Metal Checking this box forces EMPOWER to model the metal including thickness EMPOWER doe
398. spectrum flowing in a direction opposite of the path direction Dialog Box Reference 88 System Simulation Parameters General Tab This page sets the general settings for a SPECTRASYS Simulation To reach this page add a System Simulation by right clicking on Simulations in the Wotkspace Window Tip Any of the parameters in this dialog box can be made tunable by placing a in front of the parameter System Simulation Parameters General Paths Calculate Composite Spectrum Options Denan To Simulate ESSE RES MEC eet ene Nominal Impedance 50 Ohms Channel fi MHz You must enter the channel bandwidth here before simulation Koaua Ni IV Automatic Recalculation Sources Eactory Defaults Cancel Apply Help Design to Simulate The schematic to use for the system simulation Channel Measurement Bandwidth Specifies the integration bandwidth of the all channels used in SPECTRASYS SPECTRASYS System Nominal Impedance The default system impedance Recalculate Now Closes this dialog and initiates an immediate recalculation of the system simulation Automatic Recalculation When checked enables SPECTRASYS to automatically recalculate the simulation on an as needed basis Sources Grid that defines the system simulator signal soutces Name Name of the signal source Port Port to attach the signal to Note that more than one signal ca
399. speed Order vs Accuracy and Time The easiest way to affect simulation performance is to change the order of the frequencies used in simulation Harmonic balance models signals in the circuit by using a finite number of harmonics of the fundamental signals and a finite number of mixing terms The larger the number of harmonics and mixing terms the better the approximation of the actual signals However the larger the number of frequencies the longer the simulator takes to work The length of time to take a search step is roughly proportional to the cube of the number of frequencies So doubling the number of frequencies will take about 8 times longer to simulate Howevet if not enough frequencies are present to adequately model the signals then the results will not be accurate Moreovet the simulator may have difficultly converging if not enough of the energy in the circuit is modeled HARBEC DC amp Harmonic Balance The best practice in selecting order is to start with a reasonable number of harmonics of each signal typically 5 is a good point then increase the number until the results stop changing Order and Maximum Mixing Order on the HARBEC Options dialog box conttol the number of terms In this way you can make tradeoffs of speed vetsus accutacy Amplitude Stepping To statt the search for convergence HARBEC analyzes the circuit at DC this is with all independent AC signal turned off Using DC as a first guess it
400. spiral inductor In this example PART1 and PART2 ate inconsistently numbered since on PARTI the outermost inputs numbers 2 and 6 are the lowest number while in PART2 the innermost inputs numbers 1 and 5 are the lowest number Part e Pieces can be connected directly together without using MMTLP In this case the lowest ports in each modally related set of inputs ate connected to each other 296 EMPOWER Lumped Elements and Internal Ports Overview As described in the External Ports section every EMPOWER circuit must contain at least one port This section will cover lumped elements and internal ports ports inside the box External potts along a sidewall were also covered in that section Placing Internal Ports The process of placing an internal port is similar to the process of placing an external port To summarize An internal port is placed in LAYOUT by selecting EMPort from the toolbar Internal ports can be placed anywhere in the box When the EMPort Properties dialog box appeats first select Internal in the Port Type combo box Next fill in the width and length of the pad Press OK to complete the placement Note The rest of the options in the EMPort Properties dialog box were covered in the section entitled Port Options You may want to review these options now The figure below shows a comparison between potts in circuit theory and internal ports in EMPOWER
401. statement or null default s azement or null The default statement is optional but if used can only be used once The case expression and the case_item expression can be computed at runtime neither expression is required to be a constant expression The case_ tem expressions are evaluated and compared in the exact order in which they are given If one of the case_ifem expressions matches the case expression given in parentheses then the statement associated with that case_ tem is executed If all comparisons fail then the default item statement is executed if given Otherwise none of the case_item statements are executed Advanced Modeling Kit Repeat and while looping statements The repeat statement executes a statement a fixed number of times Evaluation of the expression determines how many times the statement is executed The while looping executes a statement until an expression becomes False If the expression is False when the loop is entered the statement is not executed at all The syntax for the repeat and while statements is shown repeat expression statement while expression statement For statement The fot statement controls execution of its associated statement s using an index vatiable If the associated statement is an analog statement then the control mechanism must consist of genvar assignments and genvar_expressions operators no use of procedural assignments and expressions f
402. symmetty stage The fifth line displays the calculation stage The lines below the fifth line describe the calculated data for each frequency During line analysis the impedance Z and propagation constant G are displayed for each frequency In the discontinuity calculation mode the first row of the s matrix is displayed at each frequency EMPOWER Basics Starting with GENESYS Version 7 0 multiple workspaces can be loaded simultaneous and all EMPOWER simulations can be updated sequentially This new capability makes the techniques given in this section much less important for most users Simply open as many Workspace files as you need Select Options from the Tools menu and check Allow Multiple Open Workspaces Right click on any of the EMPOWER simulations and press Recalculate Now You will then be asked if you want to recalculate all simulations select Yes Note You should probably check Automatically save workspace after calc if you are running long ot overnight batches so that if there is a power outage you will not lose your results 271 EMPOWER Tips Often electromagnetic simulation involves tradeoffs and compromises to keep simulation times and memory requirements as small as possible while making accuracy as high as possible This section looks at several choices and clarifies the tradeoffs Table 3 1 lists vatious features and gives their impact on simulation times accuracy and memory requir
403. t image This view is top down on the x y plane with a slight offset This option can also be selected by pressing End T Current Plot Shows the color coded cutrent patterns for the loaded EMPOWER generated viewer data file The menus and toolbar buttons control how this image is displayed U Color Scale For Current Plot This scale shows the relative current and current density magnitudes based on the color used to draw the plot patterns The EMPOWER far field radiation data describes the electric field patterns in the far zone region radiated from a structure The far zone is defined as the region where 2nR gt gt 1 where R is the distance from the structure and lambda is the wavelength of the signal exciting the structure Far field radiation patterns are described in the spherical coordinate system where phi is the angle on the xy plane from the positive x axis and theta is the angle from the positive z axis The distance is not specified since it is assumed to be in the far zone Assumptions Made when Generating Far Field Radiation Data Data for radiation in the far field is generated using equations that make simplifying assumptions about the layout of the structure It is therefore necessary to take these assumptions into account and follow them to get accurate solutions e The walls of the box ate assumed to be infinitely far away from the structure e Ifa substrate is used it is also assumed to extend infinitely
404. t the desired part and Click OK Click OK to accept the default symbol Note the LDMOS models ate nonlinear and require the HARBEC module Contact Eaglewate for information on purchasing this module if you do not own it You can now tun a harbec DC or lineatized simulation To see an example of an LDMOS model in use select File Open Example then load Amplifiers Large Signal S Parameters 65 Advanced Modeling Kit The GENESYS Advanced Modeling Kit AMK consists of three main parts e Approximately 12 additional nonlinear models for use in HARBEC These models are ready to use and do not require knowledge of the Verilog A language e A built in Verilog A compiler for creating your own nonlinear models e Verilog A source code for all non proprietary nonlinear models contained in GENESYS These files allow you to make custom changes to any existing nonlinear model For example you can make a new model identical to a built in transistor but with a change to the nonlinear capacitance equations Hardware description languages were developed as a means to provide varying levels of abstraction to designers Integrated circuits are too complex for an engineer to create by specifying the individual transistors and wires HDLs allow the performance to be described at a high level and simulation synthesis programs can the take the language and generate the gate level description As behavior beyond the digital performance was ad
405. t will actually be transmitted through the filter Most of the energy will be reflected by the filter Since the input power to the attenuator is very high and the input power to the bandpass filter is very low then it appears that the entire attenuation of the filter appears across the 3 dB pad In other wotds the transmitted energy through any filter will be equal to the insertion loss When we realize that the power at each node is the actual power that is transmitted through the element to the next node in the path then the level diagrams make more sense Another way that we can think of this node power is that this would be the actual power measured at that node with a power meter at that given frequency if the power meter was matched to the same impedance as seen by that load circuit Path Spectrum Along every path there are 5 categories of spectrums that every signal will be part of These spectrums are desired undesired noise intermod and total Desired and Undesired Spectrum The definition of Desired Spectrum is spectrum that is traveling in the same direction as the desired path All other spectrum originating from other sources will be present at the node of interest but will be specified as Undesited Spectrum since it didn t originate along the desired path direction Each and every node along the path contains both Desired and Undesired spectrums As with a real circuit board all signal sources propagat
406. t will always be shown and cannot be disabled Furthermote all spectral components can be ignored below a user specified level In order to view a composite spectrum plot the user must select the System Simulation and Composite in the Default Simulation Data or Equations combo box of the rectangular graph properties i e System1 Composite The user must then specify whether they want to display a voltage or a power measurement and the node number i e P2 power at node 2 For example a simple receiver shown below will have the antenna signal propagate forwatd through the receiver front end then through the mixer and the IF chain However after the LO arrives at the mixer it will propagate backwards through the receiver front end to arrive at the antenna input In addition this LO signal will also propagate forward through the IF chain If we were to examine the receiver input on a spectrum analyzer we would see both the input signal from the antenna as well as the LO leakage On the spectrum analyzet we would see both of these signals However we know that they are traveling in different directions At the antenna input node we know that the received signal is traveling towatd the IF chain and the LO leakage is traveling away from the IF chain E Schi Workspace composite spectrum Receiver Example RFAMP 1 G 20 dB MIXERP 1 NF S dB CL 8 dB OP1DB 10 dBm ATTN 1 SUM 0 ATIN 3 OPSAT 13 dBm L 2dB LO 7 dBm L 2
407. tability Because S12 of devices is not zero a signal path exists from the output to the input This feedback path creates an opportunity for oscillation The stability factor K is K 1 S11 2 S2 D 2 2 S12 Sz1 where D S11822 S82 From a practical standpoint when K gt 1 S11 lt 1 and S22 lt 1 the two port is unconditionally stable These ate often stated as sufficient to insure stability Theoretically K gt 1 is insufficient to insure stability and an additional condition should be satisfied One such parameter is B1 which should be greater than zeto B1 1 Su S22 D 7 0 Stability circles may be used for a more detailed analysis The load impedances of a network which ensure that S1 1 are identified by a circle of radius R centered at C on a Smith chart The output plane stability circle is Linear Simulation Cou S22 DS11 S22 D 2 Rou S12S21 S221 D2 This circle is the locus of loads for which S1 1 The region inside or outside the circle may be the stable region The input plane stability circle equations are the same as the output plane equations with 1 and 2 in the subscripts interchanged Shown in the figure below are the input plane stability circles on the left and the output plane stability circles on the right for the Avantek AT10135 GaAsFET The shaded regions are potentially unstable At the input the stability circle with marker 1 indicates sources wi
408. talGain Gain AddToGain This example takes the gain in dB DB S21 of the design Filter using the simulation setup in Linear1 and places the result into the variable Gain For a complete explanation of this syntax see the Measurements section of this manual Note that Gain now contains swept data DB S21 vs frequency Next the variable AddToGain is added Equation Reference to each data point The variable Add ToGain can be tuned or optimized which will directly affect the value of TotalGain There ate several important things to know about post processed data Any measurement described in the measurements section of this manual is available for use in post processing To get simulation data the expression must contain a period For example A DBJS21 will not work but A DB S21 will This is most important if you take advantage of the USING statement see below Post processed equations can be used directly in a graph or other output by putting in front of the measurement All rules of this section including the period rule above must be followed To get simulation data you must always use a measurement operator For example A Linear1 Filter 521 will not work but A Linear1 Filter DB S21 will Post Processed vatiables can be mixed with regular variables as in the example above Frequency dependent post processed variables can be used in part values The data will be sampled interpolated extracted as neces
409. tch than previous solutions FFT Force 1 D FFT The simulator will normally convert frequency spectrums to time waveforms and back using multidimensional FFTs If the frequencies are evenly spaced have a large common factor it may be faster to use a one dimensional FFT On some occasions convergence can also be affected Allow psedo harmonic FFT calculation Artificially changes quasi periodical signal to periodical This allows a increase of calculation speed in multitone analysis An example of this would be a noise analysis with many harmonics Allow non binary FFT Allows the use of FFTs that have powers other that 2 n where n 1 2 3 This allows a decrease the number of FFT points for multitone analysis and will results in calculations speed ups and decreases the needed memory for FFT arrays Krylov Subspace Method Use Krylov Subspace Method Select this box to use the Krylov technique For large harmonic balance problems this technique can dramatically reduce the amount of memoty and time required to converge Krylov Iterations The largest number of steps the Krylov simulator will attempt before aborting HARBEC DC amp Harmonic Balance Maximum Number of Iterations The largest number of convergence steps the simulator will take before adjusting the signal levels in the circuit Special Options Enter any of the following parameters for advanced simulator control Multiple parameters can be added o
410. ted in each piece In this case each individual layout will look like the parts shown above e Create a complete layout of the entire problem first Then make the box smaller so that only the desired piece is simulated This is the method we will use for the spiral We have created a layout of the entire spiral inductor as a starting point EAGLE EXAMPLES DECOMP FULL WSP This file was created by starting with an MRIND element so that the layout was created mostly automatically The only addition was the extra length leading to port 1 and the EMPorts Notice that the reference plane for port 1 is shifted to the actual start point of the spiral model Port 2 is an internal port This circuit can be analyzed directly but it requires minutes per frequency point and 37 megabytes of RAM This file was then saved as COMBINE WSP The box was shrunk and the circuit was moved so that only the bottom left quarter of the circuit is in the box The number on the internal port on the end of the spiral was changed to 10 Ports 2 5 on the right and 6 9 were added Since these ports are in the middle of a line instead of on the end their width must be set manually Also the reference planes on the ports were shifted in The resulting layout for the first piece is shown below 291 Simulation EMPOWER was run for Part1 The settings are as shown below Note that only 5 points are needed since the individual parts are not resonant The Setup Layout P
411. termod bandwidth is a function of the governing intermod equation For example if the intermod equation is 2F1 F2 then the intermod bandwidth would be 2BW1 BW2 Note Bandwidths never subtract and will always add The channel bandwidth must be set wide enough to include the entire bandwidth of the intermod to achieve the expected results The Automatic Intermod Mode will set the bandwidth appropriately Values Real value numeric Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type DB CGAINIM3 cascaded third order intermod gain in dB Real 210 Measurements SPECTRASYS MAG CGAINIM3 numeric value of the cascaded third order intermod gain Real Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield DB CGAINIM3 DB CGAINIM3 DB CGAINIM3 MAG CGAINIM3 MAG CGAINIM3 MAG CGAINIM3 Not available on Smith Chart Cascaded Gain All Signals CGainAll This measurement is the cascaded gain of the main channel along the specified path The Cascaded Gain is the difference between the Channel Power measurement at the nth stage minus the Channel Powet measurement at the input as shown by CGAIN n CP n CP 0 dB where n stage number The main channel is defined by the Channel Frequency for the selected path and the system analysis Channel Measutement Bandwidth See
412. ters General Paths Calculate Composite Spectrum Options Ignore Spectrum TT 3 m Mixer LO X Level Below EU dim Strongest Signal Only C AllSignals Within 50 dBc of Strongest do ube M User Defined Offset Channel Freq Offset From Channel fi 00 MHz Frequency Above MHz E Measurement Bandwidth fi MHz Frequency Above and Below are optional This info is only used by the OCF and OCP The default Frequency Below is 0 and the Offset Channel Frequency and Power Frequency Above defaults to 5x Max Source measurements gt Range Warning for Mixer Multiplier etc Tolerance Range 2 dB M Maximum Number of Spectrums To Generate Max Spectrums Factory Defaults Ignore Spectrum This group is used to limit or restrict the number of spectrums created by SPECTRASYS These thresholds apply at every calculated node Consequently if a signal is heavily attenuated or outside the given frequency range duting a portion of the path and are then amplified or frequency translated back into the given frequency range then these thresholds must be set so that the spectrums will not be ignored along the calculation path Once an individual spectrum is ignored it will not continue to propagate Howevet all spectrums previously calculated will still be available at the nodes where there were within the specified limits For example If we had a 2 GHz transmitter that had an IF frequency of 150 MHz
413. th a small resistive component and inductive reactance of about 200 ohms are unstable Circles 2 and 3 are also unstable with low resistance and certain inductive source impedances At the output plane on the right at 500 MHz a wide range of inductive loads is potentially unstable LIA LL ELERA Le as CA MAG SB1 MAG SB1 MAG SB2 500 1500 4000 000 500 4000 6000 1 03624 1 3313 31 9521 3 07963 11 612 4 57951 1 26165 0 635793 1 03639 1 3318 31 9521 207963 0 o 9 9 When designing an amplifier the first step is to examine the stability circles of the device without the matching circuit present The grounding which will be present at the emitter ot source should be included in the analysis This stability data is used to 1 add stabilizing components such as shunt input and output resistots for bipolars or inductance in the source path for GaAsFETs and to 2 select an input and output matching network topology which properly terminates the device at low and high frequencies for stability In the example above matching networks with a small series capacitor adjacent to the device would insure capacitive loads at low frequencies thus enhancing stability This is probably sufficient for the input However considering that device S parameter data is approximate and since the output plane of this device is more threatening it would be prudent to stabilize this device in addition to using series capacitors Note Stabi
414. th direction through the node that fall within the main channel All other intermods harmonics and noise is ignored in the forward path direction All signals intermods harmonics and noise are ignored for the reverse path direction For example if the Channel Measurement Bandwidth was specified to 03 MHz and the Channel Frequency was 220 MHz then the DCP is the integrated power from 219 985 to 220 0015 MHz This power measutement will not even be affect by another 220 MHz signal traveling in the reverse direction even if it is much larger in amplitude Values Real value in Watts Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type DBM DCP desired channel power in dBm MAG DCP magnitude of the desired channel power in Watts Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield DBM DCP DBM DCP MAG DCP MAG DCP 216 Measurements SPECTRASYS Not available on Smith Chart Desired Channel Power Third Order Intermod Analysis DCPIM3 This measurement is the desired channel power of the main channel during the IM3 analysis pass Note The Calculate Intermods Along Path checkbox must be checked and propetly configured in order to make this measurement See the Calculate Intermods Along Path section for information on how to configure these tests See
415. th frequency Reverse Isolation for Internally Created Intermods and Harmonics Once intermods and harmonics have been created and rolled off with frequency these intermods and harmonics will appear at the amplifier input and continue to propagate backwards through the system Reverse Isolation for Reverse Traveling Signals Reverse isolation will be applied to all reverse traveling signals that encounter the amplifier output before its input Hybrid Linear Nonlinear Model This section describes the fundamental operation of how SPECTRASYS simulates the hybrid linear non linear model The hybrid model is available for certain non linear models in SPECTRASYS Some examples of non linear models are the RF Amplifier Switches Attenuators etc This mode of operation is enabled when S parametets ot a 101 Simulation 102 sub network is substituted for the given SPECTRASYS non linear model For example if an RF Amplifier behavioral model REAMP was placed is a schematic and S parameters where substituted for the behavioral model then the hybrid mode of operation would be enabled When the hybrid mode of operation is enabled the linear parameters from sub networks ot S Parameters would be used for all linear characteristics of the model The non linear parameters of the behavioral model such as 1 dB compression saturation power and intercept points would still be used to calculated the intermods and harmonics Behavioral
416. the electric e and magnetic h fields ate defined as corresponding continuous function values in offset grid points as is shown for a grid cell above The grid functions ate continuous along the z axis Grid x and y directed current variables Jx Jy are defined as integrals of the surface current in the metal plane across the grid cell Grid z directed currents Jz ate defined as surface integrals of the volume current density jz across the grid cell The first offset model of Maxwell s equations was apparently proposed by G Kron 1944 The cells below show a summary of the similar models implemented by different authors The resultant system of differential difference equations approximates the initial system with the second otder locally inside a layer The initial boundary value problem can contain infinitesimally thin metal regions with consequent singulatities of the field and conductivity currents at the metal edges Meixner 1972 That is why a global approximation order of the problem is usually lower and the largest calculation error part for integral parameters of a structure Y S matrix elements characteristic impedance decreases usually proportionally to the grid cell size That is the monotonic convergence was observed for almost all problems solved on the initial equidistant grid This makes it possible to use such powerful convergence acceleration techniques as Richardson s extrapolation Richardson 1927 Marchuk Shaidurov 197
417. the file specified as an argument and returns a 32 bit multichannel descriptor which is uniquely associated with the file It returns O if the file could not be opened for writing fclose file id fclose closes the channels specified in the multichannel descriptor and does not allow any further output to the closed channels fopen reuses channels which have been closed strobe args strobe provides the ability to display simulation data when the simulator has converged on a solution for all nodes using a print style format monitor args monitor provides same capabilities as strobe but outputs only when a parameter changes Eagleware Verilog A Extensions Eaglewate has created several extensions to Verilog A These extensions ate not required in any Verilog A files but they allow more complete information to be given to GENESYS about the model making it easier to pass Verilog A files between users In GENESYS a Verilog A file gives a complete description of the model and no other files are generally necessary to share between usets Parameter Descriptions First parameter descriptions and units can be included in comments parameter real Vtr 20 0 Soft breakdown model parameter V parameter real P3 0 0 Polynomial coeff P3 for channel current 1 V 3 patameter real Fnc 0 0 from 0 inf Noise corner freq Hz parameter real Cds 0 from 0 inf Zero bias D S junction capacitance F Any comments on
418. the intermod bandwidth would be 2BW1 BW2 Note Bandwidths never subtract and will always add The channel bandwidth must be set wide enough to include the entire bandwidth of the intermod to achieve the expected results The Automatic Intermod Mode will set the bandwidth appropriately Values Real value in Watts Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type DBM TIM3P _ total third order intermod power in dBm MAG TIM3P total third order intermod power in Watts Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield DBM TIM3P DBM TIM3P DBM TIM3P MAG TIM3P MAG TIM3P Not available on Smith Chart Total Node Power TNP This measurement is the integrated power of the entire spectrum at the node This is an extremely useful measurement in determining the total power present at the input of a device i e amplifier or mixer LO This measurement includes ALL SIGNALS INTERMODS HARMONICS and NOISE traveling in ALL directions through the node Values Real value in Watts Simulations SPECTRASYS 237 Simulation Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type DBM TNP total node power in dBm magnitude of the channel power in Watts Examples Measurement Result in graph Smit
419. the viewer data may not be as useful since the lumped elements are not taken into account by the viewet It is also possible to use an internal port as a source of energy to excite a structure The termination impedance can be specified using the option NI lt n gt In this case the internal inputs are terminated by virtual transmission lines with the specified characteristic impedance The unit incident wave is excited at the specified input Note that if option NI lt n gt is used then the external inputs are also terminated by transmission lines ot loads with this impedance after de embedding and transformation into the mode space if necessary If the excitation conditions are defined EMPOWER calculates the scattering matrix S with default or defined normalization first Then it creates an excitation vector A 0 1 0 that contains only one unit element corresponding to the specified input The other elements of the vector are zeros Reflected waves vector B are calculated from the equation B S A Then the simulator defines normalized voltages and currents in mode space denormalizes them and restores the grid currents and voltages inside regions corresponding to all input surface current regions Finally using the input region variables the program calculates non zero grid currents Ig for strip like structures or voltages Vg for slot like structures The grid currents and voltages are locally defined model currents and voltage
420. thing after the apostrophe is ignored The comment line format is Comment Example This line will be ignored The label statement identifies a section of the EQUATION window for use in GOTO or IF THEN GOTO statements After the GOTO is executed the statement following LABEL is the next statement executed If LABEL is the last statement in the window the equations end after the GOTO The format is LABEL Labelname This statement causes the EQUATION interpreter to jump in its calculations to the statement following the corresponding LABEL statement The format of the GOTO statement is GOTO Labelname This statement is perhaps the most powerful one included in GENESYS This statement causes the following steps to occut 1 The value of the expression is calculated Any true compatison results in a value of 1 For example the expression 170 gives a value of 1 while the expression 021 gives a value of zero 2 The value obtained in step one is compared to zero If the value is not zero then the interpreter performs the statement specified The format of the IF statement is IF expression THEN statement Example Equation Reference IF Q gt 1000 THEN GOTO HIGHQ RVal 100 GOTO DONE LABEL HIGHQ RVal 500 LABEL DONE Warning You cannot use IF THEN with post processed variables Use the IFF and IFTRUE functions instead Since GENESYS uses approximate calculations as any computer program must round off
421. tion Lots of vendor supplied models Requires very little memory Non linear Easily use equations modeling of and user functions crossover distortion etc No time domain Very slow Very hard to model frequency domain behavior e g unloaded Q No biasing information No distributed models e g microstrip waveguide etc Everything is linear Requires knowledge of circuit coupling factors parasitics etc Requires knowledge of circuit coupling factors parasitics etc Linear SPICE Electromagnetic Extremely accurate Does not require an intimate knowledge of the circuit simulator figures out coupling etc Can predict radiation current distribution Automatic deembedding Predicts box mode effects e g What happens if the circuit is placed in a box Can use arbitrary shapes does not require an existing model for them Extremely slow Requires lots of memory Discretizes metal patterns to fit grid Can be difficult to set up a circuit for simulation HARBEC Steady State Nonlinear Study mixing compression and intermodulation DC biasing information Lots of vendor supplied models Use frequency dependent equations and post processing Use measured data in simulation Much slower than linear Takes a lot of memory and time Requires nonlinear models Cannot study transient behavior for example oscillator startup Overview
422. tion If you are interested in customizing a nonlinear model which is not yet available contact Eagleware to get the latest Verilog A soutce libraries Vetilog A is a procedural language with constructs similar to C and other languages While the language does allow some knowledge of the simulator most model descriptions should not need to know anything about the type of analysis being run Perhaps the simplest possible Verilog A file is a resistor the line numbers are not part of the verilog file 1 include disciplines vams 69 Simulation 70 module resistor p n inout p n electrical p n parameter real r 50 from 0 inf exclude 7 analog begin V p n lt r I p n end 11 endmodule You can use this resistor as a starting point for your own Verilog A files or you may start with a more complex file such as the built in nonlinear models S Line 1 include disciplines vams This line includes the definitions for electrical nodes among other things and should be the first line of most Verilog A files Note the use of the symbol 12 s not a normal apostrophe On most keyboards it is located on the upper left key the same key as the tilde Line 3 module resistor p n Declares the start of a module named resistor with two external terminals p and n These terminals are used in order by GENESYS so p becomes pin 1 and n becomes pin 2 in the symbol Line4 inout p n Declares that thes
423. tion and a linear simulator with frequency domain simulation Actually many circuits have data of interest in both the time and frequency domains which could warrant the use of both simulators For example an oscillator has phase noise transmission and phase characteristics which are all frequency domain measurements Oscillators also have waveform magnitude starting time and startup transients which are all time domain measurements In this case both simulators can be used in the circuit design There ate some guidelines fot deciding between SPICE and linear simulation 1 Does the circuit depend on time domain characteristics If so SPICE must be used for this portion of the design If the circuit depends entirely on the time domain SPICE can be used exclusively Howevet if a frequency domain response is also of interest linear simulation may be used in addition to SPICE What is the highest frequency of concern in the circuit If it s over about 100 MHz you may want to use linear simulation This is because component unloaded Q becomes a concern above this frequency and SPICE does not have the built in ability to include this effect in simulations If the frequency is much higher than this linear simulation is almost a must since SPICE uses lumped element models for RF parts which do not usually model high frequency effects accurately Is the circuit all lumped elements If so SPICE may be used However unloaded Q is not
424. tion or yield DBM OCP DBM OCP DBM OCP MAG OCP MAG OCP Not available on Smith Chart Tone Channel Power TCP 218 This measurement is the total integrated power in the tone channel The tone channel is the Tone Channel Frequency with the channel measurement bandwidth This power is used fot intermod measurements such as IIP3 OIP3 SFDR etc The Calculate Intermods Along Path option must be enabled to make this measurement This measurement is simply a Channel Power measurement at the Tone Channel Frequency Values Real value in Watts Simulations SPECTRASYS Measurements SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators Operator Description Result Type DBM TCP tone channel power in dBm MAG TCP magnitude of the tone channel power in Watts Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield DBM ICP DBM TCP MAG ICP MAG ICP Not available on Smith Chart Gain GAIN This measurement is the individual stage gain of the main channel along the specified path The Gain is the difference between the Desired Channel Power output of the current stage minus the Desired Channel Power output of the prior stage as shown by GAIN n DCP n DCP n 1 dB where GAIN 0 0 dB n stage number See the Desired Channel Power measurement to determine which types of signals
425. tion located between the nonlinearity creation point and the circuit output Given only linear parameters i e S parameter data file there is no way of knowing where the SPECTRASYS System nonlinear creation point is located Consequently the assumption is made that all nonlinearities will be created first before being applied to the linear parameters Compression and saturation is another problem that has to be dealt with for linear parameters By definition linear parameters contain no information about compression and saturation Since harmonics and intermods ate generated behaviorally they can follow a smooth Power In vs Power Out transfer curve 1 dB compression and saturation will appear as a smooth function with vatying input power level However since the linear parameters ate constant and do not model these nonlinear effects then a hard saturation algorithm was used to limit the maximum output power of the hybrid model Consequently the following assumptions were made All nonlineartities will be created at the device input before being applied to the lineat parameters The behavioral gain will be used to refer all output nonlinear parameters to the input Compression Saturation and Intermod levels will be based on the behavioral parameters before being applied to the linear parameters Harmonics and Intermods will follow a smooth Power In vs Power Out curve since they do not use the linear parameters All other signa
426. to be swept Automatic Recalculation Checking this box will cause the harmonic balance simulation to be run any time there is a change in the design If the box is not checked the simulation must be run manually either by right clicking on the simulation icon and selecting Recalculate Now ot by clicking the recalculation button on the main tool bar Recalculate Now Dismisses the dialog box and starts the simulator if required If the circuit has already been simulated and has not been changed the simulator will not calculate again Factory Defaults Resets the sweep propetties to the original known good settings Sweep Range e Start Value The lower bound minimum frequency of the sweep e Stop Value The upper bound maximum frequency of the sweep Type of Sweep e Linear Number of Points Allows specification of start value stop value and number of points e Log Points Decade Allows specification of start value stop value and number of points e Linear Step Size Allows specification of start value stop value and space between points e List of Values Allows the explicit specification of variable values These points are entered into the List of Points box separated by spaces Equation Reference Each line in the EQUATION window must be in one of 5 formats assignment REF comment IF THEN GOTO FUNCTION RETURN or BASE The formats are described below The assignment line assigns a value to a va
427. tors None Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield CF CF Not available on Smith Chart 213 Simulation Offset Channel Frequency OCF The Offset Channel Frequency and Offset Channel Power are very useful measurements in SPECTRASYS These measurements give the user the ability to create a user defined channel relative the the main channel The user specifies both the Offset Frequency relative to the main Channel Frequency and the Offset Channel Bandwidth As with the Channel Frequency measurement SPECTRASYS automatically deals with the frequency translations of the Offset Channel Frequency through frequency translations elements such as mixers and frequency multipliers Both the Offset Frequency and the Offset Channel Bandwidth can be tuned by simply placing a question mark in front of the value to be tuned This measurement simply returns the Offset Channel Frequency for evety node along the specified path Values Real value in MHz Simulations SPECTRASYS Default Format Table Linear Graph Linear Smith Chart none Commonly Used Operators None Examples Measurement Result in graph Smith chart Result on table optimization or yield OCF OCF Not available on Smith Chart Tone Channel Frequency TCF This measurement is the frequency of the tone channel used for intermod measurements such as IIP3 OIP3 SFDR etc The Tone Channel F
428. tributed across this bandwidth Add Extra Points This is the number of extra noise points that will be inserted across the In Bandwidth parameter These additional noise points will be uniformly distributed across this bandwidth The center frequency of these noise points is the signal frequency These noise points will be added to every desired spectrum created in SPECTRASYS However unused noise points will be removed to improve the simulation time See Broadband Noise for additional information about Smart Noise Point Removal SPECTRASYS System In Bandwidth This is the bandwidth where extra additional noise points can be inserted The center frequency of these noise points is the frequency of each desired signal This parameter is used when the user wants greater resolution of the noise like through a natrowband Intermediate Frequency IP filter This bandwidth defaults to the channel bandwidth if this parameter is left blank Noise Simulation Tips The more noise points used in the simulation the longer the simulation time will generally be Since each component generates noise the more components in a schematic will also increase the simulation time Better speed performance can be achieved for a large number of components by disabling noise calculations or reducing the number of simulation points Calculate Intermods Along Path When checked SPECTRASYS will calculate input and output third order intercept points I
429. trip junction then you may not need to use deembedding because EMPOWER is simulating the circuit as you ate actually going to build it However you may not have this kind of construction or you may be simulating a small segment of a larger circuit In an external port there is capacitance at the port due to coupling from the open end of the line to the wall Deembedding removes this extra 283 Simulation 284 reactance perfectly matching the transmission line modeling it as though the line and box extend out to infinity Deembedding also allows you to define a reference plane shift By default the reference plane shift is zero which means that the resulting data is measured at exactly the side wall If the reference plane shift is negative then the data is measured from inside the box effectively subtracting length from the circuit If the reference plane shift is positive then the data is measured from outside the box effectively adding length to the circuit CIRCUIT RefShift RefShift X This is the equivalent network used when deembedding is active The center of the figure labeled CIRCUIT contains the raw results from the EMPOWER simulation Reactance X shown as inductors above cancels the capacitance caused by the end wall as well as cotrecting other reactances The value of X may be negative and it is frequency dependent The RefShift lines at the outside move the reference planes to the correct locatio
430. trying to get the SPECTRASYS System mouse flyovet text to popup it is because the mouse cursor is not near a marker symbol The best solution to this problem is to enable the marker symbols so the user can see the marker locations and place the mouse cursor accordingly There exists a long and short form of spectral identification The long form will appear on mouse flyover near the mouse cursor and will also be displayed on the status bar of the GENESYS window The short form appears in the marker information on a graph The format of the spectral identification is as follows GENERAL FORMAT Line 1 Marker Frequency Marker Power Voltage Level the Frequency and Power appeat on different lines for marker text on the right of the graph Line 2 Coherency Number Signal Type Frequency Equation Origin Node Next Node Current Node Short Form OR Line 2 Coherency Number Signal Type Frequency Equation Origin Element Next Elemeht Current Element Long Form Coherency Number All signals in SPECTRASYS are grouped according to a coherency number All signals with the same coherency number are coherent with each other and will be treated as such in the simulator On the Calculate page of the System Analysis dialog box the user can conttol whether intermods and harmonics signals are added coherently or non coherently Signal Type D Desired Signal All signal types are categorized in SPECTRASYS Furth
431. ts Negative amplitudes are drawn below the x y plane This option has a checkmark beside it when selected Toggle Animation When selected the viewer animates the image in real or angle mode This is accomplished by multiplying the individual currents by exp jw where w cycles from 0 to 2pi and showing a sequence of snapshot images for increasing w This option has a checkmark beside it when selected Toggle Scale When selected the viewer displays the scale in the lower left of the viewer window This option has a checkmark beside it when selected Toggle Value Mode Real Mag Ang This option selects the current display option The options include the Real current value for current distribution snapshots and animation Magnitude for time averaged current values and Angle for the current phase delay distribution snapshots Toggle Wireframe When selected the viewer displays a wireframe version of the current plots A wireframe is created by drawing the outlines of the EMPOWER grid currents without filling the resulting polygons When this option is not selected the viewer fills the polygons resulting in a solid surface plot of the current patterns This option has a checkmark beside it when selected Load From User View 1 10 Loads the previously saved viewer settings for the selected view Saved settings can also be restored by pressing the number key corresponding to the desired setting Save
432. ts with the viewer and reflect on the results you observe The viewer is started by selecting Run Viewer from the right click menu of an EMPOWER simulation Workspace Window in GENESYS This section describes the viewer menu items and buttons It can be used to become acquainted with the interface in general as well as as a reference section A sample viewer screen is shown below The objects in this figure are described below A B G HIJKLMNOP Q amp Q R S zem iower Viewer V5 5 le View A File Menu Open Opens a new viewet data file Exit Exits the viewer Toggle Background Color Toggles the background from black to white ot white to black A white background is normally selected before a screen or window ptint 303 Simulation 304 Print Screen Sends a copy of the entire screen to a bitmap file or to a printer Print Window Sends a copy of the viewer window to a bitmap file or to a printer B View Menu The objects in this menu affect how the current image is displayed Top Home Shows a top down view of the current image This option can also be selected by pressing Home Front Ctrl Home Shows a front view of the current image This view is from the y axis at z 0 This option can also be selected by pressing Ctrl Home Side Ctrl End Shows a side view of the current image This view is from the x axis at z 0 This option can also be selected by pressing Ctrl End
433. ttenuatot on system toolbar Isolator on system toolbar Text 3dB Resistive Pad on main toolbar Resistots on lumped toolbar or press R Ground and output on main toolbar or press G and O Note Your node numbers may vary from the picture above depending upon how you dtaw the circuit This simple circuit will illustrate the capability of SPECTRASYS to include lumped elements unlike other types of system simulatots Note The walkthrough at this point is saved in Examples SPECTRASYS Walkthrough 1 Create Schematic WSP Next we will add a SPECTRASYS simulation to the workspace To add the SPECTRASYS simulation 1 2 3 4 18 Right click on the Simulations Data tab in the workspace window Select Add System Simulation Accept the name System1 On the Settings tab change the Measurement Bandwidth Channel to 1 MHz Add a source by clicking on the Add button in the source grid Walkthrough SPECTRASYS System Simulation Parameters Eg General Paths Calculate Composite Spectrum Options Design To Simulate B chi y Measurement Bandwidth Nominal Impedance 50 Ohms Channel MHz You must enter the channel bandwidth here before simulation a GR IAk IV Automatic Recalculation cin O 77 Sources Cancel Apply Help 5 The Soutce dialog box will open as shown System Source Parameters xi Source Name Source Input Port fi M
434. tton Rotates the current image counter clockwise in the plane of the screen The center of the viewer image window is always the center of rotation This option can also be selected by pressing Page Down L Rotate Right Button Rotates the cutrent image counter clockwise in a horizontal plane perpendicular to the screen The center of the viewer image window is always the center of rotation M Rotate Left Button Rotates the cutrent image clockwise in a horizontal plane perpendicular to the screen The center of the viewer image window is always the center of rotation N Rotate Down Button Rotates the cutrent image backwatd in a vertical plane perpendicular to the screen The center of the viewer image window is always the center of rotation O Rotate Up Button Rotates the current image forward in a vertical plane perpendicular to the screen The center of the viewer image window is always the center of rotation P Top Button Shows a top down view of the current image This option can also be selected by pressing the Home key Q Front Button Shows a front view of the current image This view is from the y axis at z 0 This option can also be selected by pressing Ctrl Home R Side Button Shows a side view of the current image This view is from the x axis at z 0 This option can also be selected by pressing Ctrl End S Oblique Button 307 Simulation Shows an oblique view of the cutren
435. ttt ttt et 1 l rtd o BOB GB B 4 l Itt l l ttt BOR B ORO l 2222 DA EMPOWER will move all surfaces to the nearest grid cell before analyzing a circuit EMPOWER maps the structure onto the borders of the cell not onto the space inside the cell A slightly more complex example which does not exactly fit the grid is shown below There ate three important things to notice in this figure 1 The stub line going up is about 2 1 2 cells wide but is approximated by EMPOWER as being 2 cells wide 2 The chamfered corner is approximated by a stairstep 3 The viahole near the end of the stub is represented by an asterisk in the listing 0123456789012345 LA oo 14 T 13 pp4ue 469 4 ed 12 P dd dg SEES ERE 11 opt pd ddpyda 10 Bhd B ERE ERAI lied EE EBEN Tide tk Ae Siete d E S 6444 AI EE EE eS 4 Ettr HHHH b dd ddodots 43i 2 44 rrr ib ak ee ee hea 2222 l 0 A close up is shown below where you can see how metal and ports are mapped onto the borders of the cells The presence of metal or conductors along the grid causes EMPOWER to close the connections along the grid The presence of an EMPort causes the line to be opened creating an open circuit which turns into a port in the final data file 262 EMPOWER Basics Ex Jx Vx Fe By By Ez Jy p p ExJx x a B Note It is possible to make a line so narrow that it maps to one border
436. turns on the signals to Maximum Amplitude Step percentage of full signal If convergence is reached at this step it takes another equal step If convergence is not reached it decreases the step size and tries at the lower signal level Some circuits will converge in a single 100 step Others will require a smaller step to find the solution If a smaller step is required it will be faster to start with that step If the step size is too small the simulator may waste time calculating intermediate steps to find the final solution Convergence speed can be improved by setting Maximum Amplitude Step to the ideal step Krylov Subspace Iterations When the Jacobian matrix gets very large it can become very slow to calculate and use Krylov subspace iterations can dramatically reduce the size of the matrix and thus speed up calculations of very large circuits In general however Krylov will have more convetgence issues than full Jacobian steps Also for smaller circuits Krylov may be slower than full Jacobian steps For very large problems try selecting Krylov to reduce memoty requirements and speed convergence Nonlinear noise analysis NNA allows a nonlinear analysis to take into account internal citcuit noise It based on an approximation of continuous noise spectra by discrete spectra with spectral components having random equal distributed phases in the pi pi band Due to the stochastic nature of the noise analysis the algorithm does
437. type is not available use the Ln files instead Otherwise they are completely identical to the Ln files described earlier Written by User Type Text Can be safely edited Yes Average size 1Kbyte Use Specifying electrical losses These files ate used to specify the impedance of conductors in ohms per square These files ate used in the EMPOWER layers setup dialog box or in the TPL file The files are formatted just like RX files in GENESYS Written by EMPOWER Type Text Can be safely edited Yes Average size 5 to 50 Kbytes but may be latger Use Contains S Parameter data calculated by EMPOWER This file contains the S Parameter data written by EMPOWER It is in the industry standard S2P format and can be loaded into most RF and Microwave simulators Even though these files can be edited they will be overwritten whenever EMPOWER is rerun EMPOWER File Descriptions Written by User or GENESYS Type Text Can be safely edited Yes Average size 1 to 5Kbytes Use Describing circuit to EMPOWER This file contains a complete description of the circuit to be analyzed by EMPOWER GENESYS will create this file automatically whenever EMPOWER is run from the EMPOWER menu in GENESYS Even though this files can be edited it will be ovetwritten if EMPOWER is rerun from within GENESYS Written by GENESYS Type Binary Can be safely edited Yes but only using GENESYS Average size 10 to 2 000 Kbytes Use Contains comp
438. uch as the case when lots of spectral components appear on the same graph NOTE This option must be selected in order to view the origination and identification of spectral components See the Identifying Spectral Otigin section for more information Show Totals Shows a trace representing the total power traveling for each direction of travel through a node For example if three elements wete connected at a particular node then power would be flowing in three different directions A unique color would represent each trace Show Signals Shows a trace for each intentional signal source that was applied to an input or output pott Show Intermods and Harmonics Shows a trace for each intermod and harmonic spectral component Show Noise Shows a trace fot each noise component Enable Analyzer Mode This checkbox enables the analyzer mode and its settings This mode can help the engineer visualize what the simulated spectrum would look like on a common spectrum analyzer The analyzer mode has been added to allow the user to cotrelate the simulation data with spectrum analyzer data measured in the lab This mode affects only the graphed results and in nowise will affect the integrated measurements Resolution Bandwidth RBW The analyzer mode can be thought of just like a spectrum analyzer that has a sweeping receiver that peak detects the total power within the resolution bandwidth For the analyzer mode the user can specify the res
439. uencies are in megahertz The data follows after the format specifier A typical line for this two port file is 500 64 23 12 5 98 03 70 8 37 In this case 500 is the frequency in megahertz The magnitudes of 11 S21 12 and S22 are 64 12 5 03 and 8 respectively The phases ate 23 98 70 and 37 degrees respectively Alternatively Y parameter data may be used The format specifier could be HGHZYRIR1 This would indicate rectangular unnormalized Y parameter data with frequencies in GHz A typical line is 30 0 3E 4 9E 3 8E 3 2E 5 0 1E 4 1E 3 In this case the frequency in gigahertz is 30 The real values of Y11 Y21 Y12 and Y22 are 0 9E 3 2E 5 and 1E 4 mhos respectively The imaginary values are 3E 4 8E 3 0 and 1E 3 mhos respectively A sample S parameter data file is shown below The only portion of the file required for GENESYS is the segment in the middle with frequencies and S parameter data Lines in the data file beginning with are comments and are ignored The noise data at the end of the file is used for noise figure analysis Noise is discussed in a later section AT41435 S AND NOISE PARAMETERS Vcez8V Ic 10mA LAST UPDATED 06 1 89 HGHZS MAR 50 IFREQ S11 S21 12 S22 0 1 80 32 24 99 157 011 82 93 12 0 5 50 110 1 2 30 108 033 52 61 28 1 0 40 152 6 73 85 049 56 51 30 1 5 38 176 4 63 71 063 59 48 32 2 0 39 166 3 54 60 080 58 46 37 2 5 41 156 2 91 53 095 61 44
440. uit contains lumped elements you can use vety few frequency points for the EMPOWER runs Since the lumped elements are not included in the EMPOWER data there are generally many fewer resonances and the data interpolates much more accurately In this case you may want to only use 2 or 3 points in the electromagnetic analysis while showing the results of the entire network with 100 points or more specified in the Co Simulation Sweep in the EMPOWER Options Dialog box For a complete example which takes advantage of this property see the Narrowband Interdigital example 301 EMPOWER Viewer and Antenna Patterns This section describes how to launch the EMPOWER viewer program and how to use it to visualize and interpret currents or voltages generated by EMPOWER It also describes the viewer interface The EMPOWER viewer helps you visualize current distribution and densities in a board layout It processes current density magnitude and angle and plots them as two ot three dimensional static or dynamic graphs These plots provide insight into circuit behavior and often suggest modifications which improve the performance Most electromagnetic simulators include visualization tools The EMPOWER viewer has distinct advantages such as three dimensional graphs true animation capabilities and precise information about current phase The full potential of the EMPOWER viewer is tealized with practice so we encourage you to investigate your circui
441. ulation 112 the cascaded intermod analysis past the point where the interfering signals are filtered will result in erroneous results 2 They assume all stages ate perfectly matched 3 They assume a two equal tone analysis 4 They assume infinite reverse isolation 5 They don t identify weak links in a cascaded chain In SPECTRASYS both desired and interfering signals are created and set to the frequency as they would appear in the real system These interferers need not be limited to two tones All intermods created from these signals will be passed on their actual power levels and not erroneous assumptions Consequently intermod measurements will be accurate no matter whether the interferers are in band or out of band Calculate Intermods Along Path NOTE Intermods will always be created and appear in spectrum plots as long as Calculate Intermods is checked When checked located on the Calculate page enables cascaded ntermod measurements Calculate Intermods must be checked in order to make intermod measurements Cascaded intermod equations have serious limitations and are NOT used by SPECTRASYS Two intermod analysis modes exist in Spectrasys Automatic 2 Tone and Manual Manual Advanced Mode In this mode the user must create all interfering sources and at least a single desired source This mode is not restricted to only two tones The user can specify as many tones as desired and the location of the ton
442. um gain and gain circles Each parameter type has advantages and disadvantages Carson 1 and Altman 2 provide additional information S Parameter Basics S parameters have earned a prominent position in RF circuit design analysis and measurement Parameters used eatlier in RF design such as Y parameters require opens or shorts on ports during measurement This is a nearly impossible constraint for high frequency broadband measurements Scattering parameters 3 4 S parameters are defined and measured with the ports terminated in a characteristic reference impedance Modern network analyzers are well suited for measuring S parameters Because the networks being analyzed are often employed by insertion in a transmission medium with a common characteristic reference impedance S parameters have the additional advantage Linear Simulation that they relate directly to commonly specified performance parameters such as insertion gain and return loss Two port S parameters are defined by considering a set of voltage traveling waves When a voltage wave from a source is incident on a netwotk a portion of the voltage wave is transmitted through the network and a portion is reflected back toward the source Incident and reflected voltage waves may also be ptesent at the output of the netwotk New vatiables are defined by dividing the voltage waves by the squate root of the reference impedance The square of the magnitude of these new variables
443. umbered modally related groups of ports are counted as one Also if two ports are identical then only the first one will create a Ln file Written by EMPOWER Type Text Can be safely edited Yes Average size 50K to 200K but may be larger Use Gives all calculated data and grid mapping from EMPOWER in human readable form This file is overwritten whenever EMPOWER is run It should be carefully checked whenever a new circuit is analyzed especially if that circuit was described manually from a text TPL file The following sections describe the contents of a listing file Note Some of the information described below is only output if Output additional info in listing file is checked ot La is specified QCHK SECTION This section allows you check the quality of the solution Entries include Min media wavelength to mesh size ratios should be at least 20 Thinning out thresholds Specifies the maximum numbet of lines in a row which can be thinned out Max box size to media wavelength ratios If the box is too large you will have box resonances If this line ends with an exclamation mark it may be too large See the Box Modes section for more details PACKAGE STRUCTURE This section is only present when the Extra Details in Listing File option is used It yp g gives a summaty of the substrate and metal layers used as well as cell sizes MEMORY SECTIONS Several memory sections throughout the listing fil
444. urrent schematic The oscillator frequency and note voltage will be filled in by the simulator after a successful run The Harmonic balance dialog establishes a default value for the number of harmonics Using the default values results in faster simulation Having established a working oscillator this value may be changed to imptove accuracy Generally the default values will yield sufficient accuracy Z GENESYS 2003 03 Spectrum of HB1 Workspace Harbec Osc Example Bt Edt yew Workspace acbons Took Graph Synthess Window Hep ISM nr Se 3a B m E Xx Spectrum of HB1 J able ca fect VPROSE foscos 12 626 Lialiweo 0000 nu 425 2632 280 W059 665 54752 SBO 6B 721075 Freq vo DEM PI error 8 332384030 EXt EXIT CONVERGED Une 10 Selecting the Oscillator tab allows to enter the search range for analysis This gives the simulator a range of frequencies to search over to find the exact oscillation frequency For resonator elements such as crystals addition points may be required to find the exact frequency considering the higher Q 63 Simulation HARBEC Options General Advanced Oscillator Design To Simulate Signal Sources OSCPORT 1 Maximum Mixing Order 10 Temperature 27 0 C Maximum Analysis Erequency Calculate v Automatic Recalculation AutoSave Workspace After Calculation C oscillator Frequency Search Only
445. urs between segments of the signal metalization This is nearly certain to perturb the circuit responses as the operating frequency apptoaches or exceeds the first resonant frequency of the cavity While EMPOWER inherently predicts these effects they may have a significant destructive effect on the performance of your designs Box modes are clearly illustrated in this example In the formulation which follows we use definitions from the section on Geometty The height of the box in the z direction is h the length of the box in the x direction is a and the width of the box in the y direction is b The resonant wave number for a rectangular cavity is 2 v Kn X E 2 2 a j h J b MKS units and the resonant frequency when homogeneously filled with material with a relative dielectric constant of e is kc mnp 20 J gt f mnp where c is the velocity of light in a vacuum 2 997925x108m sec The frequency of the dominant mode is f101 lowest resonant frequency and in a vacuum we have LA Aa exu l 1 2 2 2 Ya b In air with linear dimensions in inches and the frequency in megahertz fiy 5900 MHz e inches 77 va fioi 2 321 Simulation With linear dimensions in millimeters and the frequency in gigahertz l 2 lt i fioi 149 8GHz emm a For example in air er 1 0006 with a 2 4 inch 0 5 inch high box b 101 6mm a 50 8mm and h 12 7mm Then 410 69 14 and f101 329
446. vatiable is used the model is calculated once per frequency and FREQ is just a normal number 151 Simulation 152 e Post processed variables cannot be used in IF THEN statements For example TF DB S21 gt 5 THEN Gain Gain 10 is not legal Instead you should use the IFF and IFTRUE functions In this case you can state Gain Gain IFTRUE DB S21 gt 5 10 This is because the equations are only calculated once not at each frequency e Al calculations are deferred until requested This means that when any of the statements shown above ate encountered the required calculation is simply noted Later when the data is needed the calculation is performed What does this mean to most users Simply that post processed calculations ate very fast do not require a lot of memory overhead and only calculate when necessary e The USING statement is a big convenience if you are writing many expressions With it you only need to specify the simulation data and design once The USING statement applies for all measurements specified after it and it does not carry over into functions For example USING Linear1 FILTER Gain DB S21 InputReflection DB S11 OutputReflection DB S22 Delay GD S21 Note You must specify the period before the measurement This tells GENESYS that you are getting post processed data If you leave out the period you will get errors like Unknown Variable 11 Several functions in GENESYS are for u
447. w Intermods and Harmonics box Identification Creation Equation Sources Sources ate a very powerful feature of the SPECTRASYS There are 4 basic types of sources They are e Continuous Wave CW e Modulated e Noise e User Defined Signal soutces CW Modulated and User Defined are defined by a center frequency bandwidth power level phase shift and number of points Every one of these parameters can be tuned by placing a question mark in front of the parameter All sources are assumed to have a uniform spectral density Every soutce can be easily enabled ot 127 Simulation disabled by checking or unchecking the Enable checkbox in the source table on the General page of the System Simulation dialog box System Simulation Parameters x General Paths Calculate Composite Spectrum Options Design To Simulate Sem y Measurement Bandwidth Nominal Impedance so Dhms Channel fies MHz You must enter the channel bandwidth here before simulation aoe IV Automatic Recalculation Sources Name Port Description Enable A s mM Edt Delete Pis Iv Edt Delete Sour MHz 80 dBm 0 De By clicking on the Edit button of any soutce the following System Source Parameters dialog box comes up This page is used to enter parameters for each source as described below Source Name Input Port fi y 1v Inclu
448. wizard is a valuable tool that can help the user create the proper syntax for post processed equations The equation wizatd can be accessed in one of two locations 1 from the graph properties dialog box and 2 from the main menu under the Tools submenu Note The equation window must be the active window before the Equation Measurement Wizard menu selection will become active Graphing an Equation The equation wizatd can be used to create an equation that can be plotted on graph See graph properties and the Equation Wizard dialog box for more information on graphing equations Equations in the Equations Section While typing equations in the Equations Section of the workspace the Equation Measurement Wizard can be accessed from the Tools submenu located in the main menu Selecting Equation Measurement Wizard will bring up the Measurement Wizatd allowing the user to select the workspace and the desired simulation Another 153 Simulation Measurement Wizard dialog box will then appear where the user will be able to select the desired function and operator Note Equations will be inserted into the Equations Section at the current location of the cursor Logical Operators The NOT AND OR operators ate called logical operators They can be used to combine relational tests such as A 5 amp B gt 6 They can also be used in binary math as described below Note The information below is for advanced
449. work to determine if additional matching structures would be necessaty to aide in the maximum transfer of power This data is already available as a result of our linear two port simulation Ideally 11 S22 In the case that the port impedances are divergent closing the loop might prevent sustained oscillation 61 Simulation 62 GENESYS 2003 03 Osct Open Loop Gain Workspace Harbec Osc Example Le Tee Edt Wew Workspace acions Toos Graph Synthess window Hep 5x T EELEE KAIKILLE Bu Me LAVAS ZAS AAA Osc1 Open Loop Gain 07 T E 45 160 lizslony MAGIS21 8 GB Synthesis A 9 osci 8 Designs Models f Closed Schematic df N4416 Link to SPI 49 Osc Schematic amp Smuletons Dete goa E HBI Ciosod Sj Osct 10010 200 5 S Oupus Oscl Open Loop C Osc1 Open Loop s 8 Oscillation Criteria E Parameters of HB1 I Spectrum of HB1 B Wevotonns tor HB amp Equations 12 Equations tor HB1 a5 200 seek 13000 134530 130080 asa 2031 aSa 7001 W953i 152090 194531 157031 f vela Freq Miz x e masa ANG S2I t pa D Having met the conditions for gain phase and match the next step is to verify oscillator performance and accurately determine the frequency of operation power delivered to a load and the harmonic content To accomplish this we use the OSCPORT element along with HARBEC analysis We begin by connecting the two ports together to close the
450. y either by right clicking on the simulation icon and selecting Recalculate Now or by clicking the recalculation calculator button on the main tool bar Auto save Workspace After Calculation Checking this box will cause GENESYS to save the current workspace after the simulation is complete This is particularly useful with long simulations or simulations that run overnight If this box is checked when optimizing the file will be saved after each optimization step Recalculate Now Dismisses the dialog box and starts the simulator if required If the circuit has already been simulated and has not been changed the simulator will not calculate again Oscillator Frequency Search Only Just perform analysis of oscillation frequency not full HarBEC simulation Noise Parameters Calculate Nonlinear noise Adds noise tone This options allows the user to add a noise tone with its harmonics to the simulation Noise Tone Frequency in Hz of a noise tone that will be added to the harmonic balance simulation Maximum Noise Harmonics Maximum number of noise tones that will be used in the harmonic balance simulation HARBEC DC amp Harmonic Balance OK Dismisses the dialog box If automatic recalculation is on and a simulation is needed the simulator will run after the box is dismissed Cancel Dismiss the dialog box canceling any changes made HARBEC Options x General Advanced oscilator Relative Tolerance
451. y generated by Input Port y Y Coherent Addition resina z well as Gain Test Power Level 80 de IV Fast Intermod Shape simulation ESS en ee E 50 dBm Maximum Order 2o send 2 Tone Power Level rv Calculate Noise Iv Calculate Intermods affect the Signal used for IIP3 01P3 10 1 System Temperature 5 ATE Thermal Noise 173 91 dBm Hz Noise Points for Entire Bandwidth fi 0 Add n extra noise points in MHz bandwidth at each signal frequency Defaults to channel bandwidth Factory Defaults Cancel Intermods and Harmonics For speed calculation reasons the calculation of harmonics and intermods can be disabled By default they are both enabled The user can also specify what types of signals will create intermods and harmonics See the Calculate Intermods Harmonics section for more information Harmonics Harmonics will be created by the non linear elements when this option is selected Calculation time for harmonics is typically vety quick Intermods Intermods will be created by the non linear elements when this option is selected Intermod Simulation time depends on the number of input signal levels of the resulting intermods and number of non linear stages From Sources Only When this option is selected harmonics and intermods will only be created from source signals that initiated at a port All undesired products created along the path will be excluded from the calculation of h
452. ze Generates contour plot of 2D data expression on a Smith Chart Expression is a mandatory parameter the remainder are optional parameters Expression must contain coordinates real imag and values for a given measurement and a Thin Plate Spline is generated from which the contours are generated The smoothParm is generally a number between 0 no smoothing and 1 very strong smoothing minX maxX minY and maxY control the domain for which data is generated primaryGridSize and secondaryGridSize control the resolution of the contour generation primary should be a smaller number than secondaty COS expression cosine COSH expression hyperbolic cosine COUNT expression returns the number of data points contained in post processed data or the size of an array See Arrays or Post Processing later in the equations reference DB10 expression returns 10 log expression DB20 expression returns 20 log expression EXP expression value of e raised to expression FIX expression truncates the expression Examples FIX 5 6 is 5 and FIX 1 4 is 1 EN E exptression Calculates the complete elliptic integral of the second kind FEN K expression Calculates the complete elliptic integral of the first kind GET string Gets a measurement from a string variable Can be useful for constructing a measurement from pieces of text See Post Processing later in the equations reference GETINDEPVALUE exptession in

GENESYS 2004 Enterprise Simulation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents